784
Requirement Gathering Questions 1.1.1.1. Task Definition Questions: Q: 1) How do you plan the processing of a maintenance notification? Do you use tasks during processing? Explanation: Step-by-step processing of a notification using defined tasks.  A: Q: 2) If y ou use notification tasks, give some examples.  A: Q: 3) Who is responsible for per forming a maintenance task? Explanation: Who is involved? Which p artner functions do they have? How are they represented in the system?  A: Q: 4) Do predefined follow-up tasks result automatically from completed tasks? Explanation: In Customizing, you can define follow-up actions for tasks that are triggered automatically for defined business operations. You can therefore define chains of follow-up actions, which the system executes in order.  A: Q: 5) Is there a set procedure for how you react to malfunctions? Explanation: Define a response profile.  A: Q: 6) Do you perform maintenance work with or without entering costs? Explanation: If you do not en ter costs for maintenance wor k in your or ganization, you can use tasks to plan the individual processing operations, without having to use a maintenance order.  A: 1.1.1.2. Notification Printing Questions: Q: 1) Do you print notifications?  A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 1/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.1.1.1. Task Definition

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you plan the processing of a maintenance notification? Do you use tasksduring processing?

Explanation: Step-by-step processing of a notification using defined tasks.

 A:

Q: 2) If you use notification tasks, give some examples.

 A:

Q: 3) Who is responsible for performing a maintenance task?

Explanation: Who is involved? Which partner functions do they have? How are theyrepresented in the system?

 A:

Q: 4) Do predefined follow-up tasks result automatically from completed tasks?

Explanation: In Customizing, you can define follow-up actions for tasks that are triggeredautomatically for defined business operations. You can therefore define chains of follow-upactions, which the system executes in order.

 A:

Q: 5) Is there a set procedure for how you react to malfunctions?

Explanation: Define a response profile.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you perform maintenance work with or without entering costs?

Explanation: If you do not enter costs for maintenance work in your organization, you canuse tasks to plan the individual processing operations, without having to use a maintenanceorder.

 A:

1.1.1.2. Notification Printing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print notifications?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 2: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 2/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Provide some examples of the output format(s) for notifications.

1.1.1.3. Entry of Technical Findings

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment wasbroken, damage, cause of damage) about a maintanence problem in order to create aservice history or to enable further evaluations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Which technical data should be recorded and who is responsible?

 A:

Q: 3) When do you document technical findings?

Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technicallycompleted?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technicalinformation? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want tohave codes.

 A:

1.1.1.4. Notification Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archivingpolicy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

1.1.2. Order

1.1.2.1. Order Creation/Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What different types of maintenance do you have in your company (for example,preventive maintenance, repair, installation)? Create a list of the maintenance types andoutline the differences in planning and execution.

 A:

Page 3: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 3/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Mark in the following list whether maintenance tasks are performed by employeesand/or contractors.

 A:

Q: 3) What information about labor resources (for example, availability and number ofpeople, duration of work, split of operation) do you require from the system when planningmaintenance orders?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you proceed with an external assignment with the sub-contractor? Chooseone or more of the following options.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in asingle form?

 A:

Q: 6) Will several technicians work on the same maintenance task?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you want to assign individual operations to particular people?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to configure a special search help for partners in your order?

Explanation: For example, a search help for particular people (with particular qualifications),which are assigned to a particular work center. For the partner function of type "Person", it ispossible to set an indicator for a special search help for partners.

 A:

Q: 9) For which operation types do you want to represent the operation description usingservice specifications?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to define skills and/or qualifications for maintenance order operations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you provide the technicians who perform the preventive maintenance with a list ofactivities? If yes, how detailed are they?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use pre-defined task lists in work order planning?

Page 4: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 4/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) If yes, which of the following types of task lists do you require?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, dailyrequirements, individual requirements)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning

phase?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you want to generate purchase requisitions and reservations when the order iscreated?

Explanation: You can configure whether reservations and purchase requisitions aregenerated when the order is created or only when the order is released.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance orderduring the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to generate collective purchase requisitions or individual purchaserequisitions for each external item?

 A:

Q: 20) How do you want to plan special tools, documents and so on, which are required toexecute maintenance activities?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you use work order permits, for example, to manage working conditions or safetymatters?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 5: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 5/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 22) At what intervals do you want to schedule work (for example, daily, weekly,monthly)?

 A:

Q: 23) How do you want to prioritize work?

 A:

Q: 24) At which level do you plan work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification, oran individual person and so on)?

 A:

Q: 25) How detailed is your planning (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,capacity scheduling)?

 A:

Q: 26) Should the capacity load, which was formed for all the capacity types of the PP workcenters, be reduced for the duration of a maintenance task planned in a work order?

 A:

Q: 27) Do you want to use paging in your company as an additional form ofcommunication?

 A:

Q: 28) Do you use maintenance orders for processing investment measures? If yes, shouldthe asset under construction be created automatically or manually?

 A:

Q: 29) Do you want the maintenance order to be integrated with one of the followingControlling components?

 A:1.1.2.2. Material Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Who performs material planning for orders in your company?

 A:

Q: 3) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, dailyrequirements, individual requirements)?

Page 6: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 6/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planningphase?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance orderduring the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Is there an approval procedure for external purchase orders and materialwithdrawals? If yes, describe it.

Explanation: Workflow, printing material withdrawal slips, signature rule.

 A:

1.1.2.3. Order Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard toworking conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.

 A:

Q: 2) If yes, who in your company is authorized to issue permits?

Explanation: Maintenance of authorizations for the corresponding transactions.

 A:

1.1.2.4. Order Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Who in your organization is allowed to release maintenance orders (for example,maintenance planner, dispatcher)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you need to restrict the release until a process is completed or authorizationobtained? If yes, describe the process.

 A:

Q: 3) Are there instances where orders should be released automatically?

Explanation: For example, for orders generated automatically from maintenance planning.

Page 7: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 7/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

1.1.2.5. Work Clearance Management

Questions:

Q: 1) What should be the relationship between the objects in Work Clearance Management(order, work approval, work clearance application, work clearance document and so on)?

Explanation: Definition of a model at plant level (Customizing). A standard model andenhanced model have already been predefined.

 A:

Q: 2) Do conflicts exist between the conditions of different technical objects? Define these.

 A:

Q: 3) Which different approval steps are required for your work clearance process?Describe the concept or process flow of your approval process.

Explanation: Configuration or selection of the required status.

 A:

Q: 4) Which employee is responsible for which types of approvals? Describe theapplications.

Explanation: Authorizations in Customizing.

 A:

Q: 5) Which employee should be informed about which subject or object condition at whichtime?

Explanation: Possible hierarchical display of permits and employees involved.

 A:

Q: 6) Should the employees involved later in the approval process be informedautomatically of the progress of previous approval levels (Workflow)?

Explanation: Configure workflow.

 A:

1.1.2.6. Order Printing

Questions:

Page 8: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 8/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Identify the internal papers that you require for the different people and order typesinvolved (for example, job ticket for employee, picking list).

 A:

Q: 2) Provide some representative layout examples.

Q: 3) Do you assign printers to the people involved?

Explanation: Printers and shop papers can be assigned to specific users.

 A:

1.1.2.7. Order Execution

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: This process is only for maintenance activities performed manually on technicalsystems by the technician.

Explanation: This is only a note.

 A:

Q: 2) How is material withdrawn for the order?

Explanation: Rough decription of process flow, the way in which the employee executing thetask obtains the necessary materials.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you work with closed or open warehouses?

Explanation: Closed warehouses make it necessary to use material withdrawal slips,whereas open warehouses do not. It may be that an approval procedure is required formaterial withdrawal.

 A:

Q: 4) Should the warehouse be informed of imminent material withdrawals using a materialavailability slip?

 A:

1.1.3. Capacity Planning

1.1.3.1. Capacity Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Is it necessary to determine if a person is available to do a task? (If yes, considerusing employee shift scheduling.)

 A:

Page 9: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 9/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Do you want to change capacity/work centers for periods with overload? (If yes,consider changing the work center/assignment/activity dates manually from the evaluationreports.)

 A:

Q: 3) Do you do short term capacity planning? (If yes, ensure the time horizon for thecapacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period. If no, ensure the time horizon for thecapacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period.)

 A:

Q: 4) Do you utilize your personnel resources/capacities per process or enterprise-wide? (Ifyes, consider using work center hierarchies.)

 A:

Q: 5) Are resources to be shared across departments (for example plant maintenance andprojects)?

Explanation: If yes, consider how you want to define the priorities between the departmentsand make sure that you can use different order types at the work center.

 A:

Q: 6) Which order type do you want to use for capacity evaluation?

 A:

1.1.3.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you process the overload on capacities/wk centers? (If yes, you could use thecapacity leveling functions- dispatching and deallocating).

 A:

Q: 2) Do you prefer to use a graphical planning tool for capacity leveling? (If yes, use thegraphical capacity planning tool If no, consider using the tabular capacity planning tool.)

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to assign available capacities to order operations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) When you split order operations, do you want the system to create capacity loadsautomatically for individual people?

Page 10: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 10/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: See the release note for 4.6C: "Automatic Creation of Employee RequirementsRecords (Splits)".

 A:

Q: 5) Which type of planning table do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 6) Which planning strategies will you use for Sequencing?

 A:1.1.4. Modification of Technical Systems

1.1.4.1. Installation, Dismantling and Modification of Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Are installation operations in your company performed by your own technicians orassigned externally?

 A:

Q: 2) How are dismantling procedures performed at your company?

 A:

Q: 3) Which components are exchanged?

 A:

Q: 4) Are dismantled parts refurbished? If yes, describe the refurbishment process.

 A:

Q: 5) Should a history be managed for the exchanged parts?

 A:

Q: 6) Who documents the modification of a technical system and when?

Explanation: For example, the maintenance planner, maintenance engineer and so on.

 A:

Q: 7) Do changes also have to be made to the system master during modification work?

Explanation: Reconcile with Asset Accounting.

 A:

1.1.5. Material Movements

1.1.5.1. Goods Issue Processing

Page 11: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 11/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Who posts the goods issue?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you record materials issued from stores?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you document materials supplied by the subcontractors?

 A:

Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post theirwithdrawal in the system?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a workorder?

 A:

Q: 7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 8) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 9) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 10) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,available stock, etc.)?

Page 12: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 12/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and whatinformation do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

1.1.6. Completion Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you or your employees enter completion confirmations of time?

Explanation: Time completion confirmations can be entered using IW41 or alternatively, by

using CATS.

 A:

Q: 2) Who confirms orders in your company?

 A:

Q: 3) Are the completion confirmations in your company entered at the level of personnelnumber?

Explanation: This function is required for CATS; it can be used with transaction IW41.

 A:

Q: 4) Should the superior approve the times recorded by the employees?

Explanation: The permit function for completion confirmations is realized using CATS.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you also want to confirm used material at the same time as the time confirmation?

Explanation: This function is limited using CATS, since it involves a jump to the goods issuetransaction in inventory management.

 A:

Q: 6) Should the technical completion (for example, for breakdown times, causes ofdamage, tasks and so on) be made at the same time as the time confirmation?

Page 13: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 13/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: The technical completion confirmation is part of the maintenance or servicenotification. This can be created and saved using transaction IW41.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you also want to enter measurement readings with the completion confirmation?

Explanation: Measurement documents can also be entered at the same time usingtransaction IW41.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use the integration with the HR module?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you create completion confirmations centrally, or does each employee enter their

own times themselves?

Explanation: A central completion confirmation requires you to issue confirmation slips toyour employees. In some cases, it may also require you to configure the entry using differentorders and people in a screen template.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you issue confirmation slips to your employees?

Explanation: Is required for the entry of a central completion confirmation. Requires printsettings (possibly SAPScript).

 A:

Q: 11) How many times per day do your employees enter their working time?

Explanation: Important for the transfer frequency when using CATS.

 A:

Q: 12) Will you use a Plant Data Collection (PDC) system for your completionconfirmations?

Explanation: On communication channel 3. Only completed time tickets can be confirmed(time interval, duration), but no start/end times (stages).

 A:

Q: 13) Do you enter the working times of contractors? If yes, how should the externalservices be entered?

Page 14: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 14/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:1.1.6.1. Individual Time Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you enter the absolute duration or period of time (from...to)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you differentiate the times entered according to other activity types (for example,to distinguish between normal work hours and overtime)?

Explanation: Reconcile with Controlling.

 A:

Q: 3) Is the confirmation of your services person-based?

Explanation: If yes, is there a company agreement?

 A:

Q: 4) In what unit and with what accuracy do you want to enter services?

 A:

1.1.6.2. Overall Completion Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Which employees confirm which data?

Explanation: Configure a profile for the overall completion confirmation.

 A:

Q: 2) Are internal services confirmed?

Explanation: Set overall confirmation profile.

 A:

1.1.6.3. Time Sheet Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) In which systems do you track employee master data? Are wage rates onlymaintained in the R/3 System or in other systems too?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use this data as a basis for indirect activity allocation to cost objects, costcenters, internal orders and so on?

Page 15: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 15/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Explain how such a time sheet is structured today and how it should be structured infuture (what information do you need on the time sheet?).

 A:

Q: 4) Does everyone who records working time have a personal number in HR? (If not,CATS is not supported.)

Explanation: You require at least one HR mini master record before you can use CATS.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which of your employees should fill out timesheets?

Explanation: Depending on the person entering the information, different time profiles can becreated. For example, an administrator can enter times for many employees.

 A:

Q: 6) How do your employees enter and track working times?

 A:

Q: 7) Are the labor costs calculated based on actual costs or standard rates?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine these labor rates?

 A:

Q: 9) Please explain the procedure, how employees in your company track and report timetoday.

Explanation: For example, how do your developers in Research & Development determinethe time available for their projects: manually on paper, manually in Excel and so on?

 A:

Q: 10) In which system do you want to run payroll?

 A:

Page 16: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 16/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Are there special conditions for labor costs when employees work in differentcountries or for different profit centers (for example, if an employee from the UK works on aproject in Germany)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you enter labor in complete hours or clock time?

 A:

Q: 13) How do your employees enter trip costs? Are the trips linked to the recording ofworking time? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you use the SAP employee reporting system?

 A:

Q: 15) Identify the different categories of activity (activity types) that you use for estimation,planning and settlement purposes?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the various cost collectors, to which employees will charge time (forexample, cost centers, projects, internal orders)?

 A:

Q: 17) Do sub-contractors and other third party labor sources have to enter work usingtimesheets?

 A:

Q: 18) Are these external services settled to a cost center or directly to the project?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you record overtime?

 A:

Q: 20) How is the cost of overtime calculated? Do you have different types of overtime (forexample, time and a half, double time)?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you track indirect labor hours, such as vacation, sickness, holiday...? If yes,define the categories you require and their entry type.

 A:

Page 17: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 17/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 22) Which financial entries do you currently make for your labor distribution?

 A:

Q: 23) How do employees record their working time (time, detail, medium/system)?

 A:

1.1.6.4. Time Sheet Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) What is your current timesheet approval strategy for employees and externalservices?

Explanation: You can define the selection and layout.

 A:

Q: 2) Explain the permit procedure for working time or recording of activity allocation foryour employees.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you have an external reporting system for working times?

 A:

Q: 4) How many employees does the person responsible for approval manage?

Explanation: Consider using the CATS workflow to automate the approval process.

 A:

1.1.6.5. Forwarding of Time Sheet Data to PM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer recorded activity allocations to Controlling using the timesheet?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How often does this transfer take place (daily, weekly and so on)?

 A:

Q: 3) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,employee hours by cost center)?

 A:

Page 18: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 18/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.1.6.6. Time Sheet Report

Questions:

Q: 1) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,employee hours by cost center)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you need to see days that have not timesheet entries?

Explanation: There is a standard report for missing days.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you need an evaluation, do see the days on which personnel enter more than adefined number of hours?

Explanation: There is a standard report for overtime.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have to see the employee name in the documents for the receivingcomponent?

Explanation: Consider using a User Exit.

 A:

Q: 5) Do different roles need to see different timesheet information? (If yes, create reportvariants.)

 A:

1.1.6.7. Service Entry Sheet

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to process or document completion of the services performed by theservice provider?

 A:

1.1.6.8. Entry of Technical Findings

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment wasbroken, damage, cause of damage) about a maintanence problem in order to create aservice history or to enable further evaluations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 19: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 19/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Which technical data should be recorded and who is responsible?

 A:

Q: 3) When do you document technical findings?

Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technicallycompleted?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technicalinformation? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want tohave codes.

 A:

1.1.6.9. Measurement Document Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you measure and record the current condition of your equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? Describe the different measuring pointsand counters that you require for the different pieces of equipment.

 A:

Q: 2) How do you proceed if a measurement reading lies outside of a pre-definedmeasurement range?

 A:

1.1.6.10. Measurement Document Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to archive measurement documents? If so,provide a copy of yourdocument archiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

1.1.7. Settlement and Completion

1.1.7.1. Technical Order Completion

Questions:

Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is technically completed and when?

 A:

1.1.7.2. Order Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Who settles orders in your company and when?

 A:

Page 20: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 20/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) How do you want to settle maintenance orders in general?

 A:

Q: 3) How often and according to which rules do you want to settle orders ?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you intend to set up a profit center analysis within your company?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you want to examine your cost elements for the settlement of orders in greaterdetail?

 A:

1.1.7.3. Business Order Completion

Questions:

Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is fully completed (business completion) and when?

 A:

Q: 2) Which criteria do you use to decide whether work is fully completed?

 A:

1.1.7.4. Order Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to archive orders? If so, please provide a copy of your documentarchiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) How long do you want to retain orders in the system before they are archived?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to archive orders?

Explanation: You can archive orders with or without subsequent archiving.

 A:

1.1.7.5. Historical Order - Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to keep track of maintenance work that has alreadybeen completed?

Page 21: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 21/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

1.1.8. Information System

1.1.8.1. Evaluations of Plant Maintenance Information System [PMIS]

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

B. Organization

C.

D.

E. General Settings

F.

G.

H. Master Data1. General Master Records

1.1. Material Master

Questions:

Q: 1) Which departments/organizational units are responsible for maintaining the materialdata?

 A:

Page 22: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 22/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Is master data common across all departments (common master data)?

 A:

Q: 3) What is the default sales unit in sales processing and what are alternative salesunits?

 A:

Q: 4) Which types of materials do you distinguish between (examples, accruals, quantitystructures)?

 A:

Q: 5) How do these types differ regarding business processes (stock management,procurement, sales, and so on), data maintained, and persons responsible?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you group similar products together (for example, in divisions or material groups)?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you maintain additional statuses for your materials (such as sales status)?

 A:

Q: 8) If you have multiple plants, is your material normally supplied by a specific plant?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you maintain additional types of grouping for other processes (for example, rebate,statistics, commission or pricing)?

 A:

Q: 10) Is the creation of a multi-level hierarchy necessary for materials (product hierarchy)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record a minimum delivery quantity on your materials? If so, what happensduring sales order processing if a violation occurs?

 A:

Q: 12) Are there materials that must be shipped in certain multiples (delivery units)?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you record information on competitor products (sales support)?

Page 23: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 23/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 14) Can a material have different values in one plant? What are the criteria for thedifferent values?

 A:

Q: 15) According to which criteria, does your material master data let you select with regardto planned QM processes (for example, goods receipt inspection only for raw materials etc)?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you maintain material-specific technical terms of delivery?

 A:

Q: 17) Are the technical delivery terms stored online, and will you print these terms witheach purchase order?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you require your vendors to provide quality certificates (certificates ofconformance or certificates of analysis) either prior to or with material shipments? Describethe types of certificates you require.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you require your vendors to provide samples for approval prior to actual delivery?Please describe.

 A:

Q: 20) Do you block a vendor invoice for payment until the quality inspection has beensuccessfully completed?

Explanation: Note: The block can be removed manually if required.

 A:

Q: 21) Will you process recurring inspections for materials? (Note: This is only possible forbatch-managed materials). Please provide an example.

 A:

Q: 22) How many different materials do you procure on a regular basis?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you want to maintain a source list for the material types you will procure?

 A:

Page 24: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 24/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 24) Do you value your materials using a standard price, a moving average price, ordifferent valuation methods for different materials?

 A:

Q: 25) Each material must belong to exactly one material group. Which material groups doyou need to organize your materials?

 A:

Q: 26) Will you need to run MRP ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 27) How many different G/L accounts do you need for inventory?

 A:

Q: 28) Will you maintain specification data for your hazardous substances?

 A:

Q: 29) Are separate material master records (perhaps with a separate material type ornumbering system) used in the development and engineering/design processes? How andwhen are they converted to operational material number and type)?

 A:

Q: 30) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that needmaterial master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface?

 A:

Q: 31) Describe the structure and numbering system for material numbers(internal/external, specific to material type, other criteria).

 A:

Q: 32) Which material types do you use (please complete): FERT, HALB, ROH, KMAT,HAWA, FMHI, ...?

 A:

Q: 33) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for materials? Which languages arerelevant? How and when are they translated?

 A:

Q: 34) What types of texts do you maintain for your materials?

Page 25: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 25/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 35) Please describe the process for creating and adding to material data. Include releaseprocedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities,authorizations, involved systems, and so on.

 A:

Q: 36) Describe the change process for materials.

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding release procedure/status, importantsequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities, authorizations, involvedsystems, Engineering Change Management, revision levels, and so on.

 A:

Q: 37) Which cross-plant and plant-specific material statuses are necessary?

 A:

Q: 38) Do you need to customize the appearance of or add data fields to the materialmaster record (additional fields, customized material master, field selection, customer-specific field checks)?

 A:

Q: 39) Do you use classification for your material masters? For what reasons (storingaddition information, search functionality, or variant configuration)?

 A:

Q: 40) Do you classify standardized parts by loading DIN classes and characteristic datarecords?

 A:

Q: 41) Do you have different valuation techniques (for example, standard versus movingaverage)? If so, please explain which.

 A:

Q: 42) Do you have inventory valued in different currencies at the same facility?

 A:

Q: 43) Are your materials taxable?

 A:

Q: 44) For a material is there a main delivery location for a sales department?

Page 26: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 26/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 45) PM/CS: Do you need a material master especially for plant maintenance / customerservice with reduced information (just basic data and classification data)?

 A:

Q: 46) PM/CS: Do your maintenance or service equipment include major components thatyou want to deal with individually to compile separate histories? If so, describe thesecomponents.

 A:

1.2. Material BOM

Questions:

Q: 1) In which context do you use bills of material?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you need to use different BOMs for different applications, such as Production,Engineering, Plant Maintenance, and Costing (BOM usage)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use group BOMs for engineering/design and copy or assign them to plants atimplementation?

 A:

Q: 4) What change management functions do you require? How do you want to define thevalidity of BOMs (based on date/freely definable parameters)? Must existing change historiesbe transferred to the R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use other validity types (such as serial number, time period, or customer) inaddition to the "Valid from" date to control the validity of your BOM changes?

 A:

Q: 6) Describe the change process for material BOMs.

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding to release procedure/status,notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, Engineering ChangeManagement, revision levels, synchronization with current production orders, and so on.

 A:

Page 27: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 27/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Do you need a complete history of your BOM changes? For what reasons(documentation, different technical states in operational areas, other)? For what types ofBOMs? From what point in time (initial released status, other)?

 A:

Q: 8) Describe the process for creating and adding to material BOMs. Include releaseprocedure/status, notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, EngineeringChange Management, and so on.

 A:

Q: 9) Describe the change process for material BOMs. Include release procedure/status,notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, engineering changemanagement,revision levels, synchronization with current production orders, other.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to use one BOM to represent several similar materials (closed variant

BOM)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have several alternative BOMs for a material, depending on themanufacturing procedure or lot size, for example (multiple BOM)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you have products with a large number of variants? Do you need VariantConfiguration?

 A:

Q: 13) Which BOM maintenance functions do you require (copy functions, mass changes,and so on)?

 A:

Q: 14) What structure do your BOMs have? How many levels are there? How manycomponents are there on each level?

 A:

Q: 15) Do your single-level BOMs represent production levels and do you keep your BOMheader materials in stock? If not, do you produce non-stock items, or are some assemblies just used as structural elements in a BOM?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have different BOMs for a material in different plants?

 A:

Page 28: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 28/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) Which item categories (stock items, non-stock items, documents, texts) do you use?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you use sub-items?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you have recursive BOMs (the product contains a component with the samematerial number as the superior assembly)?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that needmaterial master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface?

 A:

Q: 21) Is an integration to external systems such as CAD systems or local PDM systemsneeded to transfer BOM data to the R/3 System? Please define your requirements forintegration (online, batch, controlled redundancy, post-processing in R/3, other).

 A:

Q: 22) If you use alternative items (one component can be replaced by another one), howdo you want one of several alternatives to be determined automatically?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you require mass changes for BOM maintenance? Please explain.

 A:

Q: 24) If you use alternative BOMs (several BOM structures exist parallel for the sameproduct at the same time), how do you want one of several alternatives to be determinedautomatically (by production version, lot size, or time)?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you produce co-products?

 A:

Q: 26) Approximately how many finished products and assemblies (header materials withBOMs) do you have?

 A:

Q: 27) Explain for what purposes you use phantom assemblies.

Page 29: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 29/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: A phantom assembly is a logical (rather than functional) grouping of materials.From a production point of view, these materials are not actually assembled to form aphysical unit.

 A:

Q: 28) Do you plan and cost the scrap expected in production? Please explain.

 A:

Q: 29) Do you produce co-products during the same process as the main product? (Theseitems are treated as material credit memos for costing and reduce manufacturing costs.)

 A:

Q: 30) Lead time offset: Are all your components to be staged at the same time?

 A:

1.3. Service Master

Questions:

Q: 1) Is it necessary for you to procure services from external suppliers? If so, do you wantto structure and manage these services? What kind of services do you procure?

 A:

1.4. Batch

1.4.1. Batch Master

Questions:

Q: 1) General: Do you manage your materials in batches? In what areas (inventorymanagement, production, sales and distribution, warehouse management, qualitymanagement) do you use batches?

 A:

Q: 2) General: How many batches do you have in a particular period of time?

 A:

Q: 3) General: Do you want to copy the batch numbers from your vendors into the SAPSystem? Do you want this to be entered using a batch master record or a characteristic(classification)?

 A:

Q: 4) General: Which organizational area is responsible for batch management andmaintenance?

 A:

Page 30: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 30/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Batch level: Do your batches have to be unique at a plant level, cross-plant at materiallevel or customer level?

 A:

Q: 6) Batch level: Do you want some materials to be handled in batches in some plants andnot in others?

 A:

Q: 7) Batch level: Do you transfer batches among different plants? Do you want thetransferred batch to be known in the receiving plant? (plant level or cross-plant level)

 A:

Q: 8) Batch level: If it is cross-plant, is it possible that you must assign the same batchnumber to different materials? (material level or customer level)

 A:

Q: 9) Batch number: Do want the batch number to be assigned automatically or manually?(internal and external number assignment)

 A:

Q: 10) Batch number: Do want to automatically create batches for goods movement or forthe material you want to produce in the order?

 A:

Q: 11) Batch number: Do you want to explain how your batch numbers are set up?

 A:

Q: 12) Batch status management: Do you want to represent the usability of a batch usingbatch status management?

 A:

Q: 13) Batch status management: In what way are batches released and who is responsiblefor their release?

 A:

Q: 14) Batch status management: Do you have to manage the status of a batch as a cross-storage location or a cross-stock type?

 A:

Q: 15) Batch specifications: Do you want to describe the technical, physical and/or chemicalproperties of a batch using characteristics and characteristic values?

Page 31: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 31/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 16) Batch specifications: Can you group certain materials based on a commonspecification to classes?

 A:

Q: 17) Batch specifications: When do you assign values to characteristics? Where does theinformation for the value assignment come from? (for example, from the result summary inQM)

 A:

Q: 18) Batch determination: Do you need batch determination in order to find goodsmovements from a warehouse that have a certain specification? In which areas (inventory management, production, sales and distribution) do you use batch determination?

 A:

Q: 19) Batch determination: What criteria do you want to use to find and sort the batches?(batch-find strategy)

 A:

Q: 20) Batch determination: Define a batch-find strategy in order to set which conditions(criteria) you want to use to find batches.

 A:

Q: 21) Batch determination: For performance reasons, it is recommended that some SAPstandard characteristics, such as deletion indicator or batch status, are included in th eselection class,

 A:

Q: 22) Batch where-used list: Do you want to document the path of a batch through theenterprise using a batch where-used list? (for liability reasons)

 A:

Q: 23) Active ingredient management: Do you want to manage materials with activeingredients that are to be handled with batches?

 A:

Q: 24) Active ingredient management: Do you have materials that have the amount ofactive ingredients or fixed components managed in percent (%)?

 A:

Page 32: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 32/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 25) Active ingredient management: Do you have material that must be managed usingtwo different measuring units, such as ounces and grams? Is the relationship between them apercent or can it be defined freely?

 A:

Q: 26) Active ingredient management: Is the price based on the amount of ingredients? Doyou order raw materials in ingredient units of measure?

 A:

Q: 27) Active ingredient management: Do you want to carry out a batch determinationbased on ingredient amounts?

 A:

Q: 28) Do you want to manage and track materials by batch? If yes, specify the materialsor groups of material.

 A:

Q: 29) Do you want to manage and track materials by expiration date? If yes, specify thematerials or groups of material, also specify if you wish to see the total shelf life of thematerial, or the remining shelf life.

 A:

Q: 30) Do you have any materials where you keep track of the amount of active ingredients;or percent solids?

 A:

1.4.2. Batch Search Strategy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use batch materials in Sales and Distribution?

 A:

Q: 2) Define the characteristics that are important when searching for a batch of a material,such as color, weight, expiration date (selection class).

 A:

Q: 3) When selecting material from batches that have met the criteria in the previousquestion, what rules do you follow (FIFO or LIFO, quality, other)?

 A:

Q: 4) When searching for a batch, what key information do you use (strategy type)?

 A:

Page 33: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 33/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you need automatic or manual batch determination in Sales?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you determine batches at order time or at delivery time?

 A:

Q: 7) Does the material for a sales order have to be taken from only one batch, or are batchsplits allowed?

 A:

1.5. Serial Numbers

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there serialized objects in your company? If so, which objects do you want to

serialize?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you assign serial numbers to materials?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to manage further information using serial numbers (for example, serialnumbers for equipment in maintenance or service) in addition to inventory managementinformation?

 A:

Q: 4) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: is there a serial number to identify eachpiece of equipment (from your production department and/or from the manufacturer)?

 A:

Q: 5) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: If there are serial numbers, on which leveldo you want to track history (include costing, statistics, and so on)?

 A:

Q: 6) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: do you want to create your own serialnumbers, or do you use the manufacturer's serial number as a reference/key for that object?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your

Page 34: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 34/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

1.6. Handling unit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you require that your customers send you pallet identification information?

 A:

Q: 3) If you do not receive pallet identification information from your customers, do youexecute goods receipt processing based on pallets or material combinations?

 A:

Q: 4) Are the pallets that are shown handled as a homogeneous unit using more than onegoods movement?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use pallet identification for production supply?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you use picking and packaging functions with scanners (radio frequency)?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you need traceability of materials based on pallet information?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use inspection lot processing on pallet basis?

 A:

Q: 9) During quality checks, do you transport the pallets to other storage locations beforethe usage decision?

Page 35: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 35/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 10) Do you need serial number management in the warehouse?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you already have packaging requirements for you warehouse personnel? Are thepackaging requirements customer-based?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you prepare raw materials for a production order on a scale and do you have toensure that exactly this material combination is used in the order?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you want to control whether goods in the goods receipt zone are displayed in theavailability check?

 A:

1.7. Work Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have different types of work centers and what are the differences betweenthem (e.g. labor work centers, machine work centers, production line)?

 A:

Q: 2) To what other master data are your work centers linked (cost center etc.)?

 A:

Q: 3) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you requirestandard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?

 A:

Q: 4) Should default values be maintained in the work center, which can be transferred into

routings? A:

Q: 5) Do you use a human resources management system? In what way is it used?

 A:

Q: 6) Will you require capacity planning for your work centers/resources?

 A:

Page 36: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 36/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Does every work center have a standard capacity or do you maintain shift intervals?

 A:

Q: 8) Are work center hierarchies required for capacity evaluation?

 A:

Q: 9) Are certain types of maintenance work always carried out by external contractors? Ifso, please list and describe these types of maintenance work.

 A:

Q: 10) PM/CS: In case of time-reported jobs, is contractors' work measured prior topayment being made?

 A:

Q: 11) PM/CS: Are the external resources planned?

 A:

Q: 12) Are you going to be scheduling labor resources within your networks? (If yes, useworkcenters.)

 A:

Q: 13) Will you be doing cost planning on networks? (If yes, you will need work centers.)

 A:

Q: 14) Do you tend to plan labor resources at a department or individual level? (For both,consider the work center capacity and HR assignment configuration requirements).

 A:

Q: 15) It is possible to have a work center that includes both people and machines. Do youhave multiple uses for your work centers?

 A:

Q: 16) The work center controls the formula for controlling scheduling. Do you have specialwork center scheduling requirements?

 A:

Q: 17) Work centers provide the basis for capacity planning. Do you want to managecapacities for your projects?

 A:

Page 37: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 37/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 18) Will you be using PP and PS functionality? (If yes, carefully consider the integrationand processes between the PP and PS work centers for capacity planning.)

 A:

1.8. Customer Master Record

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of business partner do you have? For example, sole proprietor, legalperson, employees, foreign, other?

 A:

Q: 2) How many active customers do you intend to transfer to your R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 3) Which department(s) are responsible for the maintenance of customer data?

 A:

Q: 4) If more than one department, describe the responsibilities of each?

 A:

Q: 5) Describe your partner functions in detail.

Explanation: SAP partner functions are used to determine all possible functions that abusiness partner can take on (for example, the ordering party - sold-to party, the recipient ofgoods - ship-to party, and the party that has to pay - payer).

 A:

Q: 6) Which partner functions are used for the different sales documents?

 A:

Q: 7) Do your customers have multiple ship-tos and payers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you maintain sales prospects?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you have one-time customers?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 38: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 38/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you have vendors who are also customers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Describe the structure of your current customer numbering scheme.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you assign customers to industry sectors?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you want to record any specific marketing information (for example, Nielsen IDs,customer classification)?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you group customers according to any of the following criteria?

 A:

Q: 15) Will you record contact-person information on your customers?

 A:

Q: 16) Does your customer allow you to combine different sales orders into one delivery?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 17) Does your customer allow partial deliveries?

 A:

Q: 18) If you have multiple plants, is your customer normally supplied by a specific plant?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 19) Define your customer delivery priority levels and explain the assignment process.

 A:

Q: 20) Are there special shipping conditions for your customer?

 A:

Page 39: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 39/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 21) Do you record foreign trade customers who are placed on an export control list topossibly deny deliveries to them?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you use customer-specific calendars and/or goods receiving hours?

 A:

Q: 23) What are your terms of payment for your customers?

 A:

Q: 24) Are there any discounts linked to terms of payment, such as cash discounts?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you have sales documents in foreign currencies? Describe how the exchangerate is calculated.

 A:

Q: 26) What kind of payments do you get from your customer?

 A:

Q: 27) Are reminders sent? How long is the waiting period?

 A:

Q: 28) What Incoterms will your customers use (for example, FOB, free domicile)?

 A:

Q: 29) What texts do you maintain at a customer level?

 A:

Q: 30) Which texts are used for the different sales documents (for sales, shipping, billing)?

 A:

Q: 31) Describe any other information relevant to customers.

 A:

Q: 32) Do you use the same structure of customer master records in all departments?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 40: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 40/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 33) Do you ever need to block a customer for sales processing? If so, describe theprocess in detail.

 A:

Q: 34) How will you determine/select a customer for processing (matchcode)?

 A:

Q: 35) Do you maintain customer data in an external system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

1.9. Vendor Master Record

Questions:

Q: 1) What types of vendors do you have? (domestic, foreign, payment address, etc.)

 A:

Q: 2) How many active vendors do you want to transfer to R/3?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want vendor numbers assigned in the R/3 System? Name your criteria formanual and automatic number assignment. Describe the format of manually assigned vendornumbers.

Explanation: Ways of assigning numbers: 1. Automatically by the R/3 System 2. Manually bethe user 3. Automatically and manually

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have plants that supply materials or services to other plants in other companycodes?

 A:

Q: 5) Do stock transport orders take place between stores or between the DC and store? If

so, for which sites? A:

Q: 6) Do you want to reflect the organizational structure of your vendors in the R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 7) Is it necessary for you to maintain different purchasing vendor master data fordifferent plants?

 A:

Page 41: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 41/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) When working with your suppliers, do you deal with people with different roles? If yes,indicate the appropriate roles.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you employ different payment terms by facility?

 A:

Q: 10) Are there any vendor-specific instructions or information that you want to include inpurchasing documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do your vendors offer discounts for prompt payment (for example, 1% cash discountwithin 10 days)? Provide a list of the payment terms you require.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you specify foreign-trade-specific information in your purchasing documents(such as CIF or FOB)? hose needed.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you have vendors with several/different ordering addresses, payees, carriers,and so on? If so, what do these depend on (assortment, supply region)?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to maintain default data for the article master (such as planned deliverytime, purchasing group) at vendor level?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Brazil only: Do you need a CGC/CPF check for vendors? If so, how do you want thesystem to act (information message, warning, error message)?

 A:

Q: 16) How many vendors regularly supply you with goods?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you have vendors who are subject to withholding tax?

Explanation: Possibile to group with different account groups; Maintenance of fields inmaster record. in master record.

 A:

Page 42: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 42/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.10. Bank/Bank Directory TR/FI

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create the bank directory (address and control data for banks and postoffice banks) manually or copy it automatically?

 A:

Q: 2) Which banks and bank accounts will you be using for incoming and outgoingpayments?

 A:

Q: 3) In what currencies are these accounts denominated?

 A:

Q: 4) Are certain payments handled by more than one bank (correspondentbanks/intermediary banks)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

1.11. Taxes

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use an external Tax Package to determine the appropriate tax jurisdiction

and/or tax rates to apply to purchasing documents and/or vendor invoices? If yes, name theexternal package.

 A:

Q: 2) Will the tax jurisdiction codes be loaded into SAP?

 A:

2. Production Planning and Procurement Planning

2.1. Sales and Operations Planning2.1.1. Product Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have products to be grouped into product groups for planning (for example,due to similar procurement methods or because they are manufactured on the samebottleneck machine)?

 A:

Page 43: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 43/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

2.1.2. Rough-cut Planning Profile

Questions:

Q: 1) In medium to long-term planning do you use a rough-cut planning profile for resourceleveling?

 A:

2.1.3. Information Structure

Questions:

Q: 1) Define your most important information structures

 A:

2.1.4. Planning hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Define your most important planning hierarchies

 A:

2.1.5. Planning Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require self-defined planning table views?

 A:

2.1.6. Planning Event

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to define events in Sales and Operations Planning (SOP), so that theirinfluence on your planning is not derived from historical data?

 A:

2.2. MRP/MPS/Long-Term Planning

2.2.1. BOM Explosion Number

Questions:

Q: 1) Must you enter a specific BOM explosion, which is valid up to a set date, for amaterial, in the case of a multiple BOMs for example?

 A:

2.2.2. Planning Calendar

Questions:

Page 44: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 44/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you want to define flexible period lengths for Production Planning and MaterialRequirements Planning (for lot size determination and evaluation purposes for example)?

 A:

2.2.3. Quota Arrangement

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor quotas (for example 70 % from vendor A, 30% fromvendor B) for your materials? If yes, how many quota arrangements are you currentlymaintaining?

 A:

2.2.4. Production Lot

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have various manufacturing processes for an assembly and do you want tocalculate the costs of the various manufacturing processes separately and compare them

with each other?

 A:

3. Procurement

Questions:

Q: 1) How many different materials do you procure on a regular basis?

 A:

3.1. Manufacturer Part Number

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain your vendor's part number within SAP, associated to your materialmaster number? If yes, could there be more than one manufacturers part number associatedwith one of your material master numbers?

 A:

3.2. Conditions

Questions:

Q: 1) Which price components do you use in purchasing documents (e.g. gross price,surcharges, discounts, freight, duty, import)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do prices depend on the quantity ordered (e.g. quantity discounts or price scales)? Ifso, specify price components, quantity, and other factors.

Page 45: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 45/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) To which date does the price determination process relate? (E.g. delivery date, POdate, other.)

 A:

Q: 4) Is pricing information from other systems to be used for price computation purposes inR/3?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you manually change the price at header level for the entire purchasingdocument?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you allow changes to the gross price that is automatically determined by the R/3

System?

 A:

Q: 7) Does the vendor's price include value-added tax?

 A:

Q: 8) Is it possible to change pricing conditions after a PO has been created?

 A:

Q: 9) Specifically for Brazil indexation: Which indexes and forms are necessary?

 A:

3.3. Source List

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor hierarchies?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to maintain a list of approved vendors? This means that if a material issubject to a source list requirement, it can only be procured from the vendors included on thesource list.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you need a source list for: (1) all materials (2) all materials of a plant (3) certainmaterials only? Please explain.

Page 46: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 46/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Is there a fixed vendor for some materials? (1) No. (1) Yes, in certain plants (specify)(2) Yes, across the entire enterprise (3) Yes, everywhere except in certain plants (specify).

 A:

Q: 5) Do some vendors cover certain geogr. regions? (1) No. (2) Yes. Warning if vendordoes not cover relevant region. (3) Yes. Prevent issue of POs in latter case.o

Explanation: Are some of your suppliers specific to a geographic region? Are some of yoursuppliers specific to a geographic region? Example : ACME Widgets supplies plants in thewestern region; ABC Widgets supplies plants in the eastern region. A western plant shouldnot order widgets from an eastern region supplier. not order widgets from an eastern regionsupplier. (1) Do not need this feature. (2) Want this feature, warning only if vendor does notcover the plant's region. (3) Want this feature, preventing orders from vendors that do notcover a plant's region. a plant's region. If you want to use this feature, indicate the region towhich each of your plants belong.

 A:

Q: 6) Should it be possible to for purchase orders to be created automatically in the courseof material requirements planning (MRP)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Should it be possible to for scheduling agreement schedule lines to be createdautomatically in the course of material requirements planning (MRP)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

3.4. Quota Arrangement

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor quotas (for example 70 % from vendor A, 30% fromvendor B) for your materials? If yes, how many quota arrangements are you currentlymaintaining?

 A:

3.5. Delivery Address

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there addresses, over and above the plant address(es) that will be usedrepeatedly on purchasing documents? If yes, provide a list of those needed.

 A:

Page 47: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 47/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Do any storage locations have an address that varies from the assigned plant? If yes,provide a list of the additional specific storage location addresses.

 A:

3.6. Vendor Rebate Arrangements

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to send your business partners written confirmation of rebatearrangements entered into with them?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you grant your vendors volume rebates based on the volume of business doneover a period of time?

 A:

3.7. Settlement Accounting for Conditions Requiring SubsequentSettlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is the data from the process of subsequent settlement to be included in the profitabilityanalysis?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Is the process of subsequent settlement to be carried out at plant level?

 A:

Q: 3) At which levels is aggregation or sorting of data to be carried out?

 A:

Q: 4) Must external business volume data (e.g. from sites with other systems) be taken intoaccount for subsequent (end-of-period rebate) settlement?

 A:

Q: 5) Are tolerance limits to be taken into account in subsequent (end-of-period rebate)settlement? If so, which?

 A:

Q: 6) Are your business partners to be given written notification of rebate arrangements forwhich settlement accounting has taken place?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Page 48: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 48/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) How long do your agreements run?

Explanation: Listing of the various intervals used Listing of the various intervals used

 A:

Q: 8) What is the maximum period of an agreement with the settlement partner?

Explanation: For example, until cancelled or redefined annually. Note: You cannot map theoption "until cancellation" in the R/3 System by choosing "unending" rebate arrangement(until 12.31.9999). See: Extending Rebate Arrangements Arrangements

 A:

Q: 9) How many agreements do you use that have a validity period of more than one year?

 A:

Q: 10) Which periods of time do you use that have a validity period of less than one year?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you extend your agreements at regular intervals?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) If so, how often do you extend them?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you use rebate arrangements that apply retrospectively?

Explanation: This can always only be done in exceptional cases!

 A:

Q: 14) Do you carry out several settlements for each agreement?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) In the case of multiple settlement, do you use fixed time intervals that can be definedbeforehand in a calendar?

Explanation: In the case of fixed predefined time intervals, partial settlement is possible -otherwise only interim settlement. Urgent recommendation: work with partial settlement only.

Page 49: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 49/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Reason: interim settlement is not a data retention level. It is not subsequently possible todetermine which document items were settled in which settlement run.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) At which time intervals will you carry out partial settlement with regard to a rebateagreement?

Explanation: Maintenance of arrangement calendar.

 A:

Q: 17) If you perform several settlements for each rebate arrangement: Do you perform afinal settlement in which all previous payments on account are taken into consideration?

Explanation: The sum of the partial settlement payments may exceed the rebate achieved atthe end of the rebate arrangement validity period.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 18) Do you settle up with regard to rebate arrangements only within a self-containedaccounting unit ("company code"), or are different volume rebates also settled for differentsub-enterprises in a single rebate arrangement and allocated proportionately?

Explanation: At this point, you should not underestimate the volume of documents.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you settle rebate arrangements as credits or debits?

 A:

Q: 20) Are settlements that are sent to customers (instead of vendors) also created basedon the business volume data from purchasing or agency business?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Before which settlements do you agree on your business volume with yoursettlement partners?

Explanation: For example, only before final settlement for a rebate arrangement or alsobefore the settlements before that, for example, mid-year settlements

 A:

Q: 22) Do you want to post the settlement documents immediately in Financial Accounting?

Page 50: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 50/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: You can set a posting block so that settlements must be released in a separatestep. separate step.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) Do you receive promotional deals?

Explanation: Rebate based on business volume that is paid out at fixed intervals for definedperiods, for example. for example.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 24) Are subsequent settlement conditions to be taken into account for articles subject toinventory management (valuation) on a value basis?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 25) When is the business volume updated?

 A:

Q: 26) Which business-volume-relevant document types do you use?

 A:

Q: 27) Which schema do you want to use to calculate conditions that are subsequentlysettled? Which discounts are included in the business volume basis for subsequentsettlement, if necessary?

 A:

Q: 28) Which discounts are included in the business volume basis for subsequentsettlement, if necessary?

 A:

Q: 29) On which value does the business volume of subsequent settlement depend?

Explanation: Net value in the invoice, gross value in the purchase order, and so on Net valuein the invoice, gross value in the purchase order, and so on

 A:

Q: 30) Are conditions calculated differently?

Explanation: Gross/net, different access sequence, and so on Gross/net, different accesssequence, and so on

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 51: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 51/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 31) Do you want to transfer business volume data from other systems to the R/3System?

Explanation: Several tools are available for transferring legacy data: - Per File - Per pro-forma vendor billing document

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 32) Do you want to import documents subject to volume-based rebates into the systemusing a data carrier?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 33) Which evaluations and statistics do you need?

Explanation: For example, business volume and revenue at material group or article typelevel type level

 A:

3.8. Release Strategy with Classification

Questions:

Q: 1) Will any purchasing documents be subject to approval in SAP? If yes, describe thecriteria that will be needed to determine the appropriate approval policy for purchase

requisitions, RFQs, purchase orders, contracts, scheduling agreements.

 A:

3.9. Vendor Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you evaluate vendors in your legacy system?

 A:

Q: 2) Which criteria do you use to evaluate your vendors?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you rate the scores for these criteria? If the criteria are not weighted equally,indicate the individual weightings.

 A:

Page 52: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 52/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

4. Production4.1. Discrete Production

4.1.1. Production Version

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMsor with which task lists/master recipes

 A:

4.1.2. Work Center

4.1.2.1. Work Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have different types of work centers and what are the differences betweenthem (e.g. labor work centers, machine work centers, production line)?

 A:

Q: 2) To what other master data are your work centers linked (cost center etc.)?

 A:

Q: 3) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you requirestandard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?

 A:

Q: 4) Should default values be maintained in the work center, which can be transferred intoroutings?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use a human resources management system? In what way is it used?

 A:

Q: 6) Will you require capacity planning for your work centers/resources?

 A:

Q: 7) Does every work center have a standard capacity or do you maintain shift intervals?

 A:

Q: 8) Are work center hierarchies required for capacity evaluation?

 A:

4.1.2.2. Capacity

Page 53: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 53/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Which capacity categories will you require (for example, labor, machine, processunit)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you use pooled capacities (for example, energy, flexible labor groups)?

 A:

4.1.2.3. Shift Sequence

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you require in addition to the standard capacity a more precise capacity? If yes,define your shifts and intervals.

 A:

4.1.3. Routing

4.1.3.1. Routings

Questions:

Q: 1) For which business processes do you require routings?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent onthe lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require parallel or alternative sequences of operations within a routing?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for alloperations?

Explanation: Scheduling without reference to an order detemines the in-house productiontime of a material, which you can then compare with the lot-size-dependent in-houseproduction time from the material master.

 A:

Q: 5) Should capacity requirements be created for the operations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that yourvendor will process?

 A:

Page 54: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 54/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you requirestandard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Which objects do you want to allocate to the operations?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want inspection operations in your routings?

 A:

Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printingpurposes?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)?

 A:

Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should thevalidity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing changehistories have to be transferred to the R/3 system?

 A:

Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions,mass changes etc.)?

 A:

Q: 14) Will you be measuring quality during the production process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.1.3.2. Reference Operation Set

Questions:

Q: 1) Are sequences of operations used that remain constant, and which should be used astemplates (reference operation sets)?

 A:

4.1.3.3. Production Resources and Tools

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing ofyour materials?

 A:

Page 55: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 55/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) What kind of production resources/tools do you require?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require inventory management for your production resources/tools?

 A:

4.1.3.4. Standard Trigger Point

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you require trigger points ( such as all subsequent processes to be released upto final point , all immediate process to be released etc.)?

 A:

Q: 2) What functions will you want trigger points to perform?

 A:

Q: 3) What system status do you want to you use?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you use trigger points to generate rework orders/ standard operations ?

 A:

Q: 5) Will you create trigger point groups with standard triggers?

 A:

4.1.4. CAPP Standard Values Calculation

4.1.4.1. CAPP Formula

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you want to calculate your standard values with given formulas and methods?

 A:

4.2. Repetitive Manufacturing

4.2.1. Production Version

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMsor with which task lists/master recipes

 A:

4.2.2. Product Cost Collectors

Page 56: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 56/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one costcollector for each production method or for each material?

 A:

4.2.3. Planning ID

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use the planning ID to group materials for planning and evaluation?

 A:

4.2.4. Line Design

4.2.4.1. Rate Routing

Questions:

Q: 1) For which business processes do you require routings?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent onthe lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require parallel or alternative sequences of operations within a routing?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for alloperations?

Explanation: Scheduling without reference to an order detemines the in-house productiontime of a material, which you can then compare with the lot-size-dependent in-houseproduction time from the material master.

 A:

Q: 5) Should capacity requirements be created for the operations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that yourvendor will process?

 A:

Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you requirestandard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?

 A:

Page 57: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 57/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Which objects do you want to allocate to the operations?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want inspection operations in your routings?

 A:

Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printingpurposes?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)?

 A:

Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should the

validity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing changehistories have to be transferred to the R/3 system?

 A:

Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions,mass changes etc.)?

 A:

Q: 14) Will you be measuring quality during the production process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.2.4.2. Reference Rate Routing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are sequences of operations used that remain constant, and which should be used astemplates (reference operation sets)?

 A:

4.2.4.3. Line Hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use line balancing, tact-based scheduling or sequencing?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to represent the structure of a production line (line segment, processingstations and so on) in a hierarchy?

 A:

Page 58: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 58/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

4.3. Process Manufacturing

4.3.1. Production Version

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMsor with which task lists/master recipes

 A:

4.3.2. Resource

4.3.2.1. Resource

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use different resource categories and what will be the differences betweenthem (for example, labor resources, storage resources, processing units)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you produce, for example, in a tank, and will you then store the finished product inthis tank until delivery (storage resources)?

 A:

Q: 3) What functions shall be fulfilled by your resources? How will you use resources(scheduling, capacity, costs, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have resources that you will allocate to the process order on short notice(classification, resource selection)?

 A:

Q: 5) With which other objects will resources be linked (cost center, qualification, etc.)? Willthere be a link to the Human Resources Management system?

 A:

Q: 6) Which standard values will you use (for example, labor time, machine time, setuptime)?

 A:

Q: 7) Will special formulas be required for certain resources for scheduling, capacityrequirements planning, and cost determination?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want default values to be defined in the resource for the master recipe?

 A:

Page 59: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 59/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Will each resource have a standard available capacity or do you want shift intervals tobe maintained?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you need resource hierarchies for capacity evaluation purposes?

 A:

Q: 11) Will there be restrictions regarding material flow through processing units that can bevisually reproduced using a sequence definition or a network?

 A:

4.3.2.2. Capacity

Questions:

Q: 1) Which capacity categories will you require (for example, labor, machine, process

unit)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you use pooled capacities (for example, energy, flexible labor groups)?

 A:

4.3.2.3. Shift Sequence

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you require in addition to the standard capacity a more precise capacity? If yes,define your shifts and intervals.

 A:

4.3.3. Master Recipe

4.3.3.1. Master Recipe

Questions:

Q: 1) How many different master recipes will you need?

 A:

Q: 2) What will you use recipes for?

 A:

Q: 3) Will you have several alternative recipes for one material (for example, depending onthe lot size) and do you want these to be combined (recipe group)?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you use one recipe to produce different materials?

Page 60: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 60/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use formulas to calculate the quantities of the components (material quantitycalculation)? Do you want characteristic values such as concentration to be taken intoaccount?

 A:

Q: 6) Which control recipe destinations will you need?

 A:

Q: 7) If the control recipe destination is a person/group of people, which areas (weighing,quality inspection, production, etc.) will be affected? Do you want to represent this logicaldistribution according to user department or using material flow?

 A:

Q: 8) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of changes? How do

you want the validity of the recipe to be defined?

 A:

Q: 9) Will you require an approval procedure to change recipes? Will a digital signature berequired (change request/order)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which relationships will exist between the phases within a recipe?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want the operations/phases to create capacity requirements?

 A:

Q: 12) Are the operations/phases be relevant for the calculation?

 A:

Q: 13) Which type of processing do you want to be possible for operations?

 A:

Q: 14) Which standard values will you use for the operations (for example, labor time,machine time, setup time)?

 A:

Q: 15) Will all phases be subject to confirmation?

 A:

Page 61: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 61/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) Will you use milestone confirmations?

 A:

Q: 17) Which process instructions will you need?

 A:

Q: 18) Will special user fields be required in the master recipe for information and printingpurposes?

 A:

Q: 19) Besides the actual processing unit, will further resources be allocated to an operation(secondary resources) that are, for example, only used for a limited time (for example, labor,transportation trucks)? Do you want them to be relevant for confirmation

 A:

Q: 20) Which objects will be allocated to the phases (for example, components, productionresources/tools)?

 A:

Q: 21) Will temporary materials (INTRA) with separate material numbers be producedduring the production process that will be processed further immediately instead of beingdelivered to storage?

 A:

Q: 22) Will you carry out in-process quality inspections, (assigning inspection characteristicsto phases)?

 A:

Q: 23) Should the recording of inspection results be carried out in QM? Or should it be dealtwith in the PI-Sheet (either by a QM-Jump or by sending the information via the processmessage)?

 A:

Q: 24) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of master recipes(copy function, mass changes, etc.)?

 A:

4.3.3.2. Production Resources and Tools

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing ofyour materials?

Page 62: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 62/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) What kind of production resources/tools do you require?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require inventory management for your production resources/tools?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to manage your production resources/tools by quantity alone or alsobased on localization, value, responsible person etc.?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use production resources/tools which have to be checked or calibratedregularly?

 A:

Q: 6) QM: List any external equipment or gauges which will be used to capture results ordefects and transfer to the R/3 System.

 A:

4.4. KANBAN

4.4.1. Supply Area

Questions:

Q: 1) Define supply areas, which serve as temporary warehouses in Production, in order todirectly stage material for production in the work center.

 A:

4.4.2. Control Cycle

Questions:

Q: 1) If you use KANBAN, you must determine the relationship between the demand andsupply source. Define your control cycles!

 A:

Q: 2) Which replenishment strategies will you use?

 A:

Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for in-house production?

 A:

Q: 4) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for external procurement?

 A:

Page 63: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 63/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for stock transfer?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings,regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and materialquantity per kanban)?

 A:

5. Sales and Distribution5.1. Business Partner

5.1.1. Customer hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to group sales to customers into various levels for reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 2) In your current organizational structure, do you need to analyze purchases bycustomer group?

 A:

Q: 3) List reports and give examples.

 A:

Q: 4) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterpriseand allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structureswithin your customers' enterprises?

 A:

5.2. Products

5.2.1. Material determination

Questions:

Q: 1) If you use special packaging for different occasions, such as, Thanksgiving), do youwant the system to automatically substitute the special packaging when the product isordered?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, how does substitution take place, that is on which master data fields do youbase your substitution?

 A:

Page 64: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 64/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Why would you substitute one product for another or one packaging for another?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want product substitution to occur only when the original ordered product isnot available?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you want the substituted product to be listed as a sub-item of the originally orderedproduct, or should the substituted product completely replace the original product?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to print product information for the original or the substitute product in theoutput?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you want product substitution to occur automatically, or should data entrypersonnel be offered a selection screen containing substitutable products?

 A:

5.2.2. Item proposal

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use a process to simplify order entry for customers that regularly order thesame product or group of products?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, please describe this process in detail.

 A:

5.2.3. Dynamic product proposal

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need automatic product proposal specific to your customer during sales orderprocessing?

 A:

Q: 2) Which information sources do you need to determine product proposals dynamically?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you need to display a monthly, weekly, or daily sales order history?

Page 65: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 65/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to create dynamic product proposals online or in the background?

 A:

5.2.4. Cross Selling

Questions:

Q: 1) During your telesales activities, do you want to inform customers about additionalproducts to the one they are ordering (for example, accessories)?

 A:

Q: 2) What is your cross-selling policy based on?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you create cross-selling lists online or in the background?

 A:5.2.5. Material Listing /Material Exclusion

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you offer specific materials to certain customers (material listing)? If yes, describethis process in detail.

Explanation: Do you apply certain items/materials to selected customers (material listing)? Ifyes, describe this process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What are your selection criteria for material listing?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you exclude customers from ordering certain products (material exclusion)? If yes,describe the process in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What are your selection criteria for material exclusion?

 A:

5.2.6. Value Contract Assortment module

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you determine which materials are permitted for value contracts (standardmaterial, product hierarchy, assortment)?

 A:

Page 66: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 66/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

5.2.7. Product allocation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you limit the quantity of an item that you sell to a customer (product allocation)?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you allocate (by customer, geographic area, material)?

 A:

5.3. Assortment

5.3.1. Assortment Module Maintenance

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you refine the results from listing by using assortment levels?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

5.3.2. Product proposal processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Is your material master data to be structured to administer price catalogs forcustomers?

 A:

5.3.3. Assortment-Assortment User Assignment Maintenance

Questions:

Q: 1) Are you a wholesaler?

Explanation: It is only good business practice to define customer assortments if you are awholesaler.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have particular customer assortments for your wholesale customers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Can customers only order materials listed in their particular assortment?

Explanation: It is only good business practice to define customer assortments if you are awholesaler. are a wholesaler.

Page 67: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 67/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

5.4. Agreements

5.4.1. Customer material information

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you allow shipping data to be maintained for a specific customer-materialcombination (for example, plant, delivery priority, minimum delivery quantity)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have under or overdelivery tolerances for certain combinations of customerand material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do your customers place orders using their own material numbers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you define material descriptions for specific customers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

5.4.2. Rebate Agreement

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your how you process rebates.

 A:

Q: 2) What are your rebates based on (for example, customer, material)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you manage accruals for rebates?

 A:

Q: 4) What type of rebates do you offer (for example, volume, quantity, lump sum)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you define validity periods for rebates?

 A:

Page 68: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 68/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

5.4.3. Marketing campaigns

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you group marketing deals into marketing plans? If yes, please describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you offer marketing deals on your products to customer (one-time discounts)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are these deals customer specific or are they related to the product?

 A:

Q: 4) Are special payment terms given with sales deals?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you assign a budget maintained by CO profitability analysis for promotion onsales?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you monitor the budget process?

 A:

5.4.4. Price Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you manage price catalogs?

 A:

5.5. Conditions

Questions:

Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price withdiscounts, surcharges)?

 A:

Q: 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you useand how is the calculation carried out?

Page 69: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 69/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and howis the calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole documentand which apply to the item level only?

 A:

Q: 6) Are manual changes to price conditions allowed in your enterprise?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you useand how is the calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how isthe calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 9) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you document your price units?

 A:

Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external orinternal) in order to calculate a price?

 A:

Q: 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types?

 A:

Q: 13) What date is the pricing based on?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)?

 A:

Page 70: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 70/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changingthe price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices.

 A:

Q: 16) Do you wish to pass on pricing information to CO-PA (Profitability Analysis)?

 A:

Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item orthe expected order value?

 A:

Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specifiedamount or on a percentage of the price per piece?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you use "interval scales" for price determination purposes?

 A:

Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and de-activate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulativevalues)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system tosearch the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or"lowest" price?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do your prices include sales tax?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? Forexample, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, andmusic system help determine the price to be charged.

 A:

Q: 24) Do you use an external tax package?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 71: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 71/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-orderproduction?

 A:

Q: 26) Describe all other combinations.

 A:

Q: 27) On which master data combinations do you base your pricing?

 A:

Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixedvalues)?

 A:

Q: 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes?

 A:

Q: 30) What criteria should be maintained for conditions (country, customer group, and soon)?

 A:

Q: 31) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterpriseand allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures

within your customers' enterprises?

 A:

Q: 32) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase ofthe material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

5.6. Output

Questions:

Q: 1) What master data fields do you use to determine what output to send?

 A:

Q: 2) What type of output do you send (e.g. Paper, Fax, EDI, Internet)?

 A:

Q: 3) When is output sent?

Page 72: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 72/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Collect print out (samples) of the required documents/messages (e.g. orderconfirmation, pick list, packing list, invoice).

 A:

Q: 5) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 8) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 9) How should shipment documents be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 11) How should foreign trade documents be transmitted?

 A:

5.7. Transport

5.7.1. Routes/Stages

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need routes as selection criteria for deliveries?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use the transportation functionality?

 A:

5.7.2. Route schedule

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan weekly customer deliveries from a shipping point to different goodsrecipients and their unloading points in a route (route schedule)?

Page 73: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 73/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

5.7.3. Transportation connection point

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use stages/transportation connection points in order to refine yourtransportation handling (freight costs, time scheduling, output, etc.)?

 A:

6. Inventory Management, Warehouse Managementand Transportation

6.1. Hazardous Material

Questions:

Q: 1) Are your hazardous materials administered at just one or several storage locations?

 A:

6.2. Batch

Questions:

Q: 1) General: Do you manage your materials in batches? In what areas (inventorymanagement, production, sales and distribution, warehouse management, qualitymanagement) do you use batches?

 A:

Q: 2) General: How many batches do you have in a particular period of time?

 A:

Q: 3) General: Do you want to copy the batch numbers from your vendors into the SAPSystem? Do you want this to be entered using a batch master record or a characteristic(classification)?

 A:

Q: 4) General: Which organizational area is responsible for batch management andmaintenance?

 A:

Q: 5) Batch level: Do your batches have to be unique at a plant level, cross-plant at materiallevel or customer level?

 A:

Page 74: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 74/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) Batch level: Do you want some materials to be handled in batches in some plants andnot in others?

 A:

Q: 7) Batch level: Do you transfer batches among different plants? Do you want thetransferred batch to be known in the receiving plant? (plant level or cross-plant level)

 A:

Q: 8) Batch level: If it is cross-plant, is it possible that you must assign the same batchnumber to different materials? (material level or customer level)

 A:

Q: 9) Batch number: Do want the batch number to be assigned automatically or manually?(internal and external number assignment)

 A:

Q: 10) Batch number: Do want to automatically create batches for goods movement or forthe material you want to produce in the order?

 A:

Q: 11) Batch number: Do you want to explain how your batch numbers are set up?

 A:

Q: 12) Batch status management: Do you want to represent the usability of a batch usingbatch status management?

 A:

Q: 13) Batch status management: In what way are batches released and who is responsiblefor their release?

 A:

Q: 14) Batch status management: Do you have to manage the status of a batch as a cross-

storage location or a cross-stock type?

 A:

Q: 15) Batch specifications: Do you want to describe the technical, physical and/or chemicalproperties of a batch using characteristics and characteristic values?

 A:

Q: 16) Batch specifications: Can you group certain materials based on a commonspecification to classes?

Page 75: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 75/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 17) Batch specifications: When do you assign values to characteristics? Where does theinformation for the value assignment come from? (for example, from the result summary inQM)

 A:

Q: 18) Batch determination: Do you need batch determination in order to find goodsmovements from a warehouse that have a certain specification? In which areas (inventory management, production, sales and distribution) do you use batch determination?

 A:

Q: 19) Batch determination: What criteria do you want to use to find and sort the batches?(batch-find strategy)

 A:

Q: 20) Batch determination: Define a batch-find strategy in order to set which conditions(criteria) you want to use to find batches.

 A:

Q: 21) Batch determination: For performance reasons, it is recommended that some SAPstandard characteristics, such as deletion indicator or batch status, are included in th eselection class,

 A:

Q: 22) Batch where-used list: Do you want to document the path of a batch through theenterprise using a batch where-used list? (for liability reasons)

 A:

Q: 23) Active ingredient management: Do you want to manage materials with activeingredients that are to be handled with batches?

 A:

Q: 24) Active ingredient management: Do you have materials that have the amount ofactive ingredients or fixed components managed in percent (%)?

 A:

Q: 25) Active ingredient management: Do you have material that must be managed usingtwo different measuring units, such as ounces and grams? Is the relationship between them apercent or can it be defined freely?

 A:

Page 76: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 76/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 26) Active ingredient management: Is the price based on the amount of ingredients? Doyou order raw materials in ingredient units of measure?

 A:

Q: 27) Active ingredient management: Do you want to carry out a batch determinationbased on ingredient amounts?

 A:

Q: 28) Do you want to manage and track materials by batch? If yes, specify the materialsor groups of material.

 A:

Q: 29) Do you want to manage and track materials by expiration date? If yes, specify thematerials or groups of material, also specify if you wish to see the total shelf life of thematerial, or the remining shelf life.

 A:

Q: 30) Do you have any materials where you keep track of the amount of active ingredients;or percent solids?

 A:

6.3. Batch Search Strategy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use batch materials in Sales and Distribution?

 A:

Q: 2) Define the characteristics that are important when searching for a batch of a material,such as color, weight, expiration date (selection class).

 A:

Q: 3) When selecting material from batches that have met the criteria in the previousquestion, what rules do you follow (FIFO or LIFO, quality, other)?

 A:

Q: 4) When searching for a batch, what key information do you use (strategy type)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you need automatic or manual batch determination in Sales?

 A:

Page 77: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 77/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) Do you determine batches at order time or at delivery time?

 A:

Q: 7) Does the material for a sales order have to be taken from only one batch, or are batchsplits allowed?

 A:

6.4. Control Cycle

Questions:

Q: 1) If you use KANBAN, you must determine the relationship between the demand andsupply source. Define your control cycles!

 A:

Q: 2) Which replenishment strategies will you use?

 A:

Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for in-house production?

 A:

Q: 4) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for external procurement?

 A:

Q: 5) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for stock transfer?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings,regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and materialquantity per kanban)?

 A:

6.5. Serial Numbers

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there serialized objects in your company? If so, which objects do you want toserialize?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you assign serial numbers to materials?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to manage further information using serial numbers (for example, serialnumbers for equipment in maintenance or service) in addition to inventory managementinformation?

Page 78: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 78/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: is there a serial number to identify eachpiece of equipment (from your production department and/or from the manufacturer)?

 A:

Q: 5) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: If there are serial numbers, on which leveldo you want to track history (include costing, statistics, and so on)?

 A:

Q: 6) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: do you want to create your own serialnumbers, or do you use the manufacturer's serial number as a reference/key for that object?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty

check result?

 A:

7. Customer Service7.1. Business Partner

7.1.1. Customer Hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to group sales to customers into various levels for reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 2) In your current organizational structure, do you need to analyze purchases bycustomer group?

 A:

Q: 3) List reports and give examples.

 A:

Page 79: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 79/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

7.2. Rebate Arrangements

7.2.1. Customer Material Information

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you allow shipping data to be maintained for a specific customer-materialcombination (for example, plant, delivery priority, minimum delivery quantity)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have under or overdelivery tolerances for certain combinations of customerand material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do your customers place orders using their own material numbers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you define material descriptions for specific customers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

7.2.2. Conditions

Questions:

Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price withdiscounts, surcharges)?

 A:

Q: 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you useand how is the calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and howis the calculation carried out?

 A:

Page 80: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 80/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole documentand which apply to the item level only?

 A:

Q: 6) Are manual changes to price conditions allowed in your enterprise?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you useand how is the calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how isthe calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 9) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you document your price units?

 A:

Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external orinternal) in order to calculate a price?

 A:

Q: 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types?

 A:

Q: 13) What date is the pricing based on?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)?

 A:

Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changingthe price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices.

 A:

Q: 16) Do you wish to pass on pricing information to CO-PA (Profitability Analysis)?

 A:

Page 81: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 81/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item orthe expected order value?

 A:

Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specifiedamount or on a percentage of the price per piece?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you use "interval scales" for price determination purposes?

 A:

Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and de-activate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulativevalues)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system tosearch the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or"lowest" price?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do your prices include sales tax?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? Forexample, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, andmusic system help determine the price to be charged.

 A:

Q: 24) Do you use an external tax package?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-orderproduction?

 A:

Q: 26) Describe all other combinations.

 A:

Page 82: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 82/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 27) On which master data combinations do you base your pricing?

 A:

Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixedvalues)?

 A:

Q: 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes?

 A:

Q: 30) What criteria should be maintained for conditions (country, customer group, and soon)?

 A:

Q: 31) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterpriseand allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structureswithin your customers' enterprises?

 A:

Q: 32) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase ofthe material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

7.3. Products

7.3.1. Material Master: Service Product

Questions:

Q: 1) Which departments/organizational units are responsible for maintaining the materialdata?

 A:

Q: 2) Is master data common across all departments (common master data)?

 A:

Q: 3) What is the default sales unit in sales processing and what are alternative salesunits?

 A:

Q: 4) Which types of materials do you distinguish between (examples, accruals, quantitystructures)?

Page 83: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 83/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Do you group similar products together (for example, in divisions or material groups)?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you maintain additional statuses for your materials (such as sales status)?

 A:

Q: 7) If you have multiple plants, is your material normally supplied by a specific plant?

 A:

Q: 8) Is the creation of a multi-level hierarchy necessary for materials (product hierarchy)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you record a minimum delivery quantity on your materials? If so, what happensduring sales order processing if a violation occurs?

 A:

Q: 10) Are there materials that must be shipped in certain multiples (delivery units)?

 A:

Q: 11) Can a material have different values in one plant? What are the criteria for the

different values?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that needmaterial master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface?

 A:

Q: 13) Describe the structure and numbering system for material numbers(internal/external, specific to material type, other criteria).

 A:

Q: 14) Which material types do you use (please complete): FERT, HALB, ROH, KMAT,HAWA, FMHI, ...?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for materials? Which languages arerelevant? How and when are they translated?

 A:

Page 84: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 84/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) What types of texts do you maintain for your materials?

 A:

Q: 17) Please describe the process for creating and adding to material data. Include releaseprocedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities,authorizations, involved systems, and so on.

 A:

Q: 18) Describe the change process for materials.

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding release procedure/status, importantsequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities, authorizations, involvedsystems, Engineering Change Management, revision levels, and so on.

 A:

Q: 19) Which cross-plant and plant-specific material statuses are necessary?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you need to customize the appearance of or add data fields to the materialmaster record (additional fields, customized material master, field selection, customer-specific field checks)?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you use classification for your material masters? For what reasons (storingaddition information, search functionality, or variant configuration)?

 A:

7.4. Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)

Questions:

Q: 1) How should the technical systems of your customers be structured?

Explanation: Which components should be represented as functional locations, pieces ofequipment, assemblies and so on? Are bills of material required to represent the structure ofthe technical system? For detailed questions about the structuring of technical systems, seethe relevant technical objects.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of technical objects do you handle in your service?

 A:

Page 85: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 85/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) How is information about technical objects organized and stored in your company (forexample, via EDV, file cards or no information at all)?

 A:

7.4.1. Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you usually have several technical objects for a customer that you want torepresent together? Do you require additional functionality to structure this accordingly?

 A:

Q: 2) If yes, which technical objects from customer sites should be combined usingfunctional locations?

 A:

Q: 3) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, costcenter levels, production process levels)?

 A:

Q: 4) Is the hierarchy for functional locations structured according to spatial, functional ortechnical viewpoints?

 A:

Q: 5) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number oflevels, installation and dismantling of equipment)?

 A:

Q: 6) At what level(s) of the hierarchy should data be entered?

 A:

Q: 7) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be?

 A:

Q: 8) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (forexample, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a) froma procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?

 A:

Q: 10) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data?

Page 86: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 86/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 11) Do you need to link documents to functional locations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuringpoints and counters?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 15) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you classify functional locations? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on thesusceptibility to damage of the installed equipment?

Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usagesite. If yes, you should work with functional locations.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time forfunctional locations?

Page 87: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 87/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 19) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whoseaddress(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functionallocation?

Explanation: Partner functions

 A:

Q: 20) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide acopy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archivingrequirements.

 A:

Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects

(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

 A:

7.4.2. Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have technical serviceable items (for example, PCs) as a reference inCustomer Service (for example, in orders)? If yes, give an example.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you identify these for information only in unchecked system numbers and/or usingmaster records, such as serial number records or equipment master records?

 A:

Q: 3) Which serviceable objects need to be entered as equipment master data?

 A:

Q: 4) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

 A:

Q: 5) How many pieces of customer equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

 A:

Q: 6) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number

(by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)?

Page 88: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 88/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 7) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of themanufacturer as a reference/key for that object?

 A:

Q: 8) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (includingcosting, statistics, and so on)?

 A:

Q: 9) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handleindividually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records inconjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goodsmovements)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?

 A:

Q: 12) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an addresswhen you need service requests for a particular piece of equipment.

Explanation: Partner functions

 A:

Q: 13) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipmentmaster records? If yes, give some examples.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points andcounters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.

 A:

Page 89: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 89/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 17) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether theseshould be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Q: 19) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before startingwork on specific equipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories orinformation about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.

 A:

Q: 21) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 22) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Explanation: Usage history

 A:

Q: 23) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

 A:

Page 90: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 90/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of yourdocument archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archivingrequirements.

 A:

7.4.3. Fleet Object

Questions:

Q: 1) Which serviceable objects need to be entered as equipment master data?

 A:

Q: 2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

 A:

Q: 3) How many pieces of customer equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

 A:

Q: 4) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number(by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of themanufacturer as a reference/key for that object?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (includingcosting, statistics, and so on)?

 A:

Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handleindividually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records inconjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goodsmovements)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?

 A:

Page 91: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 91/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an addresswhen you need service requests for a particular piece of equipment.

Explanation: Partner functions

 A:

Q: 11) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipmentmaster records? If yes, give some examples.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points andcounters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you

sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether theseshould be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.

 A:

Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty

check result?

 A:

Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before startingwork on specific equipment?

 A:

Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories orinformation about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.

Page 92: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 92/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 19) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 20) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Explanation: Usage history

 A:

Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

 A:

Q: 22) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of yourdocument archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archivingrequirements.

 A:

Q: 23) Which types of fleet objects do you want to manage?

Explanation: Define fleet object types.

 A:

Q: 24) Which data do you want to see/maintain within the fleet object?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects. A customer exit exists for user-

defined master data (business add-in).

 A:

Q: 25) Which types of utilities and consumables do you want to maintain?

Explanation: For example, fuel or oil. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for thisfield. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to runreports as a search help.

 A:

Page 93: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 93/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 26) For what purpose do you intend to use your fleet objects?

Explanation: The definition of intended purpose uses a possible classification of fleet objectsfor the search. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, itneed not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help.

 A:

Q: 27) Which engine types do your fleet objects have? Do you want to maintain these?

Explanation: For example: Diesel engine, turbines and so on. Note: For 4.6B, there are noadditional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration,but can be used to run reports as a search help.

 A:

Q: 28) Which unit of consumption do you require?

Explanation: Steps for defining the units of consumption: 1. Define consumption categories(for example, energy consumption over distance or over time) 2. Create corresponding units(for example, liters/kilometer, gallons/mile, watts/hour and so on)

 A:

Q: 29) Which counter types do you require (for example, kilometer counter, consumptioncounter, time counter and so on)?

 A:

Q: 30) How do you want to name your counters?

Explanation: IMG: Define special measurement positions for fleet objects

 A:

Q: 31) How do you want to calculate your consumption?

Explanation: - Which counters are used as a basis? - What unit should be used? - What isthe consumption category (for example, consumption/activity or activity/consumption ->inversion flag)? - How long should the calculation last?

 A:

7.4.4. Bill of Material for Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use functional location BOMs?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Page 94: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 94/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) How are they structured?

 A:

Q: 3) Will you need to use engineering change management to control BOM changes?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

7.4.5. Equipment Bill of Material

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have structures for special sub-items?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, are they pieces of equipment that you want to trace on monitor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) If you use equipment hierarchies, describe some examples of when and how they arestructured.

 A:

Q: 4) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you currently have equipment BOMs (spare parts lists)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) If so, are they stored electronically?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 7) How are equipment BOMs structured?

 A:

Q: 8) How are BOMs linked to equipment masters?

 A:

Q: 9) Will you need to use Engineering Change Management to manage your BOMs?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 95: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 95/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you also construct BOMs with alternative materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use variant configuration?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

7.4.6. Installed Base

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use IBase management (a) purely for documentation andmanagement of an object structure (i.e. a production process) or (b) as a limited substitute forbills of material?

Explanation: For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (a): Forinformation and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (b): The decisive advantage ofinstalled base management as against bills of material is that it is multi-levelled and time-based. The structure of an installed base hierarchy is possible with individualization withoutusing equipment - for example, using serial numbers (complete equipment), or withoutequipment (with only device data). However, when building an alternative structure for theequipment hierarchy, an inheritance is not possible, neither is setting a status. a status. It ispossible to install an installed base structure in the form of a subscreen in the screentemplates for a notification or a technical object using the corresponding Customizing tables.object using the corresponding Customizing tables.

 A:

Q: 2) Which object types are part of your installed base hierarchy?

 A:7.4.7. Reference Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have many similar objects to reproduce the technical structures of yourcustomers site?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have standardized functional location structures that should be represented asreference functional locations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) According to which criteria do you intend to structure your functional locationhierarchies (for example geographical, functional or technical aspects)?

 A:

Page 96: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 96/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

7.5. Task Lists

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have work plans for service tasks in your current IT system or databases?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive maintenance task lists? If so, please provide a copy of yourdocument archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specificarchiving requirements.

 A:

7.5.1. General Task List

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require configurable task lists? A:

Q: 2) Do you classify general task lists? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 3) How do you group your general task lists?

Explanation: Group counter

 A:

7.6. Maintenance Plans and Service Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you offer a preventive maintenance service to your customers? If so, please

describe in detail the different types of preventive maintenance offered.

 A:

Q: 2) How will you create maintenance plans (e.g., representing individual maintenanceitems or by grouping a number of maintenance items)?

 A:

Q: 3) Will you plan the preventive maintenance separatly for each maintenance equipmentor will you establish a preventive maintenance plan for a group of maintenance objects (e.g.,

one plan for a production line that consists of several pieces of equipment)?

Page 97: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 97/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have different frequencies for the execution of your maintenance tasks andwould you like to have all of them in just one maintenance plan?

Explanation: If yes -> Strategy-based maintenan If no -> Single-cycle maintenance plan

 A:

Q: 5) If the maintenance plans generate service entry sheets for a MM externalmanagement, should they be directly created by the plans or after the orders arecreated/released?

 A:

Q: 6) For what types of service object do you create maintenance items?

 A:

Q: 7) Will you have pre-defined activity lists (task lists) for your different preventivemaintenance services that list the required work steps (including estimated work time), spareparts and/or tools?

 A:

Q: 8) If yes, are those activity lists specific for the different equipment types (machine types)or different functional locations for which you offer preventive maintenance?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to archive maintenance plans? If so, please provide a copy of yourdocument archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specificarchiving requirements.

 A:

7.6.1. Warranty

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 2) Which materials contain warranty agreements?

Page 98: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 98/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) To which objects should warranties be assigned?

 A:

Q: 4) Describe the different warranties for your objects and specify whether these should belisted individually for each object.

 A:

Q: 5) What is the current procedure? Automatically or manually?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Q: 7) Which warranty counters are used?

Explanation: For example, 12 months, 60,000 km and so on.

 A:

7.6.2. Service Contract

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you presently separate your standard contracts by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do you capture on a service contract?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you plan revenues using SD quotations or SD orders/contracts?

 A:

Q: 4) Is the customer project contract similar to the customer project quotation? (If yes,consider creating with reference to the quotation. If no, consider creating a new project.)

 A:

Q: 5) What are the reference numbers on the customer purchase order (PO) that relate to aproject quotation? (You can enter them in the fields for additional data in the sales contract.)

 A:

Page 99: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 99/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) On which level do you monitor and control project-related revenues? (Consider theimplications for selection of billing elements in the whole WBS.)

 A:

Q: 7) How do you calculate your sales price?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you need automatic billing blocks released by the project? (If yes, consider usingproject milestones to release the block.)

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need to define fixed dates that act as project milestones in the sales contract?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you need to evaluate your projects based on multiple characteristics (for exampleby product line, project type, geographic location)? (If yes, consider using Profitability Analysis (PA) and settling your projects to PA.)

 A:

Q: 11) What kind of contract do you use?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you negotiate contracts to use as a basis for sales orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references acontract? If so, then for what reasons?

 A:

Q: 14) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery

times, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 15) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the samecontract?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 100: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 100/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 17) Do you check available stock (availability check)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 18) Do you adjust prices after a period of time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to reprice for release orders (call-offs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 20) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Can you exceed these quantities in subsequent documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? Ifso, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do youuse this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),service management)?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you have long-term service agreements with your customers (for example toperform preventive maintenance on your customer equipment periodically)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 25) If so, please describe the different types of service contracts that you offer to yourcustomer (for example differentiation by validity period or type of service).

 A:

Q: 26) Can your customer choose between different contract options (for example, 24hversus 12h response times)? List all options available for the different contract types.

Page 101: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 101/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 27) Will the contract options selected by the customer influence the pricing of the servicecontract? If so, please describe the criteria influencing the price.

 A:

Q: 28) Do you have contract-specific price agreements with your customers, and if so, whatdo they look like (for example, the service contract with the customer covers all the spareparts that are used during a service under the contract)?

 A:

Q: 29) What technical objects are covered by the service contract item. Do you use oneservice contract per piece of equipment, or does one service contract includes all thecustomer's equipment?

 A:

Q: 30) Do you want to assign maintenance plans to your customer maintenance contracts?

 A:

Q: 31) Do you use resource-related billing for contracts? Describe when you would use thisfunctionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting), servicemanagement).

 A:

Q: 32) Do you offer master contracts to which other contracts are linked?

 A:

Q: 33) What types of text do you require on your service contracts? Are they required onoutput?

 A:

Q: 34) What information in a service contract do you consider obligatory and would like toappear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the document

as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 35) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a service contract? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 36) Do you send contract confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Page 102: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 102/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

7.6.3. Single Cycle Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenanceplan?

 A:

Q: 2) What character does the cycle have?

Explanation: The standard R/3 System is based on periodic cycles.

 A:7.6.4. Multiple Counter Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) Should just performance-based (counter-based) or also time-based maintenance

cycles be integrated into the multiple counter-based maintenance plan?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?

Explanation: Cycle sets as a copy model for maintenance cycles.

 A:

Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should beassigned to the individual maintenance cycles?

 A:

Q: 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

 A:

Q: 5) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) orlate (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenance

activities for the same equipment? A:

Q: 6) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog?

 A:

Q: 7) List the different service cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenanceactivities should be based. For example, an inspection is performed every 6 months, but notwithin the first year.

Page 103: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 103/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to plan the maintenance service for your customers independently ofyour hierarchy of technical objects?

 A:

Q: 9) Should such a preventive maintenance service be provided in conjunction with acustomer service contract?

 A:

7.6.5. Strategy Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenanceplan?

 A:

Q: 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

 A:

Q: 3) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) orlate (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenanceactivities for the same equipment?

 A:

Q: 4) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog?

 A:

Q: 5) List the different service cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenanceactivities should be based. For example, an inspection is performed every 6 months, but notwithin the first year.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to plan the maintenance service for your customers independently of

your hierarchy of technical objects?

 A:

Q: 7) Should such a preventive maintenance service be provided in conjunction with acustomer service contract?

 A:

7.7. Solution Database

Questions:

Page 104: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 104/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you sell products for which detailed technical information is required in order tointroduce necessary error handling?

Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred(symptoms) and possible solutions.

 A:

Q: 2) Is the offer of a solution database helpful for the notification processor?

Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficientlyqualified or very complex technical facts.

 A:

Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linkedwith a complex solution process?

 A:

Q: 4) Is there a bottleneck in specialist knowledge in your area?

 A:

Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term errorhandling?

 A:

Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handlingbased on a knowledge or error database?

Explanation: Transfer of already-identified errors and proposed solutions to the solutiondatabase.

 A:

7.7.1. Symptom

Questions:

Q: 1) Structure existing problems based on criteria?

Explanation: If yes, possible use of catalogs (code groups, codes) in R/3.

 A:

7.8. Additional Master Data

7.8.1. Counter/Measuring Point

Page 105: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 105/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring pointsand counters?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points andcounters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.

 A:

7.8.2. Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create an inspection catalog of characteristic features, causes ofdefects,and usage decisions that occur when customer service work is executed?

 A:

Q: 2) Describe your current catalogs and their structure.

 A:

7.8.3. Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard toworking conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.

 A:

Q: 2) If yes, who in your company is authorized to issue permits?

Explanation: Maintenance of authorizations for the corresponding transactions.

 A:

8. Plant Maintenance8.1. Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)

Questions:

Q: 1) How should your technical systems be structured?

Page 106: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 106/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Which components should be represented as functional locations, pieces ofequipment, assemblies and so on? Are bills of material required to represent the structure ofthe technical system? For detailed questions about the structuring of technical systems, seethe relevant technical objects.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of technical objects do you handle (for example, objects that can bedismantled or used for different purposes in different production stages etc.)?

 A:

Q: 3) How is information about technical objects organized and stored in your company (forexample, via EDV, file cards or no information at all)?

 A:

8.1.1. Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you manage objects that are immovable and that usually have a long operationallife (for example, clarification plants)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you require additional functionality to structure your maintenance objects?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) If yes, which objects need to be represented with functional locations?

 A:

Q: 4) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, costcenter levels, production process levels)?

 A:

Q: 5) Is the hierarchy for functional locations structured according to spatial, functional ortechnical viewpoints?

 A:

Q: 6) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number oflevels, installation and dismantling of equipment)?

 A:

Q: 7) At what level(s) of the hierarchy should data be entered?

Page 107: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 107/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be?

 A:

Q: 9) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (forexample, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a)from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?

 A:

Q: 11) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you need to link documents to functional locations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuringpoints and counters?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 14) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty

(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Page 108: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 108/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) Do you classify functional locations? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on thesusceptibility to damage of the installed equipment?

Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usagesite. If yes, you should work with functional locations.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time forfunctional locations?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whoseaddress(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functionallocation?

Explanation: Partner functions

 A:

Q: 21) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide acopy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archivingrequirements.

 A:

Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

 A:

8.1.2. Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Which maintenance objects must be entered as equipment master data?

 A:

Q: 2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

 A:

Page 109: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 109/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) How many pieces of equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

 A:

Q: 4) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number(by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of themanufacturer as a reference/key for that object?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (includingcosting, statistics, and so on)?

 A:

Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handleindividually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records inconjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goodsmovements)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?

 A:

Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an addresswhen you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment.

Explanation: Partner functions

 A:

Q: 11) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipmentmaster records? If yes, give some examples.

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 110: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 110/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points andcounters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether theseshould be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.

 A:

Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting

work on specific equipment?

 A:

Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories orinformation about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 20) Are some pieces of equipment created as production resources/tools?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Page 111: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 111/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Usage history

 A:

Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

 A:

Q: 23) Do you want to generate/change a related asset automatically whencreating/changing a piece of equipment, and/or vice-versa?

Explanation: This is a Workflow in both directions, which requires an assignment ofcorresponding fields, and is activated in Customizing. Changes to the equipment and/or asset

master record are also updated automatically in the corresponding asset or equipmentmaster record.

 A:

Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of yourdocument archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archivingrequirements.

 A:

8.1.3. Fleet Object

Questions:

Q: 1) Which maintenance objects must be entered as equipment master data?

 A:

Q: 2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

 A:

Q: 3) How many pieces of equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

 A:

Q: 4) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number(by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of themanufacturer as a reference/key for that object?

Page 112: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 112/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (includingcosting, statistics, and so on)?

 A:

Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handleindividually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records inconjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goodsmovements)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?

 A:

Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an addresswhen you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment.

Explanation: Partner functions

 A:

Q: 11) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipmentmaster records? If yes, give some examples.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points andcounters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you

Page 113: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 113/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether theseshould be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.

 A:

Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before startingwork on specific equipment?

 A:

Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories orinformation about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 20) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Explanation: Usage history

 A:

Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects

(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

 A:

Q: 22) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of yourdocument archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archivingrequirements.

 A:

Page 114: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 114/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 23) Which types of fleet objects do you want to manage?

Explanation: Define fleet object types.

 A:

Q: 24) Which data do you want to see/maintain within the fleet object?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects. A customer exit exists for user-defined master data (business add-in).

 A:

Q: 25) Which types of utilities and consumables do you want to maintain?

Explanation: For example, fuel or oil. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this

field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to runreports as a search help.

 A:

Q: 26) For what purpose do you intend to use your fleet objects?

Explanation: The definition of intended purpose uses a possible classification of fleet objectsfor the search. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, itneed not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help.

 A:

Q: 27) Which engine types do your fleet objects have? Do you want to maintain these?

Explanation: For example: Diesel engine, turbines and so on. Note: For 4.6B, there are noadditional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration,but can be used to run reports as a search help.

 A:

Q: 28) Which unit of consumption do you require?

Explanation: Steps for defining the units of consumption: 1. Define consumption categories(for example, energy consumption over distance or over time) 2. Create corresponding units(for example, liters/kilometer, gallons/mile, watts/hour and so on)

 A:

Q: 29) Which counter types do you require (for example, kilometer counter, consumptioncounter, time counter and so on)?

 A:

Page 115: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 115/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 30) How do you want to name your counters?

Explanation: IMG: Define special measurement positions for fleet objects

 A:

Q: 31) How do you want to calculate your consumption?

Explanation: - Which counters are used as a basis? - What unit should be used? - What isthe consumption category (for example, consumption/activity or activity/consumption ->inversion flag)? - How long should the calculation last?

 A:

8.1.4. Production Resource/Tool as Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functionallocation, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to generate/change a related asset automatically whencreating/changing a piece of equipment, and/or vice-versa?

Explanation: This is a Workflow in both directions, which requires an assignment ofcorresponding fields, and is activated in Customizing. Changes to the equipment and/or assetmaster record are also updated automatically in the corresponding asset or equipmentmaster record.

 A:

Q: 3) What kind of production resources/tools do you require?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to manage your production resources/tools by quantity alone or alsobased on localization, value, responsible person etc.?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use production resources/tools which have to be checked or calibratedregularly?

 A:

8.1.5. Reference Functional Location

Page 116: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 116/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have many similar technical structures in your organization?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have standardized functional location structures that should be represented asreference functional locations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) According to which criteria do you intend to structure your functional locationhierarchies (for example geographical, functional or technical aspects)?

 A:

8.1.6. Bill of Material for Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use functional location BOMs?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How are they structured?

 A:

Q: 3) Will you need to use engineering change management to control BOM changes?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

8.1.7. Equipment Bill of Material

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have structures for special sub-items?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, are they pieces of equipment that you want to trace on monitor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) If you use equipment hierarchies, describe some examples of when and how they arestructured.

 A:

Page 117: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 117/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you currently have equipment BOMs (spare parts lists)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) If so, are they stored electronically?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) How are equipment BOMs structured?

 A:

Q: 8) How are BOMs linked to equipment masters?

 A:

Q: 9) Will you need to use Engineering Change Management to manage your BOMs?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you also construct BOMs with alternative materials?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use variant configuration?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

8.1.8. Object Link

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to define and represent horizontal object links?

 A:

Q: 2) If so, for which of the following objects do you want to display the links?

 A:

Q: 3) Which types of relationship exist between the linked objects (1:1, 1:n, n:n)?

 A:

Page 118: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 118/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

8.1.9. Installed Base

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use IBase management (a) purely for documentation andmanagement of an object structure (i.e. a production process) or (b) as a limited substitute forbills of material?

Explanation: For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (a): Forinformation and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (b): The decisive advantage ofinstalled base management as against bills of material is that it is multi-levelled and time-based. The structure of an installed base hierarchy is possible with individualization withoutusing equipment - for example, using serial numbers (complete equipment), or withoutequipment (with only device data). However, when building an alternative structure for theequipment hierarchy, an inheritance is not possible, neither is setting a status. a status. It ispossible to install an installed base structure in the form of a subscreen in the screentemplates for a notification or a technical object using the corresponding Customizing tables.object using the corresponding Customizing tables.

 A:

Q: 2) Which object types are part of your installed base hierarchy?

 A:

8.2. Task Lists

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have work plans for service tasks in your current IT system or databases?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive maintenance task lists? If so, please provide a copy of yourdocument archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specificarchiving requirements.

 A:

8.2.1. General Task List

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require configurable task lists?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you classify general task lists? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Page 119: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 119/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) How do you group your general task lists?

Explanation: Group counter

 A:

8.3. Maintenance Plans

Questions:

Q: 1) How will you create maintenance plans (e.g., representing individual maintenanceitems or by grouping a number of maintenance items)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you plan the preventive maintenance separately for each maintenance equipmentor will you establish a preventive maintenance plan for a group of maintenance objects (e.g.,one plan for a productionline that consists of several pieces of equipment)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you have different frequencies for the execution of your maintenance tasks andwould you like to have all of them in just one maintenance plan?

Explanation: If yes -> Strategy-based maintenance plan If no -> Single-cycle maintenanceplan

 A:

Q: 4) If the maintenance plans generate service entry sheets for a MM externalmanagement, should they be directly created by the plans or after the orders arecreated/released?

 A:

Q: 5) For what types of service object do you create maintenance items?

 A:

Q: 6) Will you have pre-defined activity lists (task lists) for your different preventive

maintenance services that list the required work steps (including estimated work time), spareparts and/or tools?

 A:

Q: 7) If yes, are those activity lists specific for the different equipment types (machine types)or different functional locations for which you offer preventive maintenance?

 A:

Page 120: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 120/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Do you want to archive maintenance plans? If so, please provide a copy of yourdocument archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specificarchiving requirements.

 A:

8.3.1. Single Cycle Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenanceplan?

 A:

Q: 2) What character does the cycle have?

Explanation: The standard R/3 System is based on periodic cycles.

 A:

8.3.2. Multiple Counter Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) Should just performance-based (counter-based) or also time-based maintenancecycles be integrated into the multiple counter-based maintenance plan?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?

Explanation: Cycle sets as a copy model for maintenance cycles.

 A:

Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should beassigned to the individual maintenance cycles?

 A:

Q: 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

 A:

Q: 5) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) orlate (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenanceactivities for the same equipment?

 A:

Q: 6) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog?

 A:

Page 121: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 121/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventivemaintenance activities should be based.

Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within thefirst year.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technicalobjects?

 A:

8.3.3. Strategy Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenance

plan?

 A:

Q: 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

 A:

Q: 3) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) orlate (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenanceactivities for the same equipment?

 A:

Q: 4) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog?

 A:

Q: 5) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventivemaintenance activities should be based.

Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within thefirst year.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technicalobjects?

 A:

8.4. Solution Database

Questions:

Page 122: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 122/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you possess technical objects that are required for detailed technical information inorder to introduce necessary error handling?

Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred(symptoms) and proposed solutions.

 A:

Q: 2) Is the offer of a solution database helpful for the notification processor?

Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficientlyqualified or very complex technical facts.

 A:

Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linkedwith a complex solution process?

 A:

Q: 4) Is there a bottleneck in specialist knowledge in your area?

 A:

Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term errorhandling?

 A:

Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handlingbased on a knowledge or error database?

Explanation: Transfer of already-identified errors and proposed solutions to the solutiondatabase.

 A:

8.4.1. Symptom

Questions:

Q: 1) Structure existing problems based on criteria?

Explanation: If yes, possible use of catalogs (code groups, codes) in R/3.

 A:

8.5. Additional Master Data

8.5.1. Warranty

Questions:

Page 123: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 123/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 2) Which materials contain warranty agreements?

 A:

Q: 3) To which objects should warranties be assigned?

 A:

Q: 4) Describe the different warranties for your objects and specify whether these should belisted individually for each object.

 A:

Q: 5) What is the current procedure? Automatically or manually?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Q: 7) Which warranty counters are used?

Explanation: For example, 12 months, 60,000 km and so on.

 A:

8.5.2. Counter/Measuring Point

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring pointsand counters?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 124: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 124/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points andcounters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.

 A:

8.5.3. Revision

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there any revision planned where a production line or plant has to be shut down fora certain time?

 A:

8.5.4. Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create an inspection catalog of characteristic features, causes of

defects, and usage decisions that occur when maintenance work is executed?

 A:

Q: 2) Describe your current catalogs and their structure.

 A:

8.5.5. Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard toworking conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.

 A:

Q: 2) If yes, who in your company is authorized to issue permits?

Explanation: Maintenance of authorizations for the corresponding transactions.

 A:

9. Quality Management9.1. QM General

9.1.1. Inspection Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain instructions and descriptions for the material inspection? Give anexample for an inspection plan that you currently use and explain which critical data itcontains.

Page 125: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 125/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Are the inspection activities currently maintained in an online format and are thedetailed descriptions critical to the inspection process?

 A:

Q: 3) Will you have more than one operation in the inspection process?

Explanation: Example: Operation 10: Visual inspection of packaging Operation 20: Recordresults of laboratory analysis Describe the individual operations. (Note: Otherwise, a materialspecification may be sufficient for inspection processing in certain circumstances).

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have valid inspection descriptions and operations for each individual materialor for all materials? Describe them.

 A:

Q: 5) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available,describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

9.1.2. Work Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: For more information see "Work Center" under "General Master Data".

Explanation: This is just a note.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have multiple inspection locations (work centers) per plant? Describe theselocations, and identify how they are different.

 A:

Q: 3) Are inspectors assigned to a definite work center?

 A:

Q: 4) Will approval procedures comply to the work center or operation? Describe this indetail.

 A:

9.1.3. Inspection Characteristic/Master Inspection Characteristic

Questions:

Page 126: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 126/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you want to use qualitative and/or qualitative master inspection characteristics?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to check the control indicators?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want to classify the master inspection characteristics?

 A:

Q: 4) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available,describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

9.1.4. Processing of General Characteristics

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require value hierarchies?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you plan to use engineering change management to change characteristics?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for characteristics? Which languages arerelevant? How and when is the translation done?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you maintain country-specific characteristics?

Explanation: Examples: Shoe or clothing sizes. The appropriate sizes are entered in thesales order, depending on which country the customer is in.

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 5) What units of measure are needed for characteristic values?

 A:

Q: 6) What characteristic groups are needed?

 A:

Q: 7) What characteristic statuses are needed?

Page 127: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 127/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

9.1.5. Material Specification

Questions:

Q: 1) You need a material specification to transfer quality inspection data to batch

management. The specification completes the inspection plan or replaces it entirely, ifdetailed instructions are not required. (Information)

 A:

Q: 2) Will you use material specifications as inspection criteria for your material?

 A:

Q: 3) Will you transfer inspection data to the batch? If yes, to which characteristics does thisapply?

 A:

9.1.6. Inspection Method

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain instructions for the inspection of characteristics? How are thesecurrently stored?

 A:

Q: 2) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available,describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

9.1.7. Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: For questions about the catalog, see QM processes for results and defectsrecording and usage decisions

Explanation: This is just a note.

 A:

Q: 2) For which data are defects/results recorded for each catalog?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe your current catalogs and their structure.

 A:

Page 128: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 128/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

9.1.8. Selected Set

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use characteristic attributes for inspection characteristics? If yes, whichattributes do you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Which codes do you use for the usage decision? Are they specific to every inspectiontype?

 A:

Q: 3) Which follow-up actions should be automatically performed after the usage decision ismade?

 A:

9.1.9. Sampling Scheme

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use special sampling schemes to calculate sample sizes?

 A:

Q: 2) How are the samples to be valuated?

Explanation: Which procedure is to be used to valuate the results in the inspection lot (for

example, according to the number of nonconforming units in a lot?).

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use tables that determine the number of parts to be withdrawn?

Explanation: This means that 'n' elements are to be taken from the delivery, for example,based on the goods receipt quantity (with or without AQL authorization).

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to use sampling schemes in sample-drawing procedures?

Explanation: Do you want to determine a different number of physical samples according toa default or pattern?

 A:

9.1.10. Sampling Procedure

Questions:

Q: 1) How are the sample quantities to be calculated and what criteria are to be used?

Page 129: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 129/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Which rules are used to accept or reject a characteristic or a sample?

Explanation: For example manually, based on a control chart and so on.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use dependent or independent multiple sampling procedures?

 A:

9.1.11. Dynamic Modification Rule

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you define the inspection scope based on quality (this means for example, willyou check processes with a consistently low quality more regularly than those processes,

which constantly improve in quality)? Describe the procedure.

 A:

Q: 2) Will you vary the sample size between a defined scope (for example, 100%) and askip (that is, a certain number of deliveries or inspection lots have not been inspected).Describe which rotation intervals you use?

 A:

9.1.12. Sample-Drawing Procedure

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want to calculate the sample size?

 A:

Q: 2) Which physical-sample types (for example, primary samples, pooled samples, andreserve samples) will you draw?

Explanation: Settings for defining physical sample types in QM Customizing.

 A:

Q: 3) Which physical-sample types will you process? (for example, sample from production,competitor)

 A:

9.1.13. Production Resources/Tools

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing of

your materials?

Page 130: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 130/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) What kind of production resources/tools do you require?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require inventory management for your production resources/tools?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to manage your production resources/tools by quantity alone or alsobased on localization, value, responsible person etc.?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use production resources/tools which have to be checked or calibratedregularly?

 A:

Q: 6) QM: List any external equipment or gauges which will be used to capture results ordefects and transfer to the R/3 System.

 A:

9.1.14. QM Order

Questions:

Q: 1) In which plants should quality costs be determined?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to record quality costs for quality inspections? If yes, do you want toevaluate the costs collectively or for each inspection lot?

Explanation: Reference to QM order types QL01 und Ql02

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to record costs for quality notifications?

Explanation: Reference to QM order type QN01.

 A:

Q: 4) How will you evaluate quality costs? Do you want to evaluate your inspection costs atgoods receipt or based on the material level?

Explanation: Note: Order assignment in the material master for the inspection type.

Page 131: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 131/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Which activities (for example, personel time, setup times etc) do you want to confirmfor your QM order?

Explanation: Note: Work center / Activity types

 A:

Q: 6) In which period should the quality costs be settled?

Explanation: Reconciliation in CO of the time periods, in which orders are to be settled (forexample, monthly, quarterly, annually).

 A:

9.1.15. Archiving QM Objects

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive master inspection characteristics? If so, provide a copy of yourprocedure for archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archivingrequirements in detail.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to archive inspection methods? If so, provide a copy of your procedurefor archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirementsin detail.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to archive inspection plans? If so, provide a copy of your procedure forarchiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirements indetail.

 A:

9.2. QM in Materials Management

9.2.1. Quality Info Record

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you expect quality certificates (for example, plant certificates or analysiscertificates) from your suppliers before or during material shipping? Describe which documenttypes you need and give examples.

 A:

Page 132: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 132/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Will you require samples from your suppliers for release before shipping the goods?Describe them.

 A:

Q: 3) Describe your vendor approval process.

Explanation: How and where is your list of approved vendors managed? Are all buyersauthorized to select and approve a vendor?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you allow conditional approvals for new vendors (for example, quantity-related ortime-related limitation)?

 A:

Q: 5) Will you monitor your vendors' quality management system (for example, ISO 9000conformity)? Give examples of how and where you manage this data at the moment.

 A:

Q: 6) Describe how you block a vendor and the reasons for the block.

Explanation: Is the vendor / material combination or the vendor to be blocked?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you not want to have any inspections for some vendor/material combinations?

Explanation: Inspection control in the quality info record.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want source inspections instead of goods receipt inspections for certainmaterial/vendor combinations?

Explanation: Vendor source inspection in the info record.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you use quality assurance agreements that are specific to a material or vendor?

Explanation: Creation of quality assurance agreement in the quality info record.

 A:

Page 133: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 133/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) Will you block an incoming invoice until the quality inspection has been successfullycompleted or if the lot is rejected for payment? (Note: The block can be manually removed ifrequired).

 A:

Q: 11) Will you pre-approve a vendor sample prior to releasing the delivery? Pleasedescribe the procedure.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you have model or preliminary series inspections etc?

 A:

9.3. QM in Production

9.3.1. Routing

Questions:

Q: 1) For which business processes do you require routings?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent onthe lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require parallel or alternative sequences of operations within a routing?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for alloperations?

Explanation: Scheduling without reference to an order detemines the in-house productiontime of a material, which you can then compare with the lot-size-dependent in-houseproduction time from the material master.

 A:

Q: 5) Should capacity requirements be created for the operations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that yourvendor will process?

 A:

Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you requirestandard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?

Page 134: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 134/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) Which objects do you want to allocate to the operations?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want inspection operations in your routings?

 A:

Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printingpurposes?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)?

 A:

Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should thevalidity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing changehistories have to be transferred to the R/3 system?

 A:

Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions,mass changes etc.)?

 A:

Q: 14) Will you be measuring quality during the production process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

9.3.2. Master Recipe

Questions:

Q: 1) How many different master recipes will you need?

 A:

Q: 2) What will you use recipes for?

 A:

Q: 3) Will you have several alternative recipes for one material (for example, depending onthe lot size) and do you want these to be combined (recipe group)?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you use one recipe to produce different materials?

Page 135: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 135/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use formulas to calculate the quantities of the components (material quantitycalculation)? Do you want characteristic values such as concentration to be taken intoaccount?

 A:

Q: 6) Which control recipe destinations will you need?

 A:

Q: 7) If the control recipe destination is a person/group of people, which areas (weighing,quality inspection, production, etc.) will be affected? Do you want to represent this logicaldistribution according to user department or using material flow?

 A:

Q: 8) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of changes? How do

you want the validity of the recipe to be defined?

 A:

Q: 9) Will you require an approval procedure to change recipes? Will a digital signature berequired (change request/order)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which relationships will exist between the phases within a recipe?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want the operations/phases to create capacity requirements?

 A:

Q: 12) Are the operations/phases be relevant for the calculation?

 A:

Q: 13) Which type of processing do you want to be possible for operations?

 A:

Q: 14) Which standard values will you use for the operations (for example, labor time,machine time, setup time)?

 A:

Q: 15) Will all phases be subject to confirmation?

 A:

Page 136: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 136/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) Will you use milestone confirmations?

 A:

Q: 17) Which process instructions will you need?

 A:

Q: 18) Will special user fields be required in the master recipe for information and printingpurposes?

 A:

Q: 19) Besides the actual processing unit, will further resources be allocated to an operation(secondary resources) that are, for example, only used for a limited time (for example, labor,transportation trucks)? Do you want them to be relevant for confirmation

 A:

Q: 20) Which objects will be allocated to the phases (for example, components, productionresources/tools)?

 A:

Q: 21) Will temporary materials (INTRA) with separate material numbers be producedduring the production process that will be processed further immediately instead of beingdelivered to storage?

 A:

Q: 22) Will you carry out in-process quality inspections, (assigning inspection characteristicsto phases)?

 A:

Q: 23) Should the recording of inspection results be carried out in QM? Or should it be dealtwith in the PI-Sheet (either by a QM-Jump or by sending the information via the processmessage)?

 A:

Q: 24) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of master recipes(copy function, mass changes, etc.)?

 A:

9.4. QM in Sales and Distribution

9.4.1. QM Control in Sales

Questions:

Page 137: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 137/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Will you manage quality management documents (customer agreements about qualityassurance and technical terms of delivery)? Give an example.

 A:

Q: 2) Are these QM determinations customer-specific or are there additional material-dependent factors?

 A:

Q: 3) Will you manage electronic versions of your quality assurance agreements?

 A:

Q: 4) Would it be an advantage for you to access quality assurance documents in the R/3System?

 A:

9.5. QM in Plant Maintenance

9.5.1. Functional Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you usually have several technical objects for a customer that you want torepresent together? Do you require additional functionality to structure this accordingly?

 A:

Q: 2) If yes, which technical objects from customer sites should be combined using

functional locations?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you manage objects that are immovable and that usually have a long operationallife (for example, clarification plants)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you require additional functionality to structure your maintenance objects?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) If yes, which objects need to be represented with functional locations?

 A:

Q: 6) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, costcenter levels, production process levels)?

 A:

Page 138: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 138/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Is the hierarchy for functional locations structured according to spatial, functional ortechnical viewpoints?

 A:

Q: 8) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number oflevels, installation and dismantling of equipment)?

 A:

Q: 9) At what level(s) of the hierarchy should data be entered?

 A:

Q: 10) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be?

 A:

Q: 11) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change(for example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a)from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?

 A:

Q: 13) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to link documents to functional locations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuringpoints and counters?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 17) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Page 139: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 139/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you classify functional locations? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 20) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on thesusceptibility to damage of the installed equipment?

Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usagesite. If yes, you should work with functional locations.

 A:

Q: 21) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time for

functional locations?

 A:

Q: 22) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whoseaddress(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functionallocation?

Explanation: Partner functions

 A:

Q: 23) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide acopy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archivingrequirements.

 A:

Q: 24) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

Page 140: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 140/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

9.5.2. Equipment

Questions:

Q: 1) Which maintenance objects must be entered as equipment master data?

 A:

Q: 2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

 A:

Q: 3) How many pieces of equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

 A:

Q: 4) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number(by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of themanufacturer as a reference/key for that object?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (includingcosting, statistics, and so on)?

 A:

Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handleindividually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records inconjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods

movements)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?

 A:

Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address

when you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment.

Page 141: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 141/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Partner functions

 A:

Q: 11) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipmentmaster records? If yes, give some examples.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points andcounters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of yourvendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if yousell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty fromyour vendors).

 A:

Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether theseshould be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.

 A:

Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warrantycheck result?

 A:

Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before startingwork on specific equipment?

 A:

Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories orinformation about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Page 142: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 142/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields thatare not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.

 A:

Q: 20) Are some pieces of equipment created as production resources/tools?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Explanation: Usage history

 A:

Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects(functional location, equipment) user-specific?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects

 A:

Q: 23) Do you want to generate/change a related asset automatically whencreating/changing a piece of equipment, and/or vice-versa?

Explanation: This is a Workflow in both directions, which requires an assignment ofcorresponding fields, and is activated in Customizing. Changes to the equipment and/or assetmaster record are also updated automatically in the corresponding asset or equipmentmaster record.

 A:

Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of yourdocument archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archivingrequirements.

 A:

9.5.3. Single Cycle Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenanceplan?

 A:

Q: 2) What character does the cycle have?

Explanation: The standard R/3 System is based on periodic cycles.

Page 143: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 143/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:9.5.4. Multiple Counter Plan

Questions:

Q: 1) Should just performance-based (counter-based) or also time-based maintenancecycles be integrated into the multiple counter-based maintenance plan?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?

Explanation: Cycle sets as a copy model for maintenance cycles.

 A:

Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should be

assigned to the individual maintenance cycles?

 A:

Q: 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

 A:

Q: 5) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) orlate (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenanceactivities for the same equipment?

 A:

Q: 6) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog?

 A:

Q: 7) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventivemaintenance activities should be based.

Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the

first year.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technicalobjects?

 A:

9.5.5. Strategy Plan

Questions:

Page 144: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 144/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenanceplan?

 A:

Q: 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

 A:

Q: 3) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) orlate (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenanceactivities for the same equipment?

 A:

Q: 4) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog?

 A:

Q: 5) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventivemaintenance activities should be based.

Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within thefirst year.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technicalobjects?

 A:

9.6. Solution Database

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you possess technical objects that are required for detailed technical information inorder to introduce necessary error handling?

Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred

(symptoms) and proposed solutions. A:

Q: 2) Is the offer of a solution database helpful for the notification processor?

Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficientlyqualified or very complex technical facts.

 A:

Page 145: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 145/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linkedwith a complex solution process?

 A:

Q: 4) Is there a bottleneck in specialist knowledge in your area?

 A:

Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term errorhandling?

 A:

Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handlingbased on a knowledge or error database?

Explanation: Transfer of already-identified errors and proposed solutions to the solution

database.

 A:

9.6.1. Symptom

Questions:

Q: 1) Structure existing problems based on criteria?

Explanation: If yes, possible use of catalogs (code groups, codes) in R/3.

 A:

10. Environment, Health and Safety

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you currently obtain your MSDS phrases, hazardous substance data, ICD codes,EWC codes, and so on from content providers?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use in phrases in such a large number of languages that you need a numberof code pages (for example, 1100, 1500, 8000)?

Explanation: If so, EH&S Language Support must be initialized in Customizing.

 A:

10.1. Product Safety

Questions:

Page 146: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 146/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) How is your environmental protection organization structured (structure,responsibilities)?

 A:

10.1.1. Substance

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you handle hazardous substances (classified as such by chemicals laws)? Howmany different substances?

 A:

Q: 2) Are dangerous goods produced in your enterprise? Roughly how many?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you the first in your country to use or import some hazardous substances? Howmany substances?

 A:

Q: 4) To which countries do you deliver hazardous substances?

 A:

Q: 5) Should dangerous goods data/information be entered in the database or merely keptas safety data sheets?

 A:

Q: 6) Is there any legacy data and what is its status?

 A:

Q: 7) What format does this legacy data have?

 A:

Q: 8) What are the existing types of substances, for example, pure substances, hazardoussubstances, products, preparations, other?

 A:

Q: 9) Which views does your substance master have, for example, physical-chemical data,toxicological data, legal requirements, legal ratings, proven technical knowledge?

 A:

Q: 10) Are you familiar with the EH&S standard properties tree and to what extent does it

fulfill your requirements?

Page 147: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 147/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 11) Is your substance data subject to different levels of confidentiality. Which ones(internal, official, released, other)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you have a detailed authorization concept? Describe it.

 A:

Q: 13) For which jurisdictions do you enter substance data and/or create substance reports,for example, EU, USA, Japan?

 A:

Q: 14) Which data provider supplies your data and in what format?

 A:

Q: 15) Which substance names, numbers, and formulas do you use?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you distribute your substance data to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

 A:

Q: 17) What relationship exists between your substances and your materials, for example1:1, 1:n, n:m, other?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you maintain the notification status for your products? If so, for which substancelists?

 A:

10.1.2. Phrase

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your legacy systems contain phrases?

 A:

Q: 2) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?

 A:

Page 148: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 148/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized orreplaced?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you distribute your phrases to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

 A:

10.1.3. Report

Questions:

Q: 1) Which categories of substance reports do you use and/or create, for example, MSDS,labels, TREMcards, standard operating procedures, other?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you label used waste containers?

 A:

Q: 3) Do the contents and the structure of the standard report templates fulfill yourrequirements?

 A:

Q: 4) How many different material safety data sheets exist in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 5) How is shipping of your substance reports triggered?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the recipient of your substance reports determined?

 A:

Q: 7) How do you want to set up the shipping process (status network)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to set up an output check for the shipping order?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to work with acknowledgements of receipt?

Page 149: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 149/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to log the return of the acknowledgement of receipt?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want to save the historical report documents?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you want to define your own objects for report management in addition to theexisting objects "person who had accident, material master, substance master, work area"?

 A:

10.2. Dangerous Goods Management

Questions:

Q: 1) How is the dangerous goods organization in your enterprise governed and whichenterprise area performs which tasks?

 A:

Q: 2) Are external enterprises used to transport dangerous goods?

 A:

Q: 3) Which areas also require read access to dangerous goods data and for whatpurpose?

 A:

Q: 4) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and dangerous goodsmanagement organized in your enterprise?

Explanation: Important for link between accident reports in accordance with the Germandangerous goods officer directive (GbV) and incident/accident management (workers'

compensation association). A:

Q: 5) How is cooperation between product safety, waste management, and dangerousgoods management organized (phrases, substance properties)?

 A:

10.2.1. Dangerous Goods

Questions:

Page 150: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 150/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you ship dangerous goods that require labeling?

 A:

Q: 2) On the basis of which validity areas/regulations are dangerous goods shipped, forexample, IMDG, IATA, ADR, 49 CFR?

 A:

Q: 3) Which modes of transport are used for shipping: road, sea, air, rail, inland waterway?

 A:

Q: 4) Which shipping types are used in connection with the modes of transport, forexample, road (shipping company), postal service, parcel service, courier service?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you make use of exceptions and exemptions when transporting dangerous goods?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have different UN numbers for different dangerous goods regulations in yourproduct range?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you want to transfer dangerous goods data from existing systems or obtain datafrom providers?

 A:

Q: 8) Which data provider supplies you with regulations data and in what format?

 A:

Q: 9) Which product groups do you have to classify as dangerous goods, for example,paints, solvents, key chemicals?

 A:

Q: 10) How many different dangerous goods ratings do you have? How big is yourdangerous goods product range?

 A:

Q: 11) Which dangerous goods checks do you want to perform?

 A:

Q: 12) Which other dangerous goods checks do you need?

Page 151: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 151/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 13) Should dangerous goods be classified (EHS expert)?

 A:

10.2.2. Phrase

Questions:

Q: 1) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized orreplaced?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?

 A:

10.2.3. TREMcard

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there completed tremcards available in your enterprise? In what format are they?

 A:

Q: 2) Are these existing tremcards individual, collective, class, or group tremcards?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you have tremcards in different languages?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to transfer the existing tremcards?

Explanation: Transfer as inbound documents.

 A:

10.2.4. Dangerous Goods Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Are transport documents created in your enterprise or are they created externally?

 A:

Page 152: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 152/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Are transport documents created with EDP support?

 A:

10.3. Waste

Questions:

Q: 1) How is waste management organized in your enterprise (centrally, decentrally)?

 A:

Q: 2) Which validity area does this waste management have?

 A:

Q: 3) Are external enterprises given the task of disposal processing?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you perform on-site disposal?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have central/decentral accumulation points?

 A:

Q: 6) Are there any disposal channels that are not predefined?

 A:

Q: 7) Is waste management organized to be cross-company code?

 A:

Q: 8) Is waste management organized to be cross-plant (number of plants)?

 A:

Q: 9) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and waste managementorganized in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 10) How is cooperation between waste management and dangerous goodsmanagement organized in your enterprise (phrases, substance properties)?

 A:

Q: 11) Is legacy data available in electronic format that is to be transferred?

Page 153: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 153/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 12) Do you want to distribute waste costs proportionally among the cost centers thatgenerated the waste (coordination with FI-CO)?

 A:

Q: 13) Is purchasing organized centrally or decentrally (coordination with MM)?

 A:

Q: 14) Is sales organized centrally or decentrally (coordination with SD)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you have detailed requirements for an authorization concept?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you distribute your master data to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

 A:

Q: 17) How are your waste generator numbers structured?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you exchange data with external service agents?

 A:

10.3.1. Waste Master

10.3.1.1. Material Master

Questions:

Q: 1) How many types of waste are produced in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there materials for this waste which you have to take back (for example, forpackaging materials) ?

 A:

Q: 3) Are there any wastes of similar types that may have to be assigned to different wastecodes (owing to origin or disposer)?

 A:

10.3.1.2. Specifications

Page 154: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 154/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Which are the jurisdictions for which you enter waste properties and/or create reports?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you also use internal company waste descriptions parallel to the descriptions inofficial waste catalogs?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you make your own waste analyses and do you manage them in the system?

 A:

10.3.1.3. Waste Code/Waste Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) How hazardous are your wastes?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you manage a number of waste catalogs?

 A:

10.3.2. Waste Generator/Waste Disposer/WasteTransporter/Authority

Questions:

Q: 1) Are wastes generated that are sent abroad?

 A:

Q: 2) Where are internal points of waste generation defined/structured in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you assign wastes?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you perform the tasks of a waste transporter?

 A:

Q: 5) Are there different disposal channels for one and the same waste (price/quantityselection, interface to MM)?

 A:

Q: 6) Do waste approval books need to be created by the disposer for the waste generator?

Page 155: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 155/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 7) Do you perform the tasks of a waste disposer?

 A:

Q: 8) Which authorities are responsible for you?

 A:

10.3.3. Waste Approval

Questions:

Q: 1) Are waste approvals managed or created with EDP support (specification database orinbound document)?

 A:

Q: 2) Which data is managed in conjunction with waste approvals?

 A:

Q: 3) Are waste quantities recorded and managed in conjunction with the waste approvalprocedure?

 A:

Q: 4) Is the handover of wastes recorded and managed (note: dock receipts, wastemanifests)?

Explanation: Basis for creating waste life-cycle analyses with EDP support.

 A:

Q: 5) In addition to the data for waste approvals, is data on transporters and disposalfacilities stored electronically (for example, planned disposal facilities, scope of a transportlicense)?

 A:

Q: 6) Are other documentation and approval obligations managed by external serviceagents in conjunction with the waste approval procedure?

 A:

Q: 7) Are the costs in connection with the waste approval procedure (creating, analysesetc.) entered and managed?

 A:

Page 156: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 156/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Which types of waste approval exist?

 A:

10.4. Industrial Hygiene and Safety

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use SAP Business Partners?

Explanation: The following roles have been defined: report recipient, external persons,physician, hospital.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use SAP Organizational Management?

Explanation: The following objects are required: exposure group, position.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use SAP Personnel Administration?

Explanation: If not, this means certain accident processing functions will be restricted.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use SAP Time Management?

Explanation: If not, this means no downtimes and no accident statistics can be determined.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use SAP Plant Maintenance (PM)?

Explanation: If not, this means certain functions for technical safety measures andincident/accident management will be restricted.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you use SAP Materials Management (MM)?

Explanation: If not, this means certain hazardous substance register functions will berestricted.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use SAP Production Planning (PP)?

Page 157: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 157/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Necessary for integration of work area/work center.

 A:

Q: 8) Which companies is your industrial hygiene and safety organization responsible forand in which jurisdiction are they based?

 A:

Q: 9) How is industrial hygiene and safety and the role of safety officer organized in yourenterprise (area) and which enterprise area performs which tasks?

 A:

Q: 10) How is the industrial hygiene and safety organization mapped in data processing?

Explanation: Modeling via Organizational Management.

 A:

Q: 11) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and occupational healthorganized in your enterprise?

Explanation: Important for data transfer between injury/illness log and incident/accidentmanagement.

 A:

Q: 12) How is cooperation between product safety and industrial hygiene and safetyorganized in your enterprise?

Explanation: Coordination of the use of phrases, substance properties.

 A:

Q: 13) Are external service agents used to perform tasks and which tasks do they perform?

 A:

Q: 14) Which tasks are performed centrally and which tasks decentrally in the respectiveareas of responsibility?

 A:

Q: 15) Which access authorizations or restrictions are necessary for entering andevaluating master data and movement data?

 A:

Page 158: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 158/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) Do you maintain a personal protection equipment catalog in your enterprise?

Explanation: Implemented as its own material group (MM).

 A:

Q: 17) Do you use maintenance plans in your enterprise?

Explanation: Implemented using Plant Maintenance (PM), maintenance plans.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want health and safety briefings in your enterprise to be documented withEDP support?

Explanation: Until this function has been included in the EH&S component, Training andEvent Management (HR, company instructions) is used to provide the function.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you want qualification measures (safety officers) in your enterprise to bedocumented with EDP support?

Explanation: Using Training and Event Management.

 A:

Q: 20) Do you want site inspections in your enterprise to be documented with EDP support?

Explanation: Implemented in risk assessment (checklist, safety measure tracking).

 A:

10.4.1. Phrase

Questions:

Q: 1) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized orreplaced?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?

 A:

Page 159: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 159/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you distribute your phrases to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

 A:

10.4.2. Work Area

Questions:

Q: 1) How many work areas are there in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 2) What work areas and work area categories are there?

Explanation: The use of patterns (sample work areas) can reduce the amount of time andeffort needed to enter and update data.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the work areas structured (hierarchical work area structure)?

 A:

Q: 4) Which IHS data do you want to appear in standard operating procedures?

Explanation: Work area-related and/or substance-related agent types are possible; specificinformation is stored directly under the work area.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you assign the work area to existing organizational structures (plant, costcenter, storage location, work center, functional location)?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have specific software for managing your work areas? Which software is this?

 A:

Q: 7) Are there any existing work areas in your legacy system that can be used?

 A:

10.4.3. Agent (Industrial Hygiene and Safety)

Questions:

Q: 1) Which data is managed within the scope of the work center and risk assessment?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use operation statuses to differentiate exposure situations in work areas?

Page 160: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 160/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) What types of agents are there in your enterprise (for example, chemical substances,noise, psychological factors)?

 A:

Q: 4) How many individual agents are there in total in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use exposure groups?

Explanation: Can you group persons with the same exposure to form exposure groups? Tokeep the time and effort spent on data maintenance to a minimum, the number of exposuregroups should be selected carefully.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have any work areas or persons with agents that change constantly?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have any persons with work areas that change constantly?

 A:

Q: 8) Are you also responsible for external persons or employees of other companies?

 A:

Q: 9) Which reference values do the exposure levels relate to (legal, enterprise-specific, orother)?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you require country-specific reference values? If so, for which countries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you take the measurements yourself? If so, which procedure do you use?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you have specific software for managing your agent data? Which software isthis?

 A:

Page 161: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 161/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Is there any existing agent data in your legacy system that can be used?

 A:

10.4.4. Accident

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you only document accidents that have to be reported or all incidents with orwithout injury to persons?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you record cross-group and cross-country statistics for incidents and accidents?

 A:

Q: 3) Which accident reports do you require?

Explanation: Only the German accident report is available.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you track times and costs for incidents and accidents?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you track follow-up activities for incidents and accidents?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you use questionnaires for incident/accident analysis?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use workers' compensation association keys or similar to classify accidents?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you have any special software for managing incident/accident data? Which

software is this?

 A:

Q: 9) Is there any existing incident/accident data in your legacy system that needs to betransferred?

 A:

10.4.5. Safety Measures

Questions:

Page 162: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 162/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Which of the following safety measure categories do you use?

Explanation: Only technical safety measure categories can be tracked subsequently in PlantMaintenance (PM).

 A:

Q: 2) Which other safety measure categories do you need?

 A:

Q: 3) Which of the following safety measure types do you use?

 A:

Q: 4) Which other safety measure types do you need?

 A:

10.4.6. Report

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there any completed standard operating procedures in your enterprise? In whichformat are they?

 A:

Q: 2) Are the existing standard operating procedures related to substances or work areas orboth?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to transfer the existing standard operating procedures?

Explanation: Transfer as inbound documents.

 A:

10.5. Occupational Health

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use SAP Business Partners?

Explanation: The following roles have been defined: health center, physician, laboratory.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use SAP Organizational Management?

Explanation: The following objects can be used: exposure group, position, job, task.

Page 163: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 163/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use SAP Personnel Administration?

Explanation: If not, this means certain accident processing functions will be restricted.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use SAP Time Management?

Explanation: If not, this means no downtimes and no accident statistics can be determined.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use SAP Materials Management (MM)?

Explanation: Usage possible for inventory management in Occupational Health.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have one or more of your own health centers or do you work with externalservice agents?

 A:

Q: 7) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and occupational health

organized in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 8) Are you responsible for a number of countries?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you support other enterprises as a service provider?

 A:

Q: 10) How is occupational health including first-aiders and company paramedics organizedin your enterprise (area) and which enterprise areas perform which tasks?

 A:

Q: 11) How is occupational health mapped in data processing?

Explanation: Modeling via Organizational Management.

 A:

Page 164: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 164/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) Which tasks are performed centrally and which tasks decentrally in the respectiveareas of responsibility?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you want to document medical examination results in addition to the legalrequirements (protocol log)?

 A:

Q: 14) Which access authorizations or restrictions are necessary for entering andevaluating master data and movement data?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you want qualification measures (first-aiders) in your enterprise to bedocumented with EDP support?

Explanation: Via Training and Event Management.

 A:

Q: 16) How do you schedule your appointments?

Explanation: By telephone, invitation list, mail, workflow?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you want to document occupational diseases?

Explanation: Limited possibilities via incident/accident log (incident/accident management).

 A:

10.5.1. Agent (Occupational Health)

Questions:

Q: 1) What types of agents are there in your enterprise (for example, chemical substances,noise, psychological factors)?

 A:

Q: 2) How many individual agents are there in total in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use exposure groups?

Page 165: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 165/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Can you group persons with the same exposure to form exposure groups? Tokeep the time and effort spent on data maintenance to a minimum, the number of exposuregroups should be selected carefully.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have any work areas or persons with agents that change constantly?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have any persons with work areas that change constantly?

 A:

Q: 6) Are you also responsible for external persons or employees of other companies?

 A:

Q: 7) Which reference values do the exposure levels relate to (legal, enterprise-specific, orother)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you require country-specific reference values? If so, for which countries?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you take the measurements yourself? If so, which procedure do you use?

 A:

Q: 10) Is there any existing agent data in your legacy system that can be used?

 A:

10.5.2. Protocols

Questions:

Q: 1) Which regulatory health surveillance protocols are necessary in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 2) Which of the following health surveillance protocol types do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) Which of the following occupational health services does your Occupational Healthdept. offer?

 A:

Q: 4) Which other occupational health services does your enterprise offer?

Page 166: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 166/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Are you responsible for a number of countries and jurisdictions?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have health surveillance protocols and appointments in your legacy system(protocol log) that are to be transferred?

 A:

10.5.3. Medical Examinations

Questions:

Q: 1) Which medical examinations are necessary in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have an assignment between medical examinations and health surveillanceprotocols?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to transfer laboratory data automatically?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you require interfaces to medical devices (for example, an audiometer)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have examination results in your legacy system that are to be transferred?

 A:

10.5.4. Medical Tests

Questions:

Q: 1) Which tests are assigned to your medical examinations?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you save the results of the medical tests (blood count, audiograms, and so on)?

 A:

10.5.5. Questionnaire

Questions:

Q: 1) Do occupational health questionnaires already exist in your enterprise?

Page 167: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 167/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Are the questionnaires evaluated mechanically?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you interested in automatic questionnaire scanning?

 A:

Q: 4) Are you interested in online answering (intranet, Internet)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you require questionnaires in a number of languages?

 A:

10.5.6. Question Catalog

Questions:

Q: 1) Does a collection of occupational health questions already exist which are coded forstatistics purposes?

Explanation: It is advisable to convert existing questions with user-defined answers toquestions with answer criteria in order to make them easier to evaluate.

 A:

10.5.7. Diagnosis Key

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use ICD codes?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use your own diagnosis keys?

 A:

10.5.8. Injury/Illness Log

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to maintain other activities (administering medication, advice etc.) inaddition to first aid services (first aid log)?

 A:

Q: 2) Which of the following types of injury/illness log entry do you want to use?

 A:

Page 168: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 168/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you require other types in addition?

 A:

Q: 4) Which of these types do you want to transfer to incident/accident management?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have a specific software program for keeping the first aid log?

 A:

Q: 6) Is there any existing data in your legacy system that you want to transfer?

 A:

Q: 7) Are injury/illness log entries also to be made for external employees?

 A:

10.5.9. Reports

Questions:

Q: 1) Which of the predefined reports for the medical service do you require?

Explanation: In SAPscript form.

 A:

11. Financial Accounting11.1. G/L Account

Questions:

Q: 1) What procedure do you use when you need to create new account numbers?

Explanation: This can occur centrally or decentralized; Sample accounts can be used.

 A:

Q: 2) Can you define groups of general ledger accounts that require similar information inthe master record?

 A:

Q: 3) How many retained earnings accounts do you have?

 A:

Page 169: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 169/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) For which general ledger accounts do you wish to display line items?

 A:

Q: 5) Which accounts do you wish to manage on an open item basis (for example, bankclearing accounts)?

 A:

Q: 6) Which accounts do you wish to maintain in foreign currency (for example, bankaccounts)?

 A:

Q: 7) Describe any special requirements when posting to particular general ledger accounts(for example, expense accounts require an associated cost center).

 A:

Q: 8) What criteria do you use to search for G/L accounts?

Explanation: Matchcode

 A:

Q: 9) Which of your General Ledger accounts are not relevant to tax?

 A:

11.2. Ledger

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have to report in accordance with cost of sales accounting?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have special statutory accounting requirements that are not covered in otherR/3 applications? Example: Currency translation of a foreign subsidiary, different fiscal year

ends to the international trading partner.

Explanation: A special type of rendering of accounts is meant, which requires a characteristicnot contained in a standard SAP database.

 A:

Q: 3) Have you defined the necessary domains and data elements in the ABAP Dictionary?

 A:

Page 170: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 170/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

11.3. Legal Consolidation

11.3.1. Item

Questions:

Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chartof accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)?

Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financialstatements can be created parallel according to different requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the incomestatement?

 A:

Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or periodaccounting?

Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION:then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary!

 A:

Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statementitems)?

 A:

Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the datareported - on account level or item level?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category".

Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/Lchart of accounts or a financial statement version.

Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under theunit integration. the unit integration.

 A:

Page 171: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 171/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for postingdeferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancingadjustment.

Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheetDeferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriatedretained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings

 A:

11.3.2. Subitem

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset

transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your owncharacteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values?

 A:

Q: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

 A:

11.3.3. Sets (Namespace)

Questions:

Q: 1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in allkinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination andreporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets.

 A:

11.4. Funds Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the relationship between the Financial Accounting fiscal year and the FundsManagement fiscal year (Budget year/ budget periods)

 A:

Q: 2) Provide more details on the number of budget periods, special adjustment periodsand description of what is accomplished/processed in this special periods.

 A:

Page 172: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 172/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Are there special budgetary structures to cover interim periods / special periods (e.g. ifbudget has not been approved in time: provisional budgets)? How are these structuresrelated to the budget structures of the adopted budget?

 A:

Q: 4) Please provide detail information on legal requirements within the budgetmanagement sector (Financial regulations, internal rules, ....)

 A:

Q: 5) Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget/master data hierarchy)and the current nomenclature/scale. Create a list of the organizational units that areresponsible for the budget (execution).

Explanation: Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget hierarchy). Pleaseexplain the current existing nomenclature/numbering (list the organizational units that areresponsible for the budget)

 A:

Q: 6) Are there any legal requirements for nomenclature /structure of the master data?

 A:

Q: 7) Is it possible to categorize the types of expenditure? Create a list of expendituretypes/categories and describe how these relate to the execution level.

 A:

Q: 8) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) within ayear.

 A:

Q: 9) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) over aperiod of years.

 A:

Q: 10) Describe the quantity and timing of changes of the budget structure

 A:

Q: 11) Describe which information objects (master data) have to remain online in thesystem, and for how long.

 A:

Q: 12) Provide an overview of the volume of master data (FM).

 A:

Page 173: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 173/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Explain which legacy data (historical data) needs to be transferred from the previoussystem to Funds Management (level of detail, number of years, ...).

 A:

11.4.1. Funds Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the funds center?Describe the existing (planned) structure.

 A:

Q: 2) Generate a list of all information to be stored at funds center level (list of fields, shortdescription, and properties of fields).

 A:

Q: 3) Which information could be changed for a funds center? Create a list of all fields/fieldcontents.

 A:

11.4.2. Commitment Item

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the commitmentitem? Describe the existing (planned) structure.

 A:

Q: 2) List the information to be stored at commitment item level (list of fields, shortdescription, and properties of fields).

 A:

Q: 3) Which information may possibly be changed for a commitment item? Generate a listof all fields/field contents.

 A:

11.4.3. Fund

Questions:

Q: 1) Generate a list of funds origins (funds, funds from secondary sources). Are thesefunds from secondary sources budgeted and assigned separately? Should these funds bedisplayed separately for budgeting and execution?

 A:

Page 174: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 174/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Provide an overview of the different fund types (for example, special revenue,donations,....).

 A:

Q: 3) Provide a list and a short description of your budget sources.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you receive grants? If so, provide detailed information (USA).

Explanation: If you manage different funds (financing subsidies): Describe thecharacteristics/special features/Funds Management requirements for these funds (life,reporting period, special features with reference to the budget and budget execution).

 A:

Q: 5) If you manage different funds (grants): Describe the characteristics/special

features/FM requirements for the fund (lifetime, reporting periods, special features withregard to budget and budget execution).

 A:

Q: 6) Is it possible to group the used funds (from secondary sources)? If so, describe thegroups and the funds belonging to them.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have special funds for internal services? How do you distribute the accrued

expenses to other funds?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you have to produce financial statements by funds, fund groups, or fund types?Provide an overview of those funds. (USA)

 A:

Q: 9) Are budget/actual reports produced for funds/fund groups/fund type levels? Providean overview.

 A:

Q: 10) Is there any special nomenclature (organization) for the name of the fund? Describethe existing (planned) structure.

 A:

Q: 11) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, shortdescription, and properties of fields).

 A:

Page 175: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 175/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) Which information could be changed for a fund? Create a list of all fields/fieldcontents.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you have endowment funds? If so, please provide detailed information.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you have grants (to be repaid, or not to be repaid) that are part of your budget butare managed separately? If so, provide detailed information.

 A:

11.4.4. Application of Funds

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the application offunds? Describe the existing (planned) structure.

 A:

Q: 2) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, shortdescription, and properties of fields).

 A:

Q: 3) Which information may possibly changed for an application of funds? Generate a listof all fields/field contents.

 A:

12. Treasury12.1. General

12.1.1. Business Partner

Questions:

Q: 1) What "categories" do you use to distinguish between different types of businesspartner?

 A:

Q: 2) Are your business partners natural persons, legal persons, or both?

 A:

Q: 3) Are the partners related to each other?

Page 176: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 176/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

12.1.2. House Banks

Questions:

Q: 1) Which bank accounts do you use to process payments for your money markettransactions?

 A:

Q: 2) Provide an overview of your house banks (the banks you have accounts with).

 A:

12.1.3. Limits

Questions:

Q: 1) For each limit, specify which flows should be included in the calculation (only assets,

only liabilities, both assets and liabilities) and whether the amounts should be added orsubtracted.

 A:

12.2. Treasury Management

12.2.1. Class

Questions:

Q: 1) Make a qualified estimate of your average positions for each class (annual average).

 A:

Q: 2) Specify the quantities for each product group (number of securities accounts, numberof positions per securities account, number of classes).

 A:

Q: 3) Which fields do you require for master data maintenance?

 A:

12.2.2. Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) For what purposes do you use reference links between transactions?

 A:

12.2.3. Securities Account

Questions:

Page 177: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 177/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) How many securities accounts do you have at present?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to group your securities accounts into position valuation units (acrossseveral securities accounts)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you split the positions in securities accounts that are not part of the premiumreserve fund into residual assets, restricted assets and unencumbered assets? (Germany)

 A:

12.2.4. Position Indicator

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you structure the balance sheet accounts for securities in the general ledger

(determination of account assignment reference)?

 A:

12.2.5. Market Data

Questions:

Q: 1) Which rates/prices do you need to value your positions?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you currently update your security prices (automatically or manually)?

 A:

12.3. Loans

12.3.1. Loan Products

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there a product sheet or product description for loans?

 A:

Q: 2) According to which criteria have you classified your loan portfolio (for example,according to product, term, ...)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you manage loans given and/or loans taken?

 A:

Q: 4) Roughly categorize the types of loan you manage.

Page 178: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 178/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Do you manage foreign currency loans?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you post loans on the basis of customer accounts? (are payments monitored?)

 A:

12.3.2. Collateral

Questions:

Q: 1) To what extent do you manage assigned loans (undisclosed assignments)?

 A:

Q: 2) To what extent do you manage guaranteed loans? Who are the relevant guarantors?To which loan products do guarantees apply?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you process grants/subsidies to borrowers in conjunction with the relevantinstitutions?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)?

 A:

Q: 5) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)?

 A:

Q: 6) Which basic data / assignment data do you enter in relation to collateral?

 A:

12.3.3. Collateral Objects

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you determine collateral values? Who produces expert reports (technicaldepartment, external expert)?

 A:

Q: 2) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)?

 A:

Page 179: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 179/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)?

 A:

12.3.4. Filed Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you intend to use file management to control the loan process (e.g. have all therequired documents been received?), or merely to archive the filed documents?

 A:

Q: 2) What kind of documents do you have to administer?

 A:

12.3.5. Condition Structure

Questions:

Q: 1) Which different condition structures do you use (annuities, installments, finalrepayment)? To which product categories do they apply?

 A:

Q: 2) What are the resulting condition types (nominal interest, annuity repayment,commitment interest)?

 A:

Q: 3) To what extent do you manage variable-rate loans? Which loans are they?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Do you sendcontract offers or contracts to the customer? Do you apply standard conditions or grantindividual conditions?

 A:

Q: 5) Which effective interest method do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you deal with loan discounts and premiums?

 A:

12.4. Market Risk Management

Questions:

Page 180: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 180/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Should valuations be differentiated according to the bid/ask rates?

 A:

12.4.1. Reference Interest Rate

Questions:

Q: 1) Which reference interest rates are required?

 A:

12.4.2. Yield Curves

Questions:

Q: 1) Which yield curves are required? Which reference interest rates (interfaces) should beused as a basis for defining the yield curves?

 A:

12.4.3. Volatility

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use option instruments? Which?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you require your own volatility type for value at risk calculations?

 A:

12.4.4. Reporting

Questions:

Q: 1) Which market data parameters are used for position valuation?

 A:

Q: 2) Which product types do you want to value differently from the standard?

 A:

Q: 3) Which additional flows (such as premiums or charges) do you want to include in thevaluation?

Explanation: For additional flows you use flow category '90'.

 A:

12.4.5. Prices/NPVs for OTC Transactions

Questions:

Page 181: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 181/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Should the net present values calculated by the system be saved?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to include net present values that have been calculated externally in themark-to-market position valuation?

 A:

12.4.6. Scenario

Questions:

Q: 1) Which market data simulations do you want to carry out?

 A:

12.4.7. Market Data Shift

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate relative changes to market data in your evaluations?

 A:

12.4.8. Statistics Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations (variance/covariance)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to calculate your volatilities and correlations?

 A:

12.4.9. Correlation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations (variance/covariance)?

 A:

12.4.10. Risk Hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations?

 A:

Q: 2) Which risk factors do you want to consider for your risk evaluations?

 A:

Page 182: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 182/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

13. Revenue and Cost Controlling13.1. Overhead Cost Controlling

13.1.1. Cost Element

13.1.1.1. Primary Cost Element

Questions:

Q: 1) Define primary cost elements based on the definition of the chart of account.

 A:

Q: 2) Reserve a number range in the chart of accounts for the definition of CO-specificaccounts/primary cost elements: which additional primary cost elements do you need (suchas for accruals)?

 A:

13.1.1.2. Secondary Cost Element

Questions:

Q: 1) Define secondary cost elements for planning, allocation and reporting purposes.

 A:

13.1.1.3. Cost Element Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Define cost element groups for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes. A:

13.1.2. Cost Center

13.1.2.1. Cost Center

Questions:

Q: 1) Define cost centers as the lowest level in your organizational structure at which youhold one person responsible for the expenses incurred (check whether you have covered thewhole organization).

 A:

13.1.2.2. Standard Hierarchy for Cost Centers

Questions:

Q: 1) Take your corporate organizational structure and build a hierarchy according to levelsof responsibilities, with cost centers as the lowest level.

 A:

13.1.2.3. Cost Center Group

Questions:

Page 183: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 183/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Besides the standard hierarchy, do you need other alternative structure (groups) ofcost centers (for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes)?

 A:

13.1.3. Activity Type

13.1.3.1. Activity Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the type of activity performed by each cost center. Do this by defining one ormore measurable activity type(s) for each cost center.

 A:

Q: 2) Since activity types are posted as secondary cost elements, have you specified thesecondary cost elements to which you want to assign the activity type (one-to-one, or onecost element for more than one activity type)?

 A:

13.1.3.2. Activity Type Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Group your activity types into different categories or similar attributes for planning,allocation and reporting purposes.

 A:

13.1.4. Statistical Key Figures

13.1.4.1. Statistical Key Figures

Questions:

Q: 1) Which statistical key figures do you want to use for allocations and reporting (such astelephone units, headcount, and so on)?

 A:

13.1.4.2. Statistical Key Figure Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Define groups of statistical key figures (such as the group for all headcount statistical

figures). A:

13.1.5. Business Process

13.1.5.1. Business Process

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to define business processes across different areas of your organizationand plan, enter, and allocate overhead costs on the basis of these?

Page 184: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 184/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Unlike activity types, business processes can receive costs from more than onecost center. The process costs can then either be allocated to Cost Object Controlling, or toProfitability Analysis.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Define your business processes (such as sales-order processing).

 A:

13.1.5.2. Standard Hierarchy for Business Processes

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the standard hierarchy of processes for planning, allocating and reportingbusiness process costs.

 A:

13.1.5.3. Business Process Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you group your business processes alternatively by categories or similar attributesso that you can plan, allocate and report on aggregated levels?

 A:

13.1.6. Internal Order

Questions:

Q: 1) What business criteria do you use to classify your internal orders (for example,overhead orders, accrual orders, investment orders, statistical orders, and so on)?

 A:

Q: 2) What are the types of orders that will be used in the controlling area (such asinvestments, marketing, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 3) Should some of the orders be used for information purposes only - that is, should thereal posting be on the cost center?

 A:

13.2. Product Cost Controlling

13.2.1. Procurement Alternative

Questions:

Q: 1) Are you working with multiple supply sources (different vendors) or multiple productionmethods (in-house production and subcontracting) for the same material?

Page 185: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 185/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

13.2.2. Cost Component

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the structure of your product cost components (40 cost components max)!

 A:

Q: 2) Which cost components should be part of the product`s standard price?

 A:

Q: 3) Define the calculation method for each cost component.

Explanation: Define the calculation method for each cost component: 1. Activity quantity xactivity price 2. Material quantity x price (standard price, moving average price, purchasing

info record......) 3. Process quantity x process price 4. Percentage overhead

 A:

Q: 4) Do you require an alternative structure that breaks down the activity and processcosts in accordance with their original costs (such as wages, salaries, energy, depreciation)?

 A:

Q: 5) Which cost components should be part of the product's cost of goods manufactured inProfitability Analysis?

 A:

13.2.3. Product Cost Collectors

Questions:

Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one costcollector for each production method or for each material?

 A:

13.2.4. Material Ledger Data

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you intend to value the material with more than one currency or valuationapproach? What are those currencies/approaches?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to make subsequent allocations of variances (from purchasing,production) for raw materials and material produced in-house?

 A:

Page 186: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 186/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you want to differentiate between procurement alternatives and manufacturingprocesses for your actual costs?

 A:

13.3. Profitability Analysis

13.3.1. Characteristics13.3.1.1. Characteristic Definition

Questions:

Q: 1) List the dimensions (characteristics) that you want to create contribution marginaccounting for, according to your reporting requirements.

Explanation: Examples of characteristics: - Region - Sales organization - ...

 A:

13.3.1.2. Characteristic Values

Questions:

Q: 1) For the characteristics defined in the previous question, specify values (such as,regions: North, west, east, south)

 A:

13.3.1.3. Characteristic Derivation

Questions:

Q: 1) List the terms (characteristics) that do not have master data, and state how they are

dependent on other criteria.

 A:

Q: 2) List the terms (characteristics) that are dependent on each other in a hierarchy.

Explanation: Examples: Determine sales office, region

 A:

13.3.2. Value Fields

13.3.2.1. Definition of Value Fields

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the report rows (value fields) that you wish to analyze.

 A:

Q: 2) Are you interested only in the revenues and costs that are directly related to productsales?

 A:

Page 187: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 187/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you also wish to see other product-related overhead costs?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you also wish to see other income or expenditures that are not related to yourregular business activity (e.g. product production or sales)?

 A:

Q: 5) Decide which value fields can be posted as reconcilable with FI (true), and which areto be filled with accrual valuations.

 A:

13.3.3. Condition Types

13.3.3.1. Definition of Condition Types

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want information on accrued values for your result information, that are notdefined as conditions in SD, or do you require user-defined condition types in CO-PA forplanning purposes?

 A:

14. Enterprise Controlling

14.1. Consolidation14.1.1. Consolidation Chart of Acounts / FS Item Hierarchy

Questions:

Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chartof accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)?

Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financialstatements can be created parallel according to different requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the incomestatement?

 A:

Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or periodaccounting?

Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION:then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary!

Page 188: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 188/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statementitems)?

 A:

Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the datareported - on account level or item level?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category".Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/Lchart of accounts or a financial statement version.

Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under theunit integration. the unit integration.

 A:

Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for postingdeferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancingadjustment.

Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheetDeferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriatedretained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings

 A:

14.1.2. Breakdown Categories

Questions:

Q: 1) How many breakdown categories can be derived from your reporting system? Whichdifferent details would you like to see within a consolidation chart of accounts?

Explanation: The requested detail of FS items is controlled via the breakdown category. Thedetails are delivered in standard by: - Partner - Transaction currency - Year of acquisition -Subitem - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics - if necessary up to 5 furthercustom characteristics

 A:

Page 189: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 189/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Do you want to differentiate elimination differences between currency-related andother differences?

Explanation: The split differences requires the detail of a FS item by transaction currency.currency.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

14.1.3. Custom Characteristics

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need further custom characteristics, in addition to the standardsubassignments?

Explanation: Note: - cross-client setting - as the data base is to be extended, these settingsshould occur at beginning of the project (empty data base required) - subsequent changes

are extremely problematic

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If yes how many and which characteristics?

Explanation: Number of characteristics: Which characteristic values:

 A:

14.1.4. Subitem Category

Questions:

Q: 1) Which standard subassignments would you like to use? What requirements do youhave for group reporting later on, for example, asset history sheets, equity aging reports,segment reports, etc. ?

Explanation: For example to choose from: - Asset transaction type - Functional area - Region- Year of acquisition - Period - Equity transaction type - Equity transaction type

 A:

14.1.5. Subitem

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category assettransaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your owncharacteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values?

 A:

Page 190: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 190/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

 A:

14.1.6. Sets (Namespace)

Questions:

Q: 1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in allkinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination andreporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets.

 A:

15. Asset Accounting

Questions:

Q: 1) How many fixed assets and how many assets under construction do you currentlyhave?

 A:

Q: 2) Which organizational units do you manage in the asset master record?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want asset master record numbering to be internally or externally assigned?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you see a business need to use both internal and external number assignment,depending on the asset class? If so, please specify.

 A:

Q: 5) If you use external number assignment, do you want to allow the assignment of

alphanumeric numbers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you want to represent asset components using asset sub-numbers? If so, for whatpurposes do you plan to use asset sub-numbers?

 A:

Q: 7) Are cost centers (business areas) to be defined in the asset master record on a time-dependent basis?

Page 191: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 191/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) Do you see a business need to create multiple similar asset master records in onestep?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you have assets that require increased depreciation due to multiple shift use?

 A:

Q: 10) In your enterprise, is there a requirement to shut down an asset (discontinuedepreciation) for a period of time?

 A:

Q: 11) How do you archive your asset master records at the present time?

 A:

Q: 12) How long do you intend to continue to manage assets, which are no longer on handphysically, in the system?

 A:

16. Personnel Administration16.1. Bases

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to assign your own employee numbers or have the system generatethem for you? SAP recommends the use of system generated employee numbers after theinitial data conversion.

 A:

Q: 2) With the use of third-party archiving systems, SAP allows you to store documents (eg

photographs, resumes, position description forms) for employee level. If you are using thisfacility, which documents will be stored?

 A:

Q: 3) For which infotypes or reports should an audit trail be set up?

Explanation: It is possible to automatically record all changes made to infotypes (screens ofrelated nformation) and when reports have been initiated via a log file.Typically, this facility isswitched on to record changes to sensitive data for audit purposes. Sometimes this facility isalso switched on for other infotypes to check for common errors in the post go-live period. the

post go-live period.

Page 192: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 192/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) SAP allows you to maintain a free-text screen for all infotypes. Do you have therequirement to store free text?

 A:

16.2. Employee's Personal Details

16.2.1. Personal Data

Questions:

Q: 1) When you record employee names, which forms-of-address, titles, nameprefixes/affixes (eg BSc, Sir) do you use and how do you want them displayed on reports andcorrespondance?

 A:

Q: 2) When recording employee details, which other particulars (eg marital status,nationality) do you wish to record?

 A:

16.2.2. Challenge

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record challenges (physical, mental) for your employees?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If you are required to record the type of challenge, which types do you track?

 A:

16.2.3. Addresses

Questions:

Q: 1) What address types would you like to maintain for your employees (eg permanent,

postal)?

 A:

16.2.4. Bank Details

Questions:

Q: 1) Which methods of payment are allowed in your organization?

Explanation: It is necessary to define a method of payment (eg direct payment, cheque) foreach employee being paid. The method of payment can be defined globally for all employees

Page 193: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 193/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

or a different method for each country. If the direct payment option is to be used, consideruploading the banks from disk. the banks from disk.

 A:

16.2.5. Family/Related Persons

Questions:

Q: 1) What relationships with other persons do you wish to maintain for your employees (egspouse, child, guardian, emergency contact, friend)?

 A:

Q: 2) Are relations included in the calculation of private health insurance?

 A:

16.2.6. Education and Training

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the types of educational establishments (eg secondary school, university,internal course) for which you want to record your employees' certificates.

 A:

Q: 2) List the types of certificates which you would want to attach to employees.

 A:

Q: 3) Identify which branches of study (eg subjects, course name) are to be recordedagainst employees.

 A:

16.2.7. Other/Previous Employers

Questions:

Q: 1) If you wish to record previous employment history for your new employees, list whichIndustry and Jobs you require.

 A:

16.2.8. Qualifications

Questions:

Q: 1) If you are not using the qualifications catalogue within Personnel Development (PD),list the qualifications (eg languages, skills) you would like to record for employees.

 A:

16.2.9. Appraisals

Questions:

Page 194: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 194/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) In SAP you have the ability to record appraisals in either PA or PD. If you intend torecord appraisal ratings in PA, which types of performance criteria (eg Leadership,Communication) and weightings do you require?

 A:

16.2.10. Membership Fees

Questions:

Q: 1) List the entities against which employees may pay membership (eg health club, uniondues, professional organizations).

 A:

Q: 2) List the payee organizations for these membership fees.

 A:

Q: 3) In your company, how are membership fees calculated?

Explanation: You can, for example, calculate the union dues as a percentage of apredetermined assessment base. This procedure takes minimum and maximum limits intoaccount. Alternatively, you can determine a fixed amount.

 A:

16.2.11. Communications Data

Questions:

Q: 1) Which user identification numbers are to be recorded against your employees?

Explanation: You may record user identification numbers for various electronic media (eginternet, fax) or company credit card numbers against each of your employees. employees.

 A:

16.2.12. Stat.of Res.Perm. CH

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan to register and manage information regarding the statuses of your foreignemployees' residence permits?

 A:

Q: 2) If yes, which types of residence permits do your employees hold?

 A:16.2.13. Registration of country of birth (act

stim.lab.part.ethn.minorities) NL

Questions:

Page 195: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 195/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Does your organization send this (statutory) statement to the Chamber of Commerce?

 A:

Q: 2) Which employee categories do you wish to discern (education and job grade)?

 A:

16.2.14. Additional Personal Data CA, SG, US

Questions:

Q: 1) SAP has the facility to record both ethnicity, Vietnam-related military service andmilitary reserve status. Does your company record any of this information and if applicable,what ethnic groups are required?

 A:

16.3. Information About Work Relationship

16.3.1. Organizational Assignment

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to group your employees for security or reporting purposes according towho administers their personnel records, payroll data or time data? If so, provide a list of Administrators for personnel records, for payroll data and for time data.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to use a service type catalog?

Explanation: The service type is an activity-based classification of employees. For example,this is defined for hospitals in the Accounting Regulations for Hospitals(Krankenhausbuchführungsverordnung). In addition to activity-based account determination,the service type can be used for statistical purposes. can be used for statistical purposes. canbe used for statistical purposes.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which service type catalog do you use?

 A:

Q: 4) You should answer the following questions if your accounting system uses FundsManagement.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Would you like to work with commitments for personnel expenditure?

Page 196: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 196/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Commitments are budget assignments that are created before the actualpostings. Commitments are used to reserve funds for future expenditure.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

16.3.2. Planned Working Time

Questions:

Q: 1) This infotype is used to store the planned working time (work schedule rules). SeeTime Management questionnaire.

 A:

16.3.3. Contract Elements

Questions:

Q: 1) What types of employee contracts are used in your organization?

 A:

Q: 2) If you wish to record periods of notice which must be given by either the employee oremployer, list the standard notice periods.

 A:

Q: 3) If you wish to record the start date of service worked in affiliated or acquiredcompanies, list the allowable standard corporations.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have employees who receive continued pay in case of illness in accordancewith the standard rules valid until June 30, 1994?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) ¿Cuáles son los tipos de contrato laboral que se emplean en su organización?

 A:

Q: 6) ¿ En qué momento se realiza la impresion del contrato? ¿ Se quiere imprimir elcontrato desde dentro del sistema?

 A:

Q: 7) ¿ Se incluyen clausulas adicionales y variables entre contratos al texto?

 A:

Q: 8) ¿ Existen periodos de prueba para los empleados recien incorporados a la empresa?Describir duración del periodo y proceso.

Page 197: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 197/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 9) ¿ Se realizan contratos a tiempo parcial? Describir los casos.

 A:

16.3.4. Internal Medical Service

Questions:

Q: 1) What medical examinations (eg audiometric, general habits, vision) would you like torecord for your employees?

 A:

Q: 2) For each medical examination, list the specific tests or areas for which you want torecord medical data.

 A:

Q: 3) For each specific test or area, detail the typical results (eg Y/N, x cm, blood type) youmight want to record.

 A:

Q: 4) For each occurrence of a medical examination, what overall results (eg fit for work)would you like to record?

 A:

16.3.5. Monitoring of Dates

Questions:

Q: 1) SAP allows you to monitor and to report on the expiration of certain key events (egprobation, work permit, medical examination). Which key events do you wish to record?

 A:

16.3.6. Powers of Attorney

Questions:

Q: 1) List the different types of powers of attorney (or similar instruments) which can berecorded against your employees.

 A:

16.3.7. Date Specifications

Questions:

Q: 1) What key dates do you want to record against your employees?

Page 198: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 198/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: What are the key dates you want to record against employees that are used forevaluations? Some of these dates may differ to another similar date recorded elsewhere inthe system (eg a hire date for purposes of leave accruals, hire date for service anniversary).

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have additional, payroll-relevant key dates that differ from the actual entrydate?

Explanation: Differing key dates occur when a time before employment in the currentcompany is taken into account. Typical examples include: Typical examples include: -Keydate for severance pay -Key date for leave -Continued remuneration -Continuedremuneration

 A:

16.3.8. Employment Periods - Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Stellen Sie eine Liste der Dienstzeiten bereit, die Sie bei der Ermittlung derruhegehaltfähigen Dienstzeiten berücksichtigen müssen.

 A:

Q: 2) Stellen Sie die Bescheinigung zur Festsetzung des Ruhegehaltssatzes zur Verfügung.

 A:

16.3.9. Internal Data

Questions:

Q: 1) This infotype records internal data on each employee (eg previous personnel number,work center information). Which of these elements will your company record?

 A:

16.3.10. Statistics

Questions:

Q: 1) SAP gives you the ability to store and evaluate user-defined statistics (eg size ofsafety equipment). What statistics do you need to maintain for your employees?

 A:

16.3.11. German Civil Service Statistics

Questions:

Q: 1) Which of these statistics do you use?

 A:16.3.12. Corporate Function

Questions:

Page 199: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 199/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) List the different organizational roles (do not confuse with positions and jobs) whichcan be assigned to your employees.

Explanation: These roles are typically cross-functional and not necessarily related to aperson#s primary position (eg first aid officer, sexual haressment officer).

 A:

16.3.13. Company Instructions

Questions:

Q: 1) List the standard instructions or other activities (eg high voltage switching, orientation,recognition award) which you might want to record against an employee.

 A:

16.3.14. Objects on Loan

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to record the loan of company property (eg PCs, mobile telephones) andan identifying number against employees? If so, list these items.

 A:

16.3.15. Grievances CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) If you track grievances, disciplinary actions or harassment incidents on employees,provide a list of each type and a detailed description of the business process.

 A:

16.3.16. Residence Status CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) This infotype is used to maintain Residence Status information and informationneeded to track I-9 data. List any identification documents your company needs to track.

 A:

16.3.17. External Agencies NL

Questions:

Q: 1) With which UVI or UVIs are you registered?

Explanation: NOTE: The 'employment status' and 'shift type' can be reported on from theinfotype or from the report parameters. NOTE: The various CBS wage elements must belinked to the SAP wage type catalogue.

 A:

Page 200: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 200/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

16.3.18. CBS NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization submit this statement?

 A:

Q: 2) With which frequency do you submit statements?

 A:

16.4. Payroll Specifications

16.4.1. Basic Pay

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your pay structure.

Explanation: The company's pay structure can be defined in either Compensation orPersonnel Administration. A pay structure is comprised of a Type (eg industrial agreement), Area (eg region), Group (eg grade) and Level (scale). This can be achived in a variety ofways (eg industry, agreement, region). agreement, region).

 A:

Q: 2) Provide details of any groups of employees for whom automatic assignment to payscale structure is appropriate?

Explanation: It is possible to automatically update an employee's pay scale group or level fora set period depending on your business rules (ie age and time-related increases). time-related increases).

 A:

Q: 3) Will your company perform global salary increases and, if so, provide the details?

Explanation: You can also make global salary increases for specific groups of employeesbased on different methods (eg a set amount, a percentage). This can be achived in eitherCompensation or Personnel Administration. Note: If a global salary increase is requiredshortly after your go-live date, be aware of the effort required to complete this task. go-livedate, be aware of the effort required to complete this task.

 A:

Q: 4) In your company, how is extra payment for overtime beyond that specified by thecollective agreement represented?

Explanation: You can deposit the overtime payment in a separate wage type. This prohibitschanges in the collective agreement from having an effect on overtime payments.

 A:

Page 201: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 201/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) How are lump-sum payments for overtime represented in your company?

Explanation: You can register an agreement that includes overtime or a separate part of thesalary with either a fixed number of hours or a fixed amount that covers all hours.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you use a case group catalog to define the payments? If so, give details here.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Definir los convenios colectivos a los que están adscritos los empleados de laempresa.

 A:

Q: 8) Definir las distintas categorias y subcategorias profesionales establecidas enconvenio.

 A:

Q: 9) Listar los conceptos de nómina que dependen de las categorias profesionalesestablecidas en convenio.

 A:

Q: 10) ¿ Existen nivelaciones automáticas por convenio (por ejemplo saltos de categoria en

función de la antigüedad)?

 A:

Q: 11) Defina en qué bases de valoración de deben incluir las cc-nóminas del infotipoEmolumentos Básicos.

 A:

Q: 12) Indique cuáles son las cc-nóminas que componen el sueldo fijo.

 A:

Q: 13) Defina cuáles son los haberes que se acumulan para el pago del plus por zonadesfavorable.

 A:

Q: 14) ¿Cuáles son los tipos de contrato que existen en la empresa?

 A:

Page 202: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 202/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

16.4.2. Family-Related Bonuses - PSG

Questions:

Q: 1) Sollen die Ortszuschlagsbestandteile maschinell ermittelt werden ?

Explanation: Family-related bonuses include different child and spousal elements. Family-

related bonuses include different child and spousal elements.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you also require the child increase amount for the special bonus?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Wollen Sie im Versorgungsfall die Kinderbestandteile dem Berechtigten zuweisen?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

16.4.3. External Transfers

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide savings schemes? If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 2) SAP has Infotypes for making specific payments to third parties on behalf ofemployees (eg Loans, Garnishments, Membership Fees). Which additional payments to thirdparties do you require?

 A:

16.4.4. Tax

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of: special employee groups (e.g. artists?)conversion rules green table and/or holiday

 A:

Q: 2) Group together your personnel areas/subareas to employment tax permanentestablishments.

Explanation: Die lohnsteuerliche Betriebsstätte ist der Personalbereich/-teilbereich, der -als Absender für die Lohnsteueranmeldung verwendet wird - als Arbeitgeber auf derLohnsteuerbescheinigung steht - das Kirchensteuergebiet bestimmt.

 A:

Page 203: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 203/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Create a list of Tax Offices for your permanent establishments.

Explanation: The address and tax number are required.

 A:

Q: 4) Which tax procedure do you want to use to tax regular payments?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen: - Besteuerung nach Monatstabelle - Besteuerung mitPermanenz - Besteuerung mit Permanenz

 A:

Q: 5) After which payroll period do you want to create employment tax statements?

 A:

Q: 6) Which flat-rate taxation options do you want to use?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen folgende Möglichkeiten: - Regelungen für Aushilfen nach§40a EStG (kurzfristig Beschäftigte und geringfügig Entlohnte) - Regelungen fürbeschränkt Steuerpflichtige nach §50a EStG - Regelungen für einzelne Bezüge nach §40und §40b EStG (z.B. Essensgeld, Fahrgeld, Zukunftssicherungsleistungen)

 A:

Q: 7) What procedure do you want to use for collecting flat-rate church tax?

Explanation: Die pauschale Kirchensteuer kann entweder - für alle Mitarbeiter mit einemermäßigten Hebesatz oder - nur für die kirchensteuerpflichtigen Mitarbeiter mit demnormalen Satz erhoben werden.

 A:

Q: 8) Which special tax procedures do you want to use?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen folgende Verfahren: - Steuerbefreiung aufgrund vonDoppelbesteuerungsabkommen - Steuerbefreiung aufgrund von Auslandstätigkeitserlassen

- Steuerbefreiung aufgrund von Grenzgängerregelungen - ArbeitskammernBremen/Saarland - Arbeitskammern Bremen/Saarland

 A:

Q: 9) Which employment tax tables are used?

 A:

Q: 10) ¿ Se contemplan pagos en especie a los empleados? Describir cuáles son y suproceso.

 A:

Page 204: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 204/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) En el caso de realizar pagos en especie ¿ se realizan ingresos a cuenta norepercutidos?

 A:

Q: 12) ¿ Se realizan pagos variables a los empleados?

 A:

16.4.5. Social Insurance

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of the employee insurance statement? If so, whichone?

 A:

Q: 2) Does your organization provide a private health insurance scheme? If so, pleasespecify.

 A:

Q: 3) Which calculation method is applicable to the SI schemes?

 A:

Q: 4) Which calculation method is applicable to the SI days?

 A:

Q: 5) How many different contribution percentages are applicable to each SI scheme?

 A:

Q: 6) Does your organization provide additional SI schemes (e.g. ANW gap, earlyretirement, etc.)? If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 7) Create a list of all the state health insurance funds used in your enterprise.

Explanation: Achten Sie auf folgende Kriterien: - Bezeichnung der Krankenkasse und derenGeschäftsstellen - Anschriften und Bankangaben bei den Geschäftsstellen - Betriebsnummerund Rechtskreis (Ost/West) Beachten Sie, daß überregionale Krankenkassen zweimalangelegt werden müssen, wenn Sie Betriebe in verschiedenen Rechtskreisen haben. Anhand des Rechtskreises der Krankenkasse wird in der Abrechnung die entsprechendeBeitragsbemessungsgrenze für KV und PV verwendet. - Prozentsätze und Beitragsklassen -Prozentsätze und Beitragsklassen

 A:

Page 205: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 205/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Do you pay contributions to private HI funds or industry-related pensionorganizations?

Explanation: Falls nein, d.h. alle Privatversicherten sind Selbstzahler, genügt es, einePrivatkasse für alle anzulegen, da dann keine Anschriften und Bankangaben notwendig sind. Ansonsten stellen Sie die Informationen analog zu den gesetzlichen Krankenkassen bereit.Krankenkassen bereit.

 A:

Q: 9) Which bonus calculation procedure do you use for employees voluntarily insured in astatutory health insurance fund?

Explanation: Wenn die gesetzliche Krankenkasse den Beitrag für freiwillig Versicherteanhand von Beitragsklassen erhebt, haben Sie eine Wahlmöglichkeit bei der Berechnung desZuschusses. Sie müssen als Zuschuß mindestens die Hälfte des Betrags zahlen, welchersich aus dem Prozentsatz multipliziert mit der Beitragsbemessungsgrenze ergibt. Sie können,ohne daß ein geldwerter Vorteil entsteht, auch die Hälfte des Beitrags zahlen, der sich aus

der Beitragsklasse ergibt.

 A:

Q: 10) Are there company areas in your enterprise for which contributions have to be paid?

Explanation: Erstellen Sie eine Liste der Betriebsteile und den zugeordneten Umlagekassenmit den Prozentsätzen für Umlage 1 und Umlage 2.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you make use of the option of sending contribution statements to a federalassociation instead of individual HI funds?

Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der Bundesverbände mit ihren Anschriften,Bankangaben und Betriebsnummern.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you plan to send your contribution statements via EDI?

Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der DFÜ-fähigen Krankenkassen mit Ihren Anschriften und Betriebsnummern. Diese DFÜ-Kassen sollen als eigene Krankenkassenhinterlegt werden.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Put together a list of the personnel areas/subareas, that could be senders ofstatements of contributions paid

Page 206: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 206/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Ordnen Sie alle Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche diesen Absendern zu.

 A:

Q: 14) Create a list of all combinations of senders and receiving offices for the contributionstatements.

Explanation: Absender sind die absendenden Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche, Annahmestellen sind entweder die Krankenkassen, Bundesverbände oder DFÜ-Kassen. Für jede Kombination wird die Kontonummer bzw. die Zahlstellennummer benötigt. VermerkenSie in der Liste, welche Krankenkassen auf Bundesverbände bzw. DFÜ-Kassen umgelenktwerden sollen.

 A:

Q: 15) Give an overview of the social security constellations legal in your enterprise.

Explanation: Beispiele hierfür sind: - Arbeiter - Angestellte - Pflicht/Freiwillig/Privatversicherte

- Geringverdiener - Geringfügig Beschäftigte - Kurzfristig Beschäftigte - Auszubildende -Praktikanten - Mitarbeiter, welche ein freiwilliges soziales Jahr leisten - Altersteilzeitler -Rentner - Versorgungsempfänger - Beamte

 A:

Q: 16) Listar los epígrafes a los que están adscritos los empleados.

 A:

Q: 17) ¿ En qué grupos de cotización se agrupan los empleados?

 A:

16.4.6. Loans

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way are unscheduled repayments dealt with?

 A:

Q: 2) Does your organization provide (interest-bearing/interest-free) loans? If so, which

ones? please specify the (repayment) conditions.

 A:

Q: 3) Which types of loans do you offer your employees?

Explanation: You can differ between annuity repayment or repayment in installments.

 A:

Page 207: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 207/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

16.4.7. Garnishment

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of garnishment of wages? If so, please specify.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to calculate garnishments automatically or transfer them manually?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do You Want to Group Together Some of Your Recipients to Recipient Keys?

Explanation: Die Pfändung ermöglicht es, bestimmte Empfänger, die häufig als Gläubigerauftreten, im System unter einem Schlüssel zu hinterlegen (z.B. Versandhäuser, Banken).Die Bankverbindung dieser Empfänger kann dann zentral administriert werden.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do You Want to Group Together Some of Your Creditors to Creditor Keys?

Explanation: Die Pfändung ermöglicht es, bestimmte Gläubiger im System unter einemSchlüssel zu hinterlegen (z.B. Versandhäuser, Banken). Die Anschriften dieser Gläubigerkönnen dann zentral administriert werden.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you charge your employees for garnishment processing?

Explanation: Sie können auch unterschiedliche Berechnungsregeln (abhängig z.B. vomzugehörigen Personalbereich) im System definieren.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

16.4.8. Pension

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide (company) pension schemes? If so, which ones?

 A:

16.4.9. Family Allowance AT

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your employees receive family allowances?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 208: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 208/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

16.4.10. One Time Pay. Off-Cy. CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) List all one time payments for employees (eg bonuses).

 A:

16.4.11. Payroll Outsourcing CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your company outsource payroll processing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If so, to what extent (eg tax processing, check printing)

 A:16.4.12. Deduction Limits CA, US

Questions:

Q: 1) List all deductions that have a maximum amount to be taken (eg united way, 401Kloans).

 A:

16.4.13. Capital Formation (Germany)

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of ER bonuses granted in your enterprise for capital formation.

 A:

Q: 2) What special features exist when calculating ER bonuses for capital formation?

Explanation: Mögliche Besonderheiten: - Anteilige Berechnung nach demBeschäftigungsgrad des Mitarbeiters - Kürzung durch Abwesenheiten - Berücksichtigungder Betriebszugehörigkeit - Berücksichtigung von Einkommensgrenzen - Berücksichtigungvon Einkommensgrenzen

 A:

Q: 3) Create a list of the recipients of your employee's capital formation agreements.

Explanation: Necessary payee data: - Name and address of payee - Country of bank -Sort code - Bank account number

 A:

Page 209: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 209/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

16.4.14. DUEVO (Germany)

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of personnel areas/subareas, which could be senders of DEUEVnotifications

Explanation: Ordnen Sie Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche den Absendern zu.

 A:

Q: 2) Specify a receiving office and forwarding office for each of the health fund types youuse.

Explanation: Payee funds are stored in the system as special health insurance funds.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you intend transferring DEUEV notifications by EDI?

Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der DFÜ-fähigen Krankenkassen mit Ihren Anschriften und Betriebsnummern. Diese DFÜ-Kassen sollen als eigene Krankenkassenhinterlegt werden. Für die Kommunikation mit den DFÜ-fähigen Annahmestellen wird eineZusatzsoftware (KKS - Krankenkassenkommunikationssystem) benötigt.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to start using SAP Payroll mid-year?

Explanation: SAP empfiehlt den Produktivstart im Januar. Wenn Sie unterjährig startenwollen müssen Sie für Ihre Mitarbeiter eine Abmeldung (vom Altsystem) und eine Anmeldung(im SAP-System) vornehmen.

 A:

Q: 5) Choose a procedure for the DEUEV start.

Explanation: Es stehen zwei Verfahren zur Verfügung: a) Übernahme der Abwesenheitsdaten der Mitarbeiter für die letzten beiden Monate vor Produktivstart aus dem

 Altsystem. b) Kennzeichnen der Mitarbeiter, für die das Altsystem eine DEÜV-Abmeldungoder -Unterbrechungsmeldung erstellt hat.

 A:

16.4.15. Company Insurance (Germany)

Questions:

Q: 1) Which procedure do you want to use to transfer the company insurance premium?

Page 210: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 210/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen: - Sammelüberweisung (manuell überLohnartennnachweis) - Einzelüberweisungen (durch Angabe der Empfängerdaten)

 A:

Q: 2) Create a list of company insurance recipients.

Explanation: Required data are: - Name and address of payee - Bank details (country, sortcode and account number) - Bank details (country, sort code and account number)

 A:

16.4.16. CF/SPI Data DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) With which supplementary pension funds are you a member?

Explanation: Provide a list with the following information: - Name and address ofsupplementary pension fund (SPF) - Bank details for SPF - Membership number -Contribution rates - Registration number - Format for insurance number - Contributionassessment thresholds - Contribution assessment thresholds

 A:

Q: 2) Which pay elements are subject to contributions?

 A:

Q: 3) Is flat-rate taxation of contributions permitted? If so, to what amount? Do you use theaverage method? Do you use annual or monthly taxation?

 A:

Q: 4) Is the bonus subject to contributions? Is the bonus reduced with the contributionmonths?

Explanation: Ist nur für einen Teil der Monate des Jahres Umlage gezahlt worden, ist dieZuwendung ggf. nur für diesen Anteil zu verbeitragen. für diesen Anteil zu verbeitragen.

 A:

Q: 5) Is an increased assessment threshold used in the bonus month?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Ist im Fall von Wehrdienst oder Krankengeldzuschußzeiten ein fiktives Urlaubsbruttoals zu verbeitragendes Entgelt anzusetzen?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 211: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 211/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) If this case occurs during a month, are the actual gross elements still taken intoaccount?

Explanation: In this special case, the fictitious gross amount is used as the basis for thecontribution calculation for the whole payroll period. The real gross payments due for the paidpartial period are not taken into account in the contribution calculation. into account in thecontribution calculation.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you use the notification procedure for the DATUEV-ZVE?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Which insurance types occur in your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 10) Stellen Sie die Datensatzbeschreibung der von Ihnen erstellten ZVK-Meldungen zurVerfügung. Welche Felder sind zu füllen?

 A:

Q: 11) Name the key day for the difference notifications.

 A:

16.4.17. Official Housing DE Publuc Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Provide the table for the calculation of the maximum official housing remuneration.

 A:

Q: 2) Which pay elements are included in the official housing gross amount?

 A:

Q: 3) Which family-related bonus elements are included in the official housing grossamount?

 A:

Q: 4) Prepare a list of official houses.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Name - Address - Local rental value -Taxable rental value - Flat-rate for ancilliary costs - Flat-rate for ancilliary costs

 A:

Page 212: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 212/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

16.4.18. Personnel Accommodation DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Prepare a list of staff accommodations.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Description - Address - Value class - Area - Number of persons - If applicable, percentage deduction due to deficits - Washingmachine available (not coin operating) - Washing machine available (not coin operating)

 A:

Q: 2) Welche Mitarbeiterkreise unterliegen der 15%-Regel?

 A:16.4.19. Non-Monetary Remuneration - PSG

Questions:

Q: 1) Which are the non-monetary remuneration values, for example, meals,accommodations?

 A:

16.4.20. Benefits Payment DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Werden Sie den Ruhegehaltssatz (Auswertung ruhegehaltfähiger Dienstzeiten) mitdem R/3- System festsetzen?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you calculate the pension payments using the SAP System?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Provide a list of pensionable pay elements.

 A:

Q: 4) Welche Arten von Anrechnungen/Ruhensregelungen finden Anwendung?

 A:

Q: 5) Which method do you use for the pension adjustment?

 A:

Q: 6) Nehmen Sie an dem Datenträgeraustauschverfahren des Postrentendienstes teil?

Page 213: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 213/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: If yes, provide a list of the payroll numbers you require. If yes, provide a list ofthe payroll numbers you require.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Are the pension payments you pay reimbursed by a third party?

Explanation: If yes, provide a list.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

16.4.21. Sideline Job DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Provide a list of sideline jobs.

 A:

16.4.22. Previous Employment Periods DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Nutzen Sie für Höhergruppierungen den Bewährungs-/Fallgruppenaufstieg?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Sind im Zusammenhang mit dem Bewährungsaufstieg Vordienstzeiten zuberücksichtigen?

 A:

16.4.23. Rehabilitants DE Public Sector

Questions:

Q: 1) Welche Art von Rehabilitanden haben Sie (Paragraphen SGB)?

 A:

Q: 2) Welche Rehabilitationsmaßmahmen gibt es, welche SV-Bestandteile werdenabgeführt und welche werden vom Arbeitsamt erstattet?

 A:

Q: 3) Stellen Sie eine Liste der Arbeitsämter bereit.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Employment office number - Address - Address

 A:

Page 214: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 214/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Nennen Sie die Bankverbindung für die Erstattung.

 A:

Q: 5) Wie werden diese Beträge gebucht?

Explanation: This is taxable depending on the employment office. This is taxable dependingon the employment office.

 A:

16.4.24. Semiretirement DE

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have semi-retired employees with different models? Describe these models.

Explanation: Denken Sie an folgende Aspekte: - Prozentsätze für Nettoaufstockung -Prozentsätze für RV-Aufstockung - verblockte/unverblockte Arbeitsphasen -Lohnartenabhängigkeit, unterschiedliche Berücksichtigung je Modell -Lohnartenabhängigkeit, unterschiedliche Berücksichtigung je Modell

 A:

16.4.25. Additional Income ES

Questions:

Q: 1) Se comtemplan pagos fuera de la nómina que deben quedar reflejados en el informe

190 sobre retenciones. Describa en qué casos.

 A:

Q: 2) ¿ Realiza pagos dinerarios o en especie por actividades profesionales prestadas porterceros? Describa estos casos. Describa en qué casos y las claves de percepción aemplear.

 A:

16.4.26. SI Basic Data JP

Questions:

Q: 1) List the name of Branch Offices for Social Insurance and Labor Insurance.

 A:

Q: 2) Assign a social/labor insurance branch office to each personnel subarea.

 A:

Q: 3) Define which types of social/labor insurance each employee subgroup needs.

Page 215: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 215/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Define social insurance premium rates for each branch office for social/laborinsurance.

 A:

Q: 5) Assign the amount and grade of monthly standard compesation to each employeegroup/sub group combination.

 A:

Q: 6) Does your company have employee's pension fund?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

16.4.27. Residence Tax JP

Questions:

Q: 1) Define employee subgroups liable for residence tax deduction.

 A:

Q: 2) Does your company have an office in an ordinance-designated city which determinesthe local goverment office to pay the residence tax by the location of the collecter's office?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

16.4.28. Life/Casualty Insurance JP

Questions:

Q: 1) If your company has life/casualty insurance plan, define the names of the insuranceinstitusions and types. Also define the deduction amount of monthly/bonus payment.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use LINC service?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

16.4.29. Property Accumulation Savings JP

Questions:

Q: 1) If your company has property accumulation savings plan, define the names of theinsurance institutions and types. Also define the deduction amount of monthly/bonuspayment.

 A:

Page 216: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 216/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

16.4.30. Union JP

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your company have labor unions? If so, provide numbers and names.

 A:

Q: 2) Define the types of labor union members.

 A:

Q: 3) For each labor union, provide union membership fee calculation pattern for bothmonthly and bonus payment.

Explanation: - How do you deduct the union memberhip fee? For example, deduction withfixed rate from basic monthly payment; a given amount per employee; fixed amount as aunion membership fee. employee; fixed amount as a union membership fee.

 A:

16.4.31. Commuting Allowance Info. JP

Questions:

Q: 1) Provide information about the commuting types, the date or month of payment,frequency, the actual goods supplied or not.

 A:

16.4.32. Overseas Pay JP

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there overseas assigned employees? If so, provide the payroll method andpattern for them.

 A:

16.4.33. Social Ins. Funds NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide any social fund schemes? If so, please specify.

 A:

16.4.34. Commuting NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, how does yourorganization determine the number of kilometers?

Explanation: NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or depending on address NOTE: Manual

entry, fixed number or depending on address

Page 217: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 217/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, how does yourorganization determine the number of days per week?

Explanation: NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or transfer from planned working timeNOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or transfer from planned working time

 A:

Q: 3) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, for which types oftransportation?

 A:

16.4.35. Premium Reduction NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of Premium Reductions (tax and social insurancepayments reductions law)? If so, which ones?

 A:

16.4.36. Special Regulations NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of the - Canada regulation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Does your organization make use of - Delayed payment of wages?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Does your organization make use of - Pension severance?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

16.4.37. Child care NL

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization provide childcare? If so, please specify.

Explanation: NOTE: Take type of childcare into consideration, who provides care and doesthe employee pay a contribution does the employee pay a contribution does the employeepay a contribution

 A:

Page 218: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 218/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

16.4.38. Unemployment State US

Questions:

Q: 1) List all states that you withhold Unemployment Insurance for.

 A:

16.4.39. W-4 Withholding Info. US

Questions:

Q: 1) List all entities that you withhold state tax for.

 A:

16.4.40. Withholding Overrides US

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you allow employees to override the standard withholding calculations for taxes?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

16.4.41. IRS Mandates US

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have any IRS Mandates on your employees?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

16.4.42. Tip Indicators US

Questions:

Q: 1) Do any of your employees receive tips as part of compensation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

17. Personnel Development17.1. Qualifications / Requirements

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have skills, competencies, qualifications, or requirements in your company? Ifyou do, you need a qualifications catalog containing a hierachical structure of thequalifications of interest to your specific company.

 A:

Page 219: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 219/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) How do you evaluate these qualifications/requirements? Maintain the appropriatescales (e.g. a language scale with the proficiencies 1 through 5).

 A:

Q: 3) Are there any alternative qualifications? (e.g. knowledge of AmiPro as an alternativeto knowledge of Word).

 A:

Q: 4) For which employees should qualifications be maintained?

 A:

Q: 5) For which jobs/positions should requirements be maintained?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you perform profile matchups between requirements profiles and qualificationprofiles?

 A:

Q: 7) If qualification deficits are detected, do you want the system to propose trainingmeasures to rectify the situation?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you try to find employees with specific qualifications, or employees suitable for

specific jobs/positions?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to find qualified applicants for vacant positions?

 A:

18. Compensation Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have geographical, regional or organizational differences in your pay policy?

 A:

Q: 2) For which period do you typically plan your compensation? From which period do youselect your data?

 A:

Page 220: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 220/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you use different ways to define your compensation manager than those defined inthe standard R/3 system?

 A:

Q: 4) Which evaluation path do you use to determine which persons in the organizationalunit are to be included in the compensation administration process?

 A:

Q: 5) Which plan version is used as the default plan version in CompensationManagement?

 A:

Q: 6) Which job evaluation method is most commonly used within your company and shouldbe used as a default?

 A:

Q: 7) Which salary survey method is most commonly used within your company and shouldbe used as a default?

 A:

Q: 8) Which date is used as the key date for the calculation of the annualized base salary?

 A:

Q: 9) Which period do you consider to calculate an employees incentive pay for salarysurvey reporting purposes?

 A:

18.1. Salary Packages

Questions:

Q: 1) How many shares are available under a long-term incentive plan?

 A:

18.2. Guidelines

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use different guidelines for different groups of employees?

 A:

Q: 2) Which employee criteria do you use to dertermine a guideline group?

Page 221: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 221/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine the distribution of compensation adjustments or long-termincentives?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use alternative guideline criteria that are not supported by the SAP standardsystem (age, length of service, compa ratio, performance results)

 A:

Q: 5) What criteria do you use for multidimensional calculation guidelines and how do yousegment them?

 A:

18.3. Eligibility Rules

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use different eligibility rules for different groups of employees?

 A:

18.4. Adjustments

Questions:

Q: 1) Which wage types do you want to use to update an employees pay information?

 A:

Q: 2) Which wage types are the basis for compensation adjustments?

 A:

Q: 3) Which compensation wage type do you use for a compensation adjustment?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you split your compensation adjustments into more than one wage type? Example:Do you breakdown your merit increase into two wage types such as inflation adjustment andsalary increase?

 A:

Q: 5) Which adjustment types do you use in your company (e.g. merit increase, bonus)? Towhich compensation components do they belong (fixed or variable)?

 A:

Page 222: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 222/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) Do you have a formal process to distribute your compensation adjustments(e.g.annual compensation review)?

 A:

18.5. Long-Term Incentives

Questions:

Q: 1) Which events can have an impact on the number of shares available, price, ...?

 A:

Q: 2) Which methods of payment does your company allow for long-term incentives?

 A:

Q: 3) Which company or employee events may influence the life cycle of a long-termicentive?

 A:

Q: 4) Which rules do you have regarding the availablility of long-term incentives?

 A:

Q: 5) Which awards do you offer to your employees?

 A:

Q: 6) Which eligibility rule defines the granting of a long-term incentive?

 A:

Q: 7) Which wage type do you want to use for a long-term incentive?

 A:

Q: 8) Which guidelines defines the distribution of a long-term incentive?

 A:

Q: 9) Which and how can a certain life event influence the vesting of a long-term incentive?

 A:

Q: 10) Determine the value of a long-term incentive

 A:

Page 223: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 223/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

19. Benefits

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you administer benefits for two or more groups completely separately because ofdifferences such as the country, the participants are located in, or the currency used forbenefit calculations?

Explanation: Benefit areas are used to group employees by benefits offered, countries andcurrencies. Most companies only use one benefit area unless they are administering benefitsin multiple countries or currencies.

 A:

Q: 2) Give a short description of each of your organization's benefit plans.

Explanation: What kind of benefit is provided by the plan? Who is going to pay for it? Whathappens with the payments? Are dependents or beneficiaries allowed? Are there different

options for a single plan? Which group of employees is eligible for the plan? Does a thirdparty administrator calculate seniority and/or retirement benefits for any of your plans?seniority and/or retirement benefits for any of your plans?

 A:

Q: 3) Define the set of plan types you need and assign the plans to the types.

Explanation: Each benefit plan has to be assigned to a plan type, which itself belongs to oneof the categories health plans, insurance plans, savings plans, flexible spending accounts,credit plans, miscellaneous plans, stock purchase plans. An employee can only have one

plan per plan type at a time. at a time.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have grandfathered plans or inactive historical plans?

Explanation: If yes: You can define a plan status, for example, "closed", "locked". If yes: Youcan define a plan status, for example, "closed", "locked".

 A:

Q: 5) Who are the potential beneficiaries and dependents for your plans? Are there anyother criteria that define the eligibility of related persons?

 A:

Q: 6) List your benefit providers.

 A:

Q: 7) For each plan, state the plan number (typically group policy or contract number), planstatus (open, locked, closed), and the benefit provider (vendor or carrier).

Page 224: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 224/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

19.1. Plans

19.1.1. Health plans

Questions:

Q: 1) What dependent coverage levels are available to your employees (for example,employee only, employee + 1, employee + family)?

 A:

Q: 2) For each plan, determine whether the deductions are pre or post tax.

 A:

Q: 3) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.

 A:

Q: 4) For each option and dependent coverage, determine which of the following criteria arenecessary to calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age,salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

Explanation: For each of the plans from the health, insurance, and miscellaneous categoriesdefined, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer and/oremployee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, length of service, any customerdefined criteria.

 A:

Q: 5) For each option and dependent coverage, provide the rate tables with appropriateemployee, employer, and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you require any evidence of insurability when covering employees under anyhealth plan? If so, when is it required?

 A:

19.1.2. Insurance plans

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, determine whether the deductions are pre or post tax and whether theplan is relevant for imputed income.

 A:

Q: 2) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.

Page 225: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 225/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) For each of the plans from the insurance and miscellaneous categories defined,determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the coverage amount:age, salary, length of service, any customer defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 4) For each option, provide the tables with the definition of the coverage amount.

 A:

Q: 5) For each option, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculateemployer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, seniority, anycustomer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 6) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/orprovider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.

 A:

Q: 7) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/orprovider (vendor or carrier) costs.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you require any evidence of insurability when covering employees under any

insurance plan? If so, when is it required?

 A:

Q: 9) Are there any coverage limits which involve more than one plan? If so, how are thelimits defined?

 A:

19.1.3. Savings plans

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate theemployee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 2) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether theemployee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units. Also specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax.

 A:

Page 226: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 226/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether theemployee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.

 A:

Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate theemployer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 5) For each plan, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as a percentageof the employee contribution.

 A:

Q: 6) For each plan, define the vesting schedule (for example, 100% after 5 years ofservice).

Explanation: A vesting schedule defines the seniority needed to 'own' the employercontribution to a savings plan. contribution to a savings plan.

 A:

Q: 7) For each plan, list the investment options available to participants (for example,mutual funds, stock, and so on).

 A:

Q: 8) Are any of your savings plans retirement plans? Is it necessary to calculate seniority

for these plans?

Explanation: The SAP System supports the cumulation of pensionable earnings and hoursas well as the storage of seniority information. While projected retirement benefits must becalculated by a third party administrator, seniority can be calculated either in the SAP System(partial TPA scenario) or by a third party administrator (full TPA scenario). Describe theprocess of calculating seniority and retirement benefits in your organization. In case of apartial TPA scenario, describe in detail the rules for determining seniority. rules fordetermining seniority.

 A:

Q: 9) Are there any contribution limits which involve more than one plan? If so, how are thelimits defined?

 A:

Q: 10) Are employees' contribution and employers' contribution deducted from periodicalbonus?

 A:

19.1.4. Stock purchase plans

Page 227: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 227/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate theemployee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 2) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether theemployee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units. Also specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax.

 A:

Q: 3) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether theemployee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.

 A:

Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the

employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 5) For each plan, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as a percentageof the employee contribution.

 A:

Q: 6) For each plan, determine whether contributions are defined on the basis of a regularperiod, for example, monthly or as a target amount for a fixed period.

 A:

Q: 7) Are employees' contribution and employers' contribution deducted from periodicalbonus?

 A:

19.1.5. Spending accounts

Questions:

Q: 1) What do you do with any balance existing either after a termination, or at the close ofthe year?

 A:

Q: 2) For each spending account, determine which of the following criteria are necessary tocalculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 3) For each spending account, identify the annual maximum and minimum contribution.

Page 228: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 228/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculateemployer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

19.1.6. Credit plans

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculateemployer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 2) For each plan, provide the rate tables with appropriate employer credits.

 A:

19.1.7. Miscellaneous plans

Questions:

Q: 1) For each plan, decide which of the following attributes are relevant: costs, credits,coverage, employee contribution, employer contribution, vesting, investments.

 A:

Q: 2) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.

 A:

Q: 3) If costs are relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary tocalculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary,seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 4) If costs are relevant, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer,and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.

 A:

Q: 5) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/orprovider (vendor or carrier) costs.

 A:

Q: 6) If credits are relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary tocalculate employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Page 229: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 229/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) If credits are relevant, provide the rate tables with appropriate employer credits.

 A:

Q: 8) If coverage is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary tocalculate the coverage amount: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 9) If coverage is relevant, provide the tables with the definition of the coverage amount.

 A:

Q: 10) If employee contribution is relevant, determine which of the following criteria arenecessary to calculate the employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customerdefined criteria.

 A:

Q: 11) If employee contribution is relevant, define the limits for employee contributions andstate whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary,or number of units.

 A:

Q: 12) If employee contribution is relevant, specify whether contributions can be made preand/or post tax.

 A:

Q: 13) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether theemployee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.

 A:

Q: 14) If employer contribution is relevant, determine which of the following criteria arenecessary to calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.

 A:

Q: 15) If employer contribution is relevant, define the employer contribution as a fixedamount or as percentage of the employee contribution.

 A:

Q: 16) For each plan, define the vesting schedule (for example, 100% after 5 years ofservice).

Explanation: A vesting schedule defines the seniority needed to 'own' the employercontribution to a savings plan. contribution to a savings plan.

Page 230: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 230/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 17) For each plan, list the investment options available to participants (for example,mutual funds, stock, and so on).

 A:

20. Personnel Time Management20.1. Work Schedules

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way is the Working Hours Decree implemented in your organization.

 A:

Q: 2) Introduction

Explanation: For each group of employees, the time management requirements are basedon certain expectations. These expectations must be defined in the form of work schedulesfor each of the groups of employees. This includes the description of possible deviations fromthese expectations.

 A:

Q: 3) Name your shifts. The following points will help you to define your shifts.

 A:

Q: 4) Which patterns do your shifts use? For example, weekly, monthly, rotating.

 A:

Q: 5) Describe the daily shifts. Specify start and end times, planned working hours andbreaks for each of these daily shifts. How do public holidays affect these daily shifts?

 A:

Q: 6) Identify similar shifts (for example, early, day, night, flex) and patterns, (for example,rotating, non-rotating).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have rules that change your daily shifts (for example, the last working daybefore a holiday ends at noon)? Provide a list of such rules.

 A:

Page 231: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 231/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Do you have part-time workers? How do you reflect that they are part-time? (A shift isdefined as part-time 8 hours on three days in the week, and they are assigned a percentageof a full time shift, such as 50%).

 A:

20.2. Personnel Time Specifications Administration

Questions:

Q: 1) How does your organization calculate/express absenteeism due to illness andnotification frequency?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe the process of sickness and recovery notification and indicate whichinformation is provided and how.

 A:

Q: 3) Does your organization make use of notifications of sickness and recovery? If so, towhom are they sent?

 A:

Q: 4) You must identify rules and policies, as they determine the kind of time data youcollect. What kind of data is collected? For example, do you need to record attendances,absences, the time of day, and elapsed times?

 A:

Q: 5) Describe the different types of substitutions used in your company (such as asubstitution for a particular period of working time, or for a specific position or personnelnumber).

 A:

Q: 6) Describe the different types of availability/on-call duties used in your company (suchas on-call for maintenance, on-call for emergencies).

 A:

Q: 7) Describe the different types of attendances and absences used in your company(such as vacation, sick, business meeting).

 A:

Q: 8) Into which categories can the identified attendances and absences be placed?

Explanation: "What are the categories into which the identified attendances and absencescan be placed? Examples of possible criteria used to categorize your attendances and

Page 232: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 232/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

absences are - costing and financial information - payment relevance - internal and externalreporting, statistics. "

 A:

Q: 9) Explain the reasons for the identified categories.

 A:

Q: 10) For each attendance and absence, identify the amount and unit of time that can betaken. Do you have attendances or absences of less than one day, one full day, or longerthan one day (up to a specified maximum)?

 A:

Q: 11) There are various priorities for different attendances and absences. Therefore, youmust set the reaction for an overlap (for example if an employee gets sick on vacation). Howdo you handle an overlap between attendances and absences?

 A:

Q: 12) Which of the identified absences are unpaid?

 A:

Q: 13) Which of the identified absences are paid? How are they paid?

 A:

20.3. Personnel Time Accounts AdministrationQuestions:

Q: 1) Some attendances and absences affect time accounts, such as entitlements andaccruals. What accounts do you have, and how are they affected by specific attendancesand/or absences?

 A:

Q: 2) What time accounts do you need? What time data is necessary for each account?How often do you calculate the values for these accounts?

 A:

Q: 3) What accounts do you need for statistical evaluation purposes (for example, allabsences, absences due to sickness, absences due to vacation, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 4) What accounts do you need to evaluate vacations? (Note: entitlement accrual isaddressed in process group 3. Entitlement compensation is addressed in process group 9.)

 A:

Page 233: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 233/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Time account data may be required for reporting purposes outside of HR. Forexample, the total number of paid absence hours accrued in a particular period may be ofrelevance to the Controlling department.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have any other accounts? How are they handled?

 A:

20.4. Personnel Time Recording Subsystem

Questions:

Q: 1) Capture of time management data for a particular employee with particularcharacteristics (interfaces to subsystems, direct entry, etc.).

 A:

Q: 2) What kind of time events do you use (for example, clock-in, clock-out, start of break,end of break, start of off-site work, end of off-site work, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do certain time events apply to certain groups of employees, or are all time eventsvalid for all employees?

 A:

Q: 4) Do your time recording processes include the identification of a reason for particulartime event? What are these reasons?

 A:

Q: 5) Do these reasons have an effect on additional processing (generation of attendances,absences)? Is there an approval process for the continued processing of an attendance orabsence?

 A:

21. Training and Event Management21.1. Cost Item

Questions:

Q: 1) Please define the cost elements that you require.

 A:

Page 234: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 234/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

21.2. Business Event Location

Questions:

Q: 1) Are business events held at more than one location?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If there is more than one business event location, do you need to define a locationhierarchy?

 A:

21.3. Business Event Group

Questions:

Q: 1) Define the business event hierarchy for the business event catalog of the customer.

 A:

21.4. Business Event Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Which information should be stored for the business event type?

 A:

Q: 2) How is the price of a business event determined?

 A:

21.5. Resource Type

Questions:

Q: 1) Are rooms already available for the business events, or are external resourcesaccessed?

 A:

Q: 2) Do the resources only consist of rooms, or do you want to use the system to manageother resources too, such as beamers and overhead projectors?

 A:

Q: 3) Have the rooms been equipped differently?

 A:

Q: 4) Do rooms need to be locked because of maintenance work?

Page 235: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 235/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Should the instructors be managed in the system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Are the instructors employees at the enterprise, or are they also external persons?

 A:

Q: 7) Should notification be sent to instructors?

 A:

21.6. Attendee Types

Questions:

Q: 1) Which attendee types do you want to use?

 A:

21.7. Organizer Types

Questions:

Q: 1) Is there more than one organizer at your enterprise?

 A:

Q: 2) Which information must be stored for the organizer?

 A:

I. Business Processes

1. Production Planning and Procurement Planning1.1. Market-Oriented Planning

1.1.1. Sales and Operations Planning

1.1.1.1. Flexible Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create your planning hierarchy manually or automatically?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 236: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 236/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) How do you get the planning figures?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you deal with overloads (for example, produce in other plants, reducequantity, enhance available capacity)?

 A:

Q: 5) Define the level on which you want to carry out resource planning.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you use a regular backup of your data to assure and check the quality of yourplanning results?

 A:

Q: 7) With which criteria do you want to take products out of the market?

 A:

Q: 8) In which characteristic combinations do you have to plan?

 A:

Q: 9) How will you check you planning results (early warning system, using planned line askey figure)?

 A:

Q: 10) Determine the whole planning b integrating the strategy of using different planningversions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should be copiedfrom one versioned infostructure (origin) to another.

Explanation: Determine the whole scheduling integrating the strategy of using differentplanning versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data shouldbe copied from one versioned infostructure (origin) to some other versioned infostructure.

 A:

Q: 11) Specify the tools for copying data and integrate this into the whole scheduling,

 A:

Q: 12) When planning in different information structures/ versions, how do you want tomake sure that planning results are shared with other planners for overall planningconsistency?

 A:

Page 237: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 237/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) What kind of (key) figures do you hand over from one to the next planningprocedure?

 A:

Q: 14) If the information structure is not used for reporting, the names of the standard keyfigures can be changed individually within the planning type. What are the new names?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you want to maintain your planning hierarchy?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you want to use routings or rough cut planning profiles for capacity planning?

 A:

Q: 17) Make sure that the planning hierarchy is consistent in each tree.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 18) How do you want to calculate the proportions of the master data in the planninghierarchy?

 A:

Q: 19) How often do you have to rework the planning hierarchy for the master data, and forcalculating the proportions?

 A:

Q: 20) If you create the planning hierarchy automatically, which planning objects do youwant to exclude from the hierarchy when generating the master data by using a method?

 A:

Q: 21) What are your planning objects (for example, product group, material, region)?

 A:

Q: 22) What is your source for planning data?

 A:

Q: 23) On which levels (aggregated or disaggregated level) do you want to plan ?

 A:

Q: 26) Determine the planning time fence (2): how many periods should be visible/plannedin past time?

Page 238: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 238/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 27) Determine the level and the object where you want to do resource planning, forexample, on product hierarchy level evaluation of production line capacity or transportcapacity on a product group level.

 A:

Q: 29) Are there differences in the planning structure?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 30) Do you have different incomparable units in your planned materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 32) Do you use rough cut planning for resource planning?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 33) Which kind of formulas do you require for your planning processes and on whichlevel should the calculation be carried out?

 A:

Q: 34) What kind of resources do you want to plan?

 A:

Q: 35) What kind of resources do you plan?

 A:

Q: 36) Which levels do you use in sales & operation planning?

 A:

Q: 37) What information do you want to calculate but not save in the infostructure?

 A:

Q: 38) What information on actual data you want to see in the planning phase?

 A:

Q: 39) Which actual data do you want to display?

 A:

Page 239: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 239/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 40) Which key figures do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 41) Which key figures should be visible, and which planned by each planner using thecorresponding planning type?

 A:

Q: 42) Which key figures should be aggregated to a sum and/or average value, and whichkey figures should not be aggregated at all?

 A:

Q: 43) Which planning figures do you want to define for each of the planning procedures?What are your objectives concerning optimization?

 A:

Q: 44) Which special functions do you use as macros?

 A:

Q: 45) What are your goals when planning capacity in flexible planning?

 A:

Q: 46) What is your planning time bucket?

 A:

Q: 47) What are the characteristics of your infostructure?

 A:

Q: 48) How often do you want to maintain your planning hierarchy?

 A:

Q: 49) How often do you want to plan and how often do you need to maintain this plan?

 A:

Q: 51) How do you want to maintain your available capacity (for example, by shift plan,manually, by factory calendar)?

 A:

Q: 52) How do you want to generate your planning hierarchy?

 A:

Q: 53) How do you want to organize the whole planning cycle in the time sequence?

Page 240: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 240/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 54) How do you want to launch new products (for example, when working with theforecast tool, do you want to use the history of products that might behave similarly)?

 A:

Q: 55) What are your planning procedures?

 A:

Q: 56) What are the analyses based on the planning result compared to the analyses basedon actual data?

 A:

Q: 58) How many items do you have in your planning hierarchy?

 A:

Q: 59) Do you want to plan components derived from the plan of finished materials (e.g.attachments, spare parts)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 60) At what point of time should the macro be executed?

 A:

Q: 61) At which point(s) of time do you want to create capacity loads? Maintain this in thetime span periods in the rough cut planning profile.

 A:

1.1.1.2. Standard SOP

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to carry out medium to long-term planning of sales and productionquantities for your finished products?

 A:

Q: 2) At what level do you want to carry out sales and operations planning?

 A:

Q: 3) At what intervals do you want to carry out sales and operations planning?

 A:

Q: 4) Which sources are used in determining sales quantities?

Page 241: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 241/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Is capacity availability checked at this planning level?

 A:

1.1.1.3. Transfer of Results to Demand Management

Questions:

Q: 1) How often are the results of Sales and Operations Planning transferred to DemandManagement, and how is this defined?

 A:

Q: 2) Which strategies are used in the transfer of SOP results to Demand Management?

Explanation: - Direct transfer of sales plan material - Transfer sales plan material as aproportion of a product group - Direct transfer master production schedule - Transfer master

production schedule as a proportion of a product group

 A:

1.1.2. Forecast

1.1.2.1. Materials Forecast

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you establish material forecasts (for example, weekly, monthly, yearly) for yourstock materials?

Explanation: Analyze whether it is feasible and necessary. Often is does not have to bedaily; weekly is sufficient.

 A:

1.1.3. Demand Management

1.1.3.1. Demand Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Which planning strategies do you use to plan production quantities and dates?

 A:Q: 2) At which level do you want to maintain planned independent requirements?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you create your planned independent requirements?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to administer planned independent requirements in different versions?

 A:

Page 242: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 242/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you also want to create customer requirements in demand managementtransactions (in case, for example, the SD module is not used)?

 A:

1.1.4. Long-Term Planning

1.1.4.1. MRP Planning File Entry (Long-Term Planning)

Questions:

Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant toMRP.

 A:

Q: 2) How far in advance do you need to consider changes to planning?

Explanation: Correspondingly, the planning horizon must be customized. In an ordinary case

only the net change planning (NETPL) is carried out, but total planning (NETCH) must alsobe carried out periodically depending on the planning horizon. on the planning horizon.

 A:

Q: 3) In what time intervals do you want to divide your planning horizon?

 A:

Q: 4) How often will you require MRP performance tuning?

 A:

1.1.4.2. Planning Scenario Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you specify scenario description, time frame, and plant for long term lot sizeproduction?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out scenario comparisons with other scenarios including the activeversion?

 A:

Q: 3) What business process will you use to update the operative version?

 A:

1.1.4.3. Long-Term Planning: Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?

Page 243: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 243/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the materialrequirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.

 A:

1.1.4.4. Transfer of External Procurement Data to Purchasing Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transmit the planning results for external procurement in thePurchasing Information System, to make further evaluations for the vendor forecast?

 A:

1.1.4.5. Transfer of Stock/Requirement Data to Inventory Controlling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to prepare and evaluate the stock/requirements data, determined in long-term planning, using the standard analysis, within Inventory Controlling.

 A:

1.1.4.6. Transfer Activity Type Requirement to Cost Accounting

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the values determined for activity requirements in long-termplanning, as a planned payment to the Cost Center Accounting?

 A:

1.1.5. Master Production Scheduling

1.1.5.1. MRP Planning File Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant toMRP.

 A:

Q: 2) How far in advance do you need to consider changes to planning?

Explanation: Correspondingly, the planning horizon must be customized. In an ordinary case

only the net change planning (NETPL) is carried out, but total planning (NETCH) must alsobe carried out periodically depending on the planning horizon. on the planning horizon.

 A:

Q: 3) In what time intervals do you want to divide your planning horizon?

 A:

Q: 4) How often will you require MRP performance tuning?

 A:

Page 244: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 244/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.1.5.2. Master Production Scheduling - Total Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, beplanned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?

 A:

Q: 2) Should enterprise areas/organizational units (storage location, for example) within aplant be planned separately (MRP area)?

 A:

Q: 3) In which time intervals are planning runs carried out?

 A:

Q: 4) Should planning runs be carried out online or as background jobs?

Explanation: Which batch jobs have to be planned

 A:

Q: 5) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, isonly the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?

 A:

Q: 6) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time?

 A:

Q: 7) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?

 A:

Q: 8) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? Howshould purchase requisitions be treated in this case?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals.

 A:

Q: 9) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 10) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

Page 245: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 245/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 11) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders orshould an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacityrequirements.

 A:

Q: 12) Which procedure are you using for lot-size calculation?

 A:

Q: 13) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose ofcommon scheduling?

 A:

Q: 14) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

1.1.5.3. Master Production Scheduling - Single-Item

Questions:

Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, beplanned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?

 A:

Q: 2) Should the planning run be single or multi-level?

 A:

Q: 3) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 5) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

Page 246: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 246/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 7) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 8) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 9) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

Q: 10) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?

 A:

1.1.5.4. Master Production Scheduling - Interactive

Questions:

Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, beplanned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?

 A:

Q: 2) Should Master Production Scheduling (MPS) be carried out interactively?

 A:

Q: 3) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time

(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 5) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 7) How is the scheduling carried out?

Page 247: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 247/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 9) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

1.1.5.5. Master Production Scheduling - Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for checking the results of requirements planning at yourcompany?

Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling andcorrecting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.

 A:

Q: 2) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the materialrequirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.

 A:

1.1.6. Material Requirements Planning

1.1.6.1. MRP Planning File Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant toMRP.

 A:

Q: 2) How far in advance do you need to consider changes to planning?

Explanation: Correspondingly, the planning horizon must be customized. In an ordinary caseonly the net change planning (NETPL) is carried out, but total planning (NETCH) must also

be carried out periodically depending on the planning horizon. on the planning horizon.

 A:

Q: 3) In what time intervals do you want to divide your planning horizon?

 A:

Q: 4) How often will you require MRP performance tuning?

 A:

Page 248: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 248/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.1.6.2. Overall Material Requirements Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Should enterprise areas/organizational units (storage location, for example) within aplant be planned separately (MRP area)?

 A:

Q: 2) In which time intervals are planning runs carried out?

 A:

Q: 3) Should planning runs be carried out online or as background jobs?

Explanation: Which batch jobs have to be planned

 A:

Q: 4) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, isonly the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?

 A:

Q: 5) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time?

 A:

Q: 6) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?

 A:

Q: 7) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? Howshould purchase requisitions be treated in this case?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals.

 A:

Q: 8) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 9) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 10) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders orshould an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacityrequirements.

Page 249: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 249/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 11) Which procedure are you using for lot-size calculation?

 A:

Q: 12) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose ofcommon scheduling?

 A:

Q: 13) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

1.1.6.3. Material Requirements Planning - Individual

Questions:

Q: 1) Should the planning run be single or multi-level?

 A:

Q: 2) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 5) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 7) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 8) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

Page 250: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 250/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?

 A:

1.1.6.4. Material Requirements Planning - Interactive

Questions:

Q: 1) Should Material Requirements Planning (MRP) be carried out interactively?

 A:

Q: 2) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time

fence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 5) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 7) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 8) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

1.1.6.5. Material Requirements Planning - Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for checking the results of requirements planning at yourcompany?

Page 251: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 251/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling andcorrecting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.

 A:

Q: 2) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the materialrequirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.

 A:

1.1.6.6. Planned Orders, Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there any specific reasons to change planned orders manually?

 A:

1.1.6.7. Conversion of Planned Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Which procurement objects do you want to be created during the conversion?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you want the planned orders to be converted?

 A:

Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,

MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?

 A:

1.1.7. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

1.1.7.1. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

Page 252: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 252/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.2. Sales Order Oriented Planning

1.2.1. Master Production Scheduling

1.2.1.1. MRP Planning File Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant to

MRP. A:

Q: 2) How far in advance do you need to consider changes to planning?

Explanation: Correspondingly, the planning horizon must be customized. In an ordinary caseonly the net change planning (NETPL) is carried out, but total planning (NETCH) must alsobe carried out periodically depending on the planning horizon. on the planning horizon.

 A:

Q: 3) In what time intervals do you want to divide your planning horizon?

 A:

Q: 4) How often will you require MRP performance tuning?

 A:

1.2.1.2. Order BOM Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use the order browser to edit order BOMs at multi-levels?

 A:

1.2.1.3. Master Production Scheduling - Total Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, beplanned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?

 A:

Q: 2) Should enterprise areas/organizational units (storage location, for example) within aplant be planned separately (MRP area)?

 A:

Q: 3) In which time intervals are planning runs carried out?

 A:

Q: 4) Should planning runs be carried out online or as background jobs?

Page 253: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 253/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Which batch jobs have to be planned

 A:

Q: 5) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, isonly the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?

 A:

Q: 6) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time?

 A:

Q: 7) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?

 A:

Q: 8) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? Howshould purchase requisitions be treated in this case?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals.

 A:

Q: 9) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 10) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 11) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders orshould an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacityrequirements.

 A:

Q: 12) Which procedure are you using for lot-size calculation?

 A:

Q: 13) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose ofcommon scheduling?

 A:

Q: 14) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

Page 254: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 254/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.2.1.4. Master Production Scheduling - Single-Item

Questions:

Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, beplanned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?

 A:

Q: 2) Should the planning run be single or multi-level?

 A:

Q: 3) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time

fence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 5) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 7) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 8) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 9) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

Q: 10) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?

 A:

1.2.1.5. Master Production Scheduling - Sales Order-Specific

Questions:

Page 255: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 255/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, beplanned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?

 A:

Q: 2) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 4) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 5) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 6) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 7) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

Q: 8) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?

 A:

1.2.1.6. Master Production Scheduling - Interactive

Questions:

Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, beplanned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?

 A:

Q: 2) Should Master Production Scheduling (MPS) be carried out interactively?

 A:

Q: 3) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

Page 256: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 256/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 5) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 7) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 8) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 9) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

1.2.1.7. Master Production Scheduling - Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for checking the results of requirements planning at yourcompany?

Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling andcorrecting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.

 A:

Q: 2) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the materialrequirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.

 A:

1.2.2. Material Requirements Planning

1.2.2.1. MRP Planning File Entry

Questions:

Page 257: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 257/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant toMRP.

 A:

Q: 2) How far in advance do you need to consider changes to planning?

Explanation: Correspondingly, the planning horizon must be customized. In an ordinary caseonly the net change planning (NETPL) is carried out, but total planning (NETCH) must alsobe carried out periodically depending on the planning horizon. on the planning horizon.

 A:

Q: 3) In what time intervals do you want to divide your planning horizon?

 A:

Q: 4) How often will you require MRP performance tuning?

 A:

1.2.2.2. Overall Material Requirements Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Should enterprise areas/organizational units (storage location, for example) within aplant be planned separately (MRP area)?

 A:

Q: 2) In which time intervals are planning runs carried out?

 A:

Q: 3) Should planning runs be carried out online or as background jobs?

Explanation: Which batch jobs have to be planned

 A:

Q: 4) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, isonly the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?

 A:

Q: 5) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time?

 A:

Q: 6) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?

 A:

Page 258: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 258/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? Howshould purchase requisitions be treated in this case?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals.

 A:

Q: 8) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 9) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 10) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or

should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacityrequirements.

 A:

Q: 11) Which procedure are you using for lot-size calculation?

 A:

Q: 12) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose ofcommon scheduling?

 A:

Q: 13) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

1.2.2.3. Material Requirements Planning - Individual

Questions:

Q: 1) Should the planning run be single or multi-level?

 A:

Q: 2) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Page 259: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 259/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 5) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 7) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 8) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

Q: 9) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?

 A:

1.2.2.4. Material Requirements Planning - Sales Order-Specific

Questions:

Q: 1) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning

time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 3) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 4) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Page 260: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 260/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 6) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

Q: 7) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?

 A:

1.2.2.5. Material Requirements Planning - Interactive

Questions:

Q: 1) Should Material Requirements Planning (MRP) be carried out interactively?

 A:

Q: 2) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 5) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 7) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 8) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

1.2.2.6. Material requirements planning - evaluation

Page 261: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 261/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for checking the results of requirements planning at yourcompany?

Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling andcorrecting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.

 A:

Q: 2) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the materialrequirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.

 A:

1.2.2.7. Planned Orders, Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there any specific reasons to change planned orders manually?

 A:

1.2.2.8. Conversion of Planned Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Which procurement objects do you want to be created during the conversion?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you want the planned orders to be converted?

 A:

Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?

 A:

1.2.3. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

1.2.3.1. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

Page 262: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 262/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

1.3. Consumption-Driven Planning

1.3.1. Forecast

1.3.1.1. Material Forecast

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you establish material forecasts (for example, weekly, monthly, yearly) for yourstock materials?

Explanation: Analyze whether it is feasible and necessary. Often is does not have to bedaily; weekly is sufficient.

 A:

1.3.2. Material Requirements Planning

1.3.2.1. MRP Planning File Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant toMRP.

 A:

Q: 2) How far in advance do you need to consider changes to planning?

Explanation: Correspondingly, the planning horizon must be customized. In an ordinary caseonly the net change planning (NETPL) is carried out, but total planning (NETCH) must alsobe carried out periodically depending on the planning horizon. on the planning horizon.

 A:

Q: 3) In what time intervals do you want to divide your planning horizon?

 A:

Q: 4) How often will you require MRP performance tuning?

 A:

1.3.2.2. Overall Material Requirements Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Should enterprise areas/organizational units (storage location, for example) within aplant be planned separately (MRP area)?

 A:

Q: 2) In which time intervals are planning runs carried out?

 A:

Page 263: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 263/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Should planning runs be carried out online or as background jobs?

Explanation: Which batch jobs have to be planned

 A:

Q: 4) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, isonly the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?

 A:

Q: 5) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time?

 A:

Q: 6) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?

 A:

Q: 7) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? Howshould purchase requisitions be treated in this case?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planningtime fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals.

 A:

Q: 8) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 9) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 10) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders orshould an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacityrequirements.

 A:

Q: 11) Which procedure are you using for lot-size calculation?

 A:

Q: 12) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose ofcommon scheduling?

 A:

Q: 13) Are MRP lists required?

Page 264: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 264/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

1.3.2.3. Material Requirements Planning - Individual

Questions:

Q: 1) Should the planning run be single or multi-level?

 A:

Q: 2) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time(planning time fence)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning timefence?

Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning

time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means theplanning run does not create any new order proposals

 A:

Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run isrequired?

 A:

Q: 5) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

 A:

Q: 6) How is the scheduling carried out?

 A:

Q: 7) Which procedure is used to calculate lot sizes?

 A:

Q: 8) Are MRP lists required?

 A:

Q: 9) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?

 A:

1.3.2.4. Material Requirements Planning - Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for checking the results of requirements planning at yourcompany?

Page 265: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 265/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling andcorrecting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.

 A:

Q: 2) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the materialrequirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.

 A:

1.3.2.5. Planned Orders, Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there any specific reasons to change planned orders manually?

 A:

1.3.2.6. Conversion of Planned Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Which procurement objects do you want to be created during the conversion?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you want the planned orders to be converted?

 A:

Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,

MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?

 A:

1.3.3. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

1.3.3.1. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

1.4. Distribution Requirements Planning

1.4.1. Planning

1.4.1.1. Flexible Planning

Page 266: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 266/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to create your planning hierarchy manually or automatically?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How do you get the planning figures?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you deal with overloads (for example, produce in other plants, reducequantity, enhance available capacity)?

 A:

Q: 5) Define the level on which you want to carry out resource planning.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you use a regular backup of your data to assure and check the quality of yourplanning results?

 A:

Q: 7) With which criteria do you want to take products out of the market?

 A:

Q: 8) In which characteristic combinations do you have to plan?

 A:

Q: 9) How will you check you planning results (early warning system, using planned line askey figure)?

 A:

Q: 10) Determine the whole planning b integrating the strategy of using different planningversions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should be copied

from one versioned infostructure (origin) to another.

Explanation: Determine the whole scheduling integrating the strategy of using differentplanning versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data shouldbe copied from one versioned infostructure (origin) to some other versioned infostructure.

 A:

Q: 11) Specify the tools for copying data and integrate this into the whole scheduling,

 A:

Page 267: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 267/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) When planning in different information structures/ versions, how do you want tomake sure that planning results are shared with other planners for overall planningconsistency?

 A:

Q: 13) What kind of (key) figures do you hand over from one to the next planningprocedure?

 A:

Q: 14) If the information structure is not used for reporting, the names of the standard keyfigures can be changed individually within the planning type. What are the new names?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you want to maintain your planning hierarchy?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you want to use routings or rough cut planning profiles for capacity planning?

 A:

Q: 17) Make sure that the planning hierarchy is consistent in each tree.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 18) How do you want to calculate the proportions of the master data in the planninghierarchy?

 A:

Q: 19) How often do you have to rework the planning hierarchy for the master data, and forcalculating the proportions?

 A:

Q: 20) If you create the planning hierarchy automatically, which planning objects do you

want to exclude from the hierarchy when generating the master data by using a method?

 A:

Q: 21) What are your planning objects (for example, product group, material, region)?

 A:

Q: 22) What is your source for planning data?

 A:

Page 268: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 268/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 23) On which levels (aggregated or disaggregated level) do you want to plan ?

 A:

Q: 26) Determine the planning time fence (2): how many periods should be visible/plannedin past time?

 A:

Q: 27) Determine the level and the object where you want to do resource planning, forexample, on product hierarchy level evaluation of production line capacity or transportcapacity on a product group level.

 A:

Q: 29) Are there differences in the planning structure?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 30) Do you have different incomparable units in your planned materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 32) Do you use rough cut planning for resource planning?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 33) Which kind of formulas do you require for your planning processes and on whichlevel should the calculation be carried out?

 A:

Q: 34) What kind of resources do you want to plan?

 A:

Q: 35) What kind of resources do you plan?

 A:

Q: 36) Which levels do you use in sales & operation planning?

 A:

Q: 37) What information do you want to calculate but not save in the infostructure?

 A:

Q: 38) What information on actual data you want to see in the planning phase?

Page 269: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 269/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 39) Which actual data do you want to display?

 A:

Q: 40) Which key figures do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 41) Which key figures should be visible, and which planned by each planner using thecorresponding planning type?

 A:

Q: 42) Which key figures should be aggregated to a sum and/or average value, and whichkey figures should not be aggregated at all?

 A:

Q: 43) Which planning figures do you want to define for each of the planning procedures?What are your objectives concerning optimization?

 A:

Q: 44) Which special functions do you use as macros?

 A:

Q: 45) What are your goals when planning capacity in flexible planning?

 A:

Q: 46) What is your planning time bucket?

 A:

Q: 47) What are the characteristics of your infostructure?

 A:

Q: 48) How often do you want to maintain your planning hierarchy?

 A:

Q: 49) How often do you want to plan and how often do you need to maintain this plan?

 A:

Q: 51) How do you want to maintain your available capacity (for example, by shift plan,manually, by factory calendar)?

 A:

Page 270: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 270/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 52) How do you want to generate your planning hierarchy?

 A:

Q: 53) How do you want to organize the whole planning cycle in the time sequence?

 A:

Q: 54) How do you want to launch new products (for example, when working with theforecast tool, do you want to use the history of products that might behave similarly)?

 A:

Q: 55) What are your planning procedures?

 A:

Q: 56) What are the analyses based on the planning result compared to the analyses basedon actual data?

 A:

Q: 58) How many items do you have in your planning hierarchy?

 A:

Q: 59) Do you want to plan components derived from the plan of finished materials (e.g.

attachments, spare parts)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 60) At what point of time should the macro be executed?

 A:

Q: 61) At which point(s) of time do you want to create capacity loads? Maintain this in thetime span periods in the rough cut planning profile.

 A:

1.4.1.2. Transfer of Results to Demand Management

Questions:

Q: 1) How often are the results of Sales and Operations Planning transferred to DemandManagement, and how is this defined?

 A:

Q: 2) Which strategies are used in the transfer of SOP results to Demand Management?

Page 271: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 271/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: - Direct transfer of sales plan material - Transfer sales plan material as aproportion of a product group - Direct transfer master production schedule - Transfer masterproduction schedule as a proportion of a product group

 A:

1.4.1.3. Demand Management

Questions:

Q: 1) Which planning strategies do you use to plan production quantities and dates?

 A:

Q: 2) At which level do you want to maintain planned independent requirements?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you create your planned independent requirements?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to administer planned independent requirements in different versions?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you also want to create customer requirements in demand managementtransactions (in case, for example, the SD module is not used)?

 A:

1.4.2. DRP - Distribution Resource Planning Run

1.4.2.1. DRP Run for Materials

Questions:

Q: 1) What settings do you use in it?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to display results directly from the planning run?

Explanation: Settings for MRP list active and display

 A:

Q: 3) Which items will you plan using single-item planning?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use single/multi level planning?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you carry out MRP for individual materials?

Page 272: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 272/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

1.4.2.2. DRP Run for Plant

Questions:

Q: 1) What settings do you use?

 A:

Q: 2) What sources of demand will you use by plant?

 A:

Q: 3) If you carry out planning by visual inspection, how is it supported and how do youwant the data to be transferred to SAP Retail?

 A:

Q: 4) What determines the delivery circle? (vendor sub-range/site/other)

 A:

Q: 5) Does the goods delivery take place on specific days?

Explanation: Create delivery cycle and assign it to material/article master.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you want planned inward and outward movements (purchase orders, deliveries,etc.) to be taken into consideration?

Explanation: Customizing the MRP type: external requirements Customizing the MRP type:external requirements

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you maintain articles, which need to be reordered automatically, at themerchandise category level ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2. Procurement

Questions:

Q: 1) How many different materials do you procure on a regular basis?

Page 273: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 273/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) How does material move between plants?

 A:

2.1. Procurement of Materials and External Services

2.1.1. Purchase Requisition

2.1.1.1. Purchase Requisition Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for directconsumption, external services?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or schedulingagreement (Outline Agreement Request)?

 A:

Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomesdemand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time perplant.

Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition forwidgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times perplant.

 A:

Q: 4) Will purchase requisitions generated via material/article requirements planning bemanually post-processed?

Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only takeeffect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changedagain after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.1.1.2. Purchase Requisition Assignment

Questions:

Q: 1) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions assigned to a source ofsupply?

 A:

Q: 2) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions grouped together?

 A:

Page 274: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 274/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign thepurchase requisition?

 A:

Q: 4) Are purchase requisitions converted into requests for quotations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources ofsupply internal and/or external to your company?

 A:

2.1.1.3. Release Purchase Requisition

Questions:

Q: 1) Should requisitions be subject to approval by someone (or possibly several people)before the requisition can be processed into an RFQ and/or purchase order?a

Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasingdepartment manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the departmentmanager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under whatcircumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -for external services

 A:

Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?

 A:

Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?

 A:2.1.2. Purchasing

2.1.2.1. Purchase Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How will purchase orders be created in your system?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefinedtolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchase

requisitions!

Page 275: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 275/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Specify the consumption categories for which you will procure external services andmaterial directly: Asset, cost center, production order, project, sales order, other (pleasespecify).

 A:

Q: 5) Which types of purchase order will you use?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you transmit purchase orders to your vendors?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used forstockkeeping purposes?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in thePO/and or used for stock putaway?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Is it necessary to track certificates of origin and/or customs reference numbers formaterials produced in foreign countries?

 A:

Q: 10) Will you be purchasing material imported from foreign vendors ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?

Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stocktransport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is nolonger read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records areread! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons forordering?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 276: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 276/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs. Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costsper piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items inpurchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasingdocuments?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or anotherconsumption category?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individualmaterials/material types.

 A:

Q: 18) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would youever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveries

expected? Please list the values for each material/material group.

Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the valuestayed below, it will be an under delivery

 A:

Q: 19) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material ispurchased, etc)? o

 A:

Q: 20) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Isvendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when thegoods are received ?

Explanation: e.g., full compliance, ignored instructions, ...

 A:

Page 277: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 277/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 21) Is it to be possible for purchase orders to be generated automatically following agoods receipt? Specify the criteria for this.

Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.

 A:

2.1.2.2. Contract Release Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchaserequisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source AdministrationScenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

2.1.2.3. Release of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) Are purchase documents to be approved by someone before being issued tovendors? Describe the approval procedure....

Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by thepurchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved bythe President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approvalprocess applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3

regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.

Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for releaseprocedure

 A:

Q: 3) Will you use an electronic signature to release purchasing documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.1.2.4. Transmission of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) How do your vendors transmit shipping notifications?

 A:

Q: 2) What information does the shipping notification contain?

 A:

Page 278: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 278/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notificationhave been received?

 A:

Q: 5) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

Q: 6) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)on your order form?

 A:

Q: 8) How are purchase orders to be transmitted?

 A:

2.1.2.5. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule

Questions:

Q: 1) Are scheduling agreement delivery schedules/SA releases created in R/3 manually,with reference to requisitions and/or automatically? (Further details in sourcing administrationscenario.)

 A:

Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases withrespect to the quantities delivered?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreementreleases via the Internet?

Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace isinstalled in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In therelease creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internetrelease.

 A:

Page 279: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 279/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

2.1.2.6. Transmission of Scheduling Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you wish to transmit scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

2.1.2.7. Delivery and Acknowledgment Expediter

Questions:

Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendors

urging delivery of the overdue goods?

 A:

Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, pleaseexplain.

 A:

Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the duedate is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which kinds of purchasing document do you want to send to vendors? 1) Thecomplete purchasing document 2) Information re changes 3) Reminders (prior to due date 4)Urging letters/expediters (after due date) 5) Scheduling agreement delivery schedules.

Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, faxmessages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Changenotice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendor

is changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urgingletters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shippingnotifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notificationnotification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging LetterRelated to Rolling Delivery schedules

 A:

Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overduedeliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?

 A:

Page 280: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 280/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?

 A:2.1.2.8. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoctype is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

 A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way youuse them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to addmore fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments refunction modules in R/3.

 A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

 A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

 A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, lookunder http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

 A:

Page 281: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 281/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and thedesired send time.

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

 A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)and the desired processing time

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

 A:

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

 A:

2.1.2.9. Processing of Shipping Notifications/Confirmations

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you process shipping notifications with the R/3 System?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?

Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates andquantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - pleasedescribe.

 A:

Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery datevariances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?

 A:

Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Whichevents should trigger a confirmation?

 A:

Page 282: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 282/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

2.1.2.10. Transmission of Shipping Notifications

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department or person is to be informed of the shipping notifications?

 A:

2.1.3. Transportation

2.1.3.1. Message Transmission for Transport Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:2.1.3.2. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Page 283: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 283/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Page 284: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 284/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

2.1.3.3. Freight Cost Invoicing and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

2.1.4. Goods Receipt

2.1.4.1. Reservation Processing

Questions:

Page 285: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 285/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific material reservations (for sales, for production) for yourstock materials?

 A:

Q: 2) How far in advance are materials to be allowed to be reserved?

 A:

Q: 3) In which cases would you want to use manual reservations?

 A:

Q: 4) How long after the reservation date are open reservations canceled?

 A:

2.1.4.2. Goods Receipt Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) The material stock balances shown in your legacy system are to be transferred to theR/3 System. Will the stocks be valuated at the prices specified in the R/3 e total value of theformer system be taken over?

 A:

Q: 2) If you do not use the R/3 Purchasing functionality, describe the process of receivinggoods from a vendor.

 A:

Q: 3) If you do not use production orders of the R/3 System, describe the process ofreceiving goods from production.

 A:

Q: 4) Should the person who posts a goods receipt be able to use a different accountassignment than the one specified via the automatic account determination process?

 A:

2.1.4.3. Goods Receipt Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

Page 286: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 286/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you orderin? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shippinginstructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Page 287: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 287/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after theinspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Q: 16) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

2.1.4.4. Automatic Generation of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) Is it to be possible for purchase orders to be generated automatically following a

goods receipt? Specify the criteria for this.

Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.

 A:

2.1.5. Service Entry Sheet

2.1.5.1. Service Entry Sheet

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to process or document completion of the services performed by the

service provider?

Page 288: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 288/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

2.1.6. Warehouse/Stores

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have storage locations, which are not relevant for Warehouse Management ?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you use storage locations for more than one plant? Name these storage locationsand the relevant plants.

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the structure of your warehouse!

 A:

Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan toconnect this system with the R/3 ?

 A:

Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?

 A:

Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?

 A:

Q: 7) Which system should generate the transport orders ?

 A:

Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacysystem? Explain or provide a design drawing.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need traceability of materials based on pallet information?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to control whether goods in the goods receipt zone are displayed in theavailability check?

 A:

2.1.6.1. Stock Placement Processing

Page 289: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 289/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Page 290: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 290/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage orremain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is

created?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

Page 291: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 291/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

2.1.6.2. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer

order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

2.1.6.3. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

Page 292: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 292/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

2.1.6.4. Return Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stockpurge?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you create action plans/tasks for this defective material?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) onthe defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you have to inspect/re-inspect defective material found in your stockroom or on theproduction floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?

 A:

Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined thatthey are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.

 A:

2.1.6.5. Posting Change WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use transfer orders to implement transfer postings with respect toconsignment material?

 A:

Q: 2) Which movement types will you use for posting changes?

 A:

Page 293: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 293/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) What type of documentation (forms) is to be generated in the case of transferpostings?

 A:

Q: 4) Who is to be informed of a transfer posting? How is this person to be informed?

 A:

2.1.6.6. WM Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use storage-bin-to-storage-bin stock transfers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.1.7. Invoice Verification

2.1.7.1. Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS)

Questions:

Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goodsreceipts?

 A:

Q: 2) Should a goods receipt with reference to a PO automatically generate an invoice forthe delivery?

 A:

2.1.7.2. Invoicing Plan Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) How many invoicing plans will you have?

 A:

2.1.7.3. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoctype is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

 A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

Page 294: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 294/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way youuse them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to addmore fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments refunction modules in R/3.

 A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

 A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

 A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, lookunder http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

 A:

Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and thedesired send time.

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

 A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)and the desired processing time

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

 A:

Page 295: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 295/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

 A:

2.1.7.4. Invoice Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event ofvariances?

 A:

Q: 2) Name the types of tax that might appear on a vendor's invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore beautomatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.

 A:

Q: 4) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together undercertain circumstances?

 A:

Q: 5) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passed

QM inspection before being paid ?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you treat unplanned delivery costs included in an invoice ?

Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchaseorder at the time of invoice verification?

 A:

Q: 8) Should down payments also be cleared?

 A:

Q: 9) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within yourorganization with respect to the invoice receipt?

Page 296: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 296/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: For example, a payment advice note

 A:

Q: 10) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do youallow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?

 A:

Q: 11) Is the automatic account determination process only defined by Financial Accounting? If not, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase orderprice?

Explanation: "Mail to Purchasing" possible after posting invoice.

 A:

Q: 13) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations suchas future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.

Explanation: Only relevant to USA and Brazil.

 A:

Q: 15) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking isnecessary?

Explanation: Check whether it is possible to switch to ERS.

 A:

Q: 16) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in thesystem?

 A:

2.1.7.5. Invoice Overview

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for processing incorrect invoices in your firm?

 A:

Page 297: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 297/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verificationin the case of errors.

Explanation: Organizational and system-supported communication (e.g. by mail from withinthe application). There is no standard SAP solution for system-supported communication.Instead, a customer-specific solution has to be prepared (e.g. workflow, message technique).

 A:

2.1.7.6. Invoice Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Which invoice blocking reasons will you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice whenthe number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value for

X.

 A:

Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due tovariances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.

Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantitydifference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) youtolerate without warning or error messages?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What isthe threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) withoutreference to a purchase order?

 A:

Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price andthe invoice price? How is this person to be notified?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you wish to block invoices randomly (stochastically) or only if a certain value isexceeded?

 A:

Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?le manager)

Explanation: E.g. buyer, accounts payable accountant.

Page 298: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 298/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

2.2. Procurement via Subcontracting

2.2.1. Purchase Requisition

2.2.1.1. Purchase Requisition Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for directconsumption, external services?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or schedulingagreement (Outline Agreement Request)?

 A:

Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomesdemand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time perplant.

Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition forwidgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times perplant.

 A:

Q: 4) Will purchase requisitions generated via material/article requirements planning bemanually post-processed?

Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only takeeffect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changedagain after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.2.1.2. Purchase Requisition Assignment

Questions:

Q: 1) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions assigned to a source ofsupply?

 A:

Q: 2) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions grouped together?

 A:

Page 299: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 299/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign thepurchase requisition?

 A:

Q: 4) Are purchase requisitions converted into requests for quotations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources ofsupply internal and/or external to your company?

 A:

2.2.1.3. Release Purchase Requisition

Questions:

Q: 1) Should requisitions be subject to approval by someone (or possibly several people)

before the requisition can be processed into an RFQ and/or purchase order?a

Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasingdepartment manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the departmentmanager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under whatcircumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -for external services

 A:

Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?

 A:

Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?

 A:2.2.2. Purchasing

2.2.2.1. Purchase Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How will purchase orders be created in your system?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefinedtolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchaserequisitions!

 A:

Page 300: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 300/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Specify the consumption categories for which you will procure external services andmaterial directly: Asset, cost center, production order, project, sales order, other (pleasespecify).

 A:

Q: 5) Which types of purchase order will you use?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you transmit purchase orders to your vendors?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used forstockkeeping purposes?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in thePO/and or used for stock putaway?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Is it necessary to track certificates of origin and/or customs reference numbers formaterials produced in foreign countries?

 A:

Q: 10) Will you be purchasing material imported from foreign vendors ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?

Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stocktransport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is no

longer read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records areread! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons forordering?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 301: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 301/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs. Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costsper piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items inpurchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasingdocuments?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or anotherconsumption category?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individualmaterials/material types.

 A:

Q: 18) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would youever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveriesexpected? Please list the values for each material/material group.

Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the valuestayed below, it will be an under delivery

 A:

Q: 19) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material ispurchased, etc)? o

 A:

Q: 20) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Isvendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when thegoods are received ?

Explanation: e.g., full compliance, ignored instructions, ...

 A:

Q: 21) Is it to be possible for purchase orders to be generated automatically following agoods receipt? Specify the criteria for this.

Page 302: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 302/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.

 A:

2.2.2.2. Contract Release Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchaserequisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source AdministrationScenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

2.2.2.3. Release of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) Are purchase documents to be approved by someone before being issued tovendors? Describe the approval procedure....

Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by thepurchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved bythe President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approvalprocess applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.

Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for releaseprocedure

 A:

Q: 3) Will you use an electronic signature to release purchasing documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.2.2.4. Transmission of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) How do your vendors transmit shipping notifications?

 A:

Q: 2) What information does the shipping notification contain?

 A:

Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?

 A:

Page 303: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 303/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notificationhave been received?

 A:

Q: 5) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

Q: 6) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)on your order form?

 A:

Q: 8) How are purchase orders to be transmitted?

 A:2.2.2.5. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule

Questions:

Q: 1) Are scheduling agreement delivery schedules/SA releases created in R/3 manually,with reference to requisitions and/or automatically? (Further details in sourcing administrationscenario.)

 A:

Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases withrespect to the quantities delivered?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreementreleases via the Internet?

Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace isinstalled in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In therelease creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internetrelease.

 A:

2.2.2.6. Transmission of Scheduling Agreements

Page 304: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 304/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you wish to transmit scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

2.2.2.7. Delivery and Acknowledgment Expediter

Questions:

Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendorsurging delivery of the overdue goods?

 A:

Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, pleaseexplain.

 A:

Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the duedate is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which kinds of purchasing document do you want to send to vendors? 1) Thecomplete purchasing document 2) Information re changes 3) Reminders (prior to due date 4)Urging letters/expediters (after due date) 5) Scheduling agreement delivery schedules.

Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, faxmessages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Changenotice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendoris changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urgingletters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shipping

notifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notificationnotification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging LetterRelated to Rolling Delivery schedules

 A:

Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overduedeliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?

 A:

Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?

Page 305: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 305/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:2.2.2.8. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoctype is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

 A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way youuse them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to addmore fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments refunction modules in R/3.

 A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

 A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

 A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, lookunder http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

 A:

Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and thedesired send time.

Page 306: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 306/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

 A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)and the desired processing time

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

 A:

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

 A:

2.2.2.9. Processing of Shipping Notifications/Confirmations

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you process shipping notifications with the R/3 System?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?

Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates andquantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - pleasedescribe.

 A:

Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery datevariances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?

 A:

Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Whichevents should trigger a confirmation?

 A:

2.2.2.10. Transmission of Shipping Notifications

Page 307: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 307/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department or person is to be informed of the shipping notifications?

 A:

2.2.3. Transportation

2.2.3.1. Message Transmission for Transport Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit

memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:2.2.3.2. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Page 308: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 308/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Page 309: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 309/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

2.2.3.3. Freight Cost Invoicing and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

2.2.4. Provision of Components

2.2.4.1. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you record materials ordered for specific work orders?

Page 310: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 310/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in thesystem?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order?

 A:

Q: 4) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 5) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 6) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 7) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what informationdo they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

2.2.4.2. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Page 311: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 311/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Page 312: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 312/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Page 313: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 313/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you allocate merchandise which is in short supply (delivery priorities)?

 A:

2.2.5. Goods Receipt

2.2.5.1. Goods Receipt Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

Page 314: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 314/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you orderin? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping

instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Page 315: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 315/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after theinspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Q: 16) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

2.2.5.2. Subsequent Adjustment of Components

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you make adjustments for over-/underconsumption of components by thesubcontractor (vendor)?

 A:

2.2.6. Warehouse/Stores

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have vendors with several/different ordering addresses, payees, carriers, andso on? If so, what do these depend on (assortment, supply region)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have warehouses with stock of different plants?

 A:

Page 316: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 316/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Describe the structure of your warehouse!

 A:

Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan toconnect this system with the R/3 ?

 A:

Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?

 A:

Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?

 A:

Q: 7) Which system should generate the transport orders ?

 A:

Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacysystem? Explain or provide a design drawing.

 A:

2.2.6.1. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 2) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to

which location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 4) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

2.2.6.2. Stock Placement Processing

Page 317: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 317/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Page 318: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 318/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage orremain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is

created?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

Page 319: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 319/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

2.2.6.3. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer

order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

2.2.6.4. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

Page 320: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 320/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

2.2.6.5. Posting Change WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use transfer orders to implement transfer postings with respect toconsignment material?

 A:

Q: 2) Which movement types will you use for posting changes?

 A:

Q: 3) What type of documentation (forms) is to be generated in the case of transferpostings?

 A:

Q: 4) Who is to be informed of a transfer posting? How is this person to be informed?

 A:

2.2.6.6. WM Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use storage-bin-to-storage-bin stock transfers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.2.6.7. Return Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stockpurge?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you create action plans/tasks for this defective material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) onthe defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 321: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 321/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you have to inspect/re-inspect defective material found in your stockroom or on theproduction floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?

 A:

Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined thatthey are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.

 A:

2.2.7. Invoice Verification

2.2.7.1. Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS)

Questions:

Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goodsreceipts?

 A:

Q: 2) Should a goods receipt with reference to a PO automatically generate an invoice forthe delivery?

 A:

2.2.7.2. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoctype is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

 A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Page 322: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 322/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way youuse them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to addmore fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments refunction modules in R/3.

 A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

 A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

 A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, lookunder http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

 A:

Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and thedesired send time.

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

 A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)and the desired processing time

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

 A:

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

 A:

Page 323: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 323/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

2.2.7.3. Invoice Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event ofvariances?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you notify your vendors of the reduction?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you carry out invoice verification in the background?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have vendors who create one invoice for a delivery period?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you receive mixed invoices (credit and debit items in the same document)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Name the types of tax that might appear on a vendor's invoice.

 A:

Q: 7) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore beautomatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.

 A:

Q: 8) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together undercertain circumstances?

 A:

Q: 9) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passedQM inspection before being paid ?

 A:

Q: 10) How do you treat unplanned delivery costs included in an invoice ?

Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.

 A:

Page 324: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 324/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchaseorder at the time of invoice verification?

 A:

Q: 12) Should down payments also be cleared?

 A:

Q: 13) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within yourorganization with respect to the invoice receipt?

Explanation: For example, a payment advice note

 A:

Q: 14) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do youallow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?

 A:

Q: 15) Is the automatic account determination process only defined by Financial Accounting? If not, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase orderprice?

Explanation: "Mail to Purchasing" possible after posting invoice.

 A:

Q: 17) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations suchas future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.

Explanation: Only relevant to USA and Brazil.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking isnecessary?

Explanation: Check whether it is possible to switch to ERS.

 A:

Page 325: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 325/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 20) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in thesystem?

 A:

2.2.7.4. Invoice Overview

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for processing incorrect invoices in your firm?

 A:

Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verificationin the case of errors.

Explanation: Organizational and system-supported communication (e.g. by mail from withinthe application). There is no standard SAP solution for system-supported communication.

Instead, a customer-specific solution has to be prepared (e.g. workflow, message technique).

 A:

2.2.7.5. Invoice Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Which invoice blocking reasons will you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice when

the number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value forX.

 A:

Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due tovariances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.

Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantitydifference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) youtolerate without warning or error messages?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What isthe threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) withoutreference to a purchase order?

 A:

Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price andthe invoice price? How is this person to be notified?

Page 326: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 326/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) Do you wish to block invoices randomly (stochastically) or only if a certain value isexceeded?

 A:

Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?le manager)

Explanation: E.g. buyer, accounts payable accountant.

 A:

2.3. Procurement on a Consignment Basis

2.3.1. Purchase Requisition

2.3.1.1. Purchase Requisition Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for directconsumption, external services?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or schedulingagreement (Outline Agreement Request)?

 A:

Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomesdemand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time perplant.

Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition forwidgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times perplant.

 A:

Q: 4) Will purchase requisitions generated via material/article requirements planning bemanually post-processed?

Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only takeeffect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changedagain after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.3.1.2. Purchase Requisition Assignment

Questions:

Page 327: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 327/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions assigned to a source ofsupply?

 A:

Q: 2) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions grouped together?

 A:

Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign thepurchase requisition?

 A:

Q: 4) Are purchase requisitions converted into requests for quotations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources ofsupply internal and/or external to your company?

 A:

2.3.1.3. Release Purchase Requisition

Questions:

Q: 1) Should requisitions be subject to approval by someone (or possibly several people)before the requisition can be processed into an RFQ and/or purchase order?

a

Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasingdepartment manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the departmentmanager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under whatcircumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -for external services

 A:

Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?

 A:

Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?

 A:2.3.2. Purchasing

2.3.2.1. Purchase Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How will purchase orders be created in your system?

Page 328: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 328/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefinedtolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchaserequisitions!

 A:

Q: 4) How do you transmit purchase orders to your vendors?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used forstockkeeping purposes?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in thePO/and or used for stock putaway?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Is it necessary to track certificates of origin and/or customs reference numbers formaterials produced in foreign countries?

 A:

Q: 8) Will you be purchasing material imported from foreign vendors ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?

Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stock

transport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is nolonger read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records areread! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons forordering?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 329: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 329/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs. Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costsper piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).

 A:

Q: 12) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items inpurchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasingdocuments?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or anotherconsumption category?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.

 A:

Q: 15) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individualmaterials/material types.

 A:

Q: 16) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would youever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveriesexpected? Please list the values for each material/material group.

Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the valuestayed below, it will be an under delivery

 A:

Q: 17) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material ispurchased, etc)? o

 A:

Q: 18) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Isvendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when thegoods are received ?

Explanation: e.g., full compliance, ignored instructions, ...

 A:

2.3.2.2. Contract Release Order

Questions:

Page 330: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 330/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchaserequisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source AdministrationScenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

2.3.2.3. Release of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) Are purchase documents to be approved by someone before being issued tovendors? Describe the approval procedure....

Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by thepurchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved bythe President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approvalprocess applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.

Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for releaseprocedure

 A:

Q: 3) Will you use an electronic signature to release purchasing documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.3.2.4. Transmission of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) How do your vendors transmit shipping notifications?

 A:

Q: 2) What information does the shipping notification contain?

 A:

Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notificationhave been received?

 A:

Q: 5) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Page 331: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 331/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

Q: 6) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)on your order form?

 A:

Q: 8) How are purchase orders to be transmitted?

 A:2.3.2.5. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule

Questions:

Q: 1) Are scheduling agreement delivery schedules/SA releases created in R/3 manually,with reference to requisitions and/or automatically? (Further details in sourcing administrationscenario.)

 A:

Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases withrespect to the quantities delivered?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreementreleases via the Internet?

Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace isinstalled in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In therelease creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internet

release.

 A:

2.3.2.6. Transmission of Scheduling Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you wish to transmit scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Page 332: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 332/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

2.3.2.7. Delivery and Acknowledgment Expediter

Questions:

Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendorsurging delivery of the overdue goods?

 A:

Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, pleaseexplain.

 A:

Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the duedate is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which kinds of purchasing document do you want to send to vendors? 1) Thecomplete purchasing document 2) Information re changes 3) Reminders (prior to due date 4)Urging letters/expediters (after due date) 5) Scheduling agreement delivery schedules.

Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, fax

messages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Changenotice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendoris changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urgingletters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shippingnotifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notificationnotification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging LetterRelated to Rolling Delivery schedules

 A:

Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overdue

deliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?

 A:

Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?

 A:2.3.2.8. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoctype is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Page 333: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 333/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

 A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way youuse them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to addmore fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re

function modules in R/3.

 A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

 A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

 A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, lookunder http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

 A:

Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and thedesired send time.

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

 A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)and the desired processing time

Page 334: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 334/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

 A:

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

 A:

2.3.2.9. Processing of Shipping Notifications/Confirmations

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you process shipping notifications with the R/3 System?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?

Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates andquantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods

(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - pleasedescribe.

 A:

Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery datevariances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?

 A:

Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Which

events should trigger a confirmation?

 A:

2.3.2.10. Transmission of Shipping Notifications

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department or person is to be informed of the shipping notifications?

 A:

2.3.3. Goods Receipt

2.3.3.1. Goods Receipt Processing with Reference

Page 335: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 335/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order

considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you orderin? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shippinginstructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Page 336: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 336/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the

inspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Q: 16) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

2.3.4. Warehouse/Stores

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have storage locations, which are not relevant for Warehouse Management ?

Page 337: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 337/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have warehouses with stock of different plants?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the structure of your warehouse!

 A:

Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan toconnect this system with the R/3 ?

 A:

Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?

 A:

Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?

 A:

Q: 7) Which system should generate the transport orders ?

 A:

Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacy

system? Explain or provide a design drawing.

 A:

2.3.4.1. Stock Placement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

Page 338: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 338/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or

remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Page 339: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 339/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order iscreated?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 340: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 340/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

2.3.4.2. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

2.3.4.3. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

2.3.4.4. Posting Change WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use transfer orders to implement transfer postings with respect toconsignment material?

 A:

Q: 2) Which movement types will you use for posting changes?

Page 341: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 341/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) What type of documentation (forms) is to be generated in the case of transferpostings?

 A:

Q: 4) Who is to be informed of a transfer posting? How is this person to be informed?

 A:

2.3.4.5. Return Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stockpurge?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you create action plans/tasks for this defective material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) onthe defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you have to inspect/re-inspect defective material found in your stockroom or on theproduction floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?

 A:

Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined thatthey are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.

 A:

2.3.4.6. WM Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create transfer requirements or transfer orders for consignment material?

 A:

Page 342: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 342/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Do you use storage-bin-to-storage-bin stock transfers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.3.5. Invoice Verification

2.3.5.1. Invoice Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Which invoice blocking reasons will you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice whenthe number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value forX.

 A:

Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due tovariances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.

Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantitydifference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) youtolerate without warning or error messages?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What isthe threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) withoutreference to a purchase order?

 A:

Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price andthe invoice price? How is this person to be notified?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you wish to block invoices randomly (stochastically) or only if a certain value isexceeded?

 A:

Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?le manager)

Explanation: E.g. buyer, accounts payable accountant.

 A:

Page 343: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 343/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

2.4. Internal Procurement

2.4.1. Purchase Requisition

2.4.1.1. Purchase Requisition Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for direct

consumption, external services? A:

Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or schedulingagreement (Outline Agreement Request)?

 A:

Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomesdemand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time perplant.

Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition forwidgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times perplant.

 A:

Q: 4) Will purchase requisitions generated via material/article requirements planning bemanually post-processed?

Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only takeeffect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changedagain after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Will you manually create purchase requisitions?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.4.1.2. Purchase Requisition Assignment

Questions:

Q: 1) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions assigned to a source ofsupply?

 A:

Q: 2) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions grouped together?

 A:

Page 344: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 344/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign thepurchase requisition?

 A:

Q: 4) Are purchase requisitions converted into requests for quotations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources ofsupply internal and/or external to your company?

 A:

2.4.1.3. Release Purchase Requisition

Questions:

Q: 1) Should requisitions be subject to approval by someone (or possibly several people)before the requisition can be processed into an RFQ and/or purchase order?a

Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasingdepartment manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the departmentmanager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under whatcircumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -for external services

 A:

Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?

 A:

Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?

 A:2.4.2. Purchasing

2.4.2.1. Purchase Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How will purchase orders be created in your system?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefinedtolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchaserequisitions!

Page 345: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 345/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Specify the consumption categories for which you will procure external services andmaterial directly: Asset, cost center, production order, project, sales order, other (pleasespecify).

 A:

Q: 5) Which types of purchase order will you use?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you transmit purchase orders to your vendors?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used forstockkeeping purposes?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in thePO/and or used for stock putaway?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Is it necessary to track certificates of origin and/or customs reference numbers formaterials produced in foreign countries?

 A:

Q: 10) Will you be purchasing material imported from foreign vendors ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?

Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stock

transport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is nolonger read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records areread! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons forordering?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 346: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 346/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs. Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costsper piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items inpurchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasingdocuments?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or anotherconsumption category?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individualmaterials/material types.

 A:

Q: 18) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would youever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveriesexpected? Please list the values for each material/material group.

Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the valuestayed below, it will be an under delivery

 A:

Q: 19) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material ispurchased, etc)? o

 A:

Q: 20) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Isvendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when thegoods are received ?

Explanation: e.g., full compliance, ignored instructions, ...

 A:

Q: 21) Is it to be possible for purchase orders to be generated automatically following agoods receipt? Specify the criteria for this.

Page 347: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 347/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.

 A:

2.4.2.2. Release of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) Are purchase documents to be approved by someone before being issued tovendors? Describe the approval procedure....

Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by thepurchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved bythe President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approvalprocess applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.

Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for releaseprocedure

 A:

Q: 3) Will you use an electronic signature to release purchasing documents?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

2.4.2.3. Transmission of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) How do your vendors transmit shipping notifications?

 A:

Q: 2) What information does the shipping notification contain?

 A:

Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notificationhave been received?

 A:

Q: 5) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Page 348: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 348/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

Q: 6) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)on your order form?

 A:

Q: 8) How are purchase orders to be transmitted?

 A:2.4.2.4. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule

Questions:

Q: 1) Are scheduling agreement delivery schedules/SA releases created in R/3 manually,with reference to requisitions and/or automatically? (Further details in sourcing administrationscenario.)

 A:

Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases with

respect to the quantities delivered?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreementreleases via the Internet?

Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace isinstalled in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In therelease creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internetrelease.

 A:

2.4.2.5. Transmission of Scheduling Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you wish to transmit scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Page 349: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 349/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

2.4.2.6. Delivery and Acknowledgment Expediter

Questions:

Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendorsurging delivery of the overdue goods?

 A:

Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, pleaseexplain.

 A:

Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the due

date is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which kinds of purchasing document do you want to send to vendors? 1) Thecomplete purchasing document 2) Information re changes 3) Reminders (prior to due date 4)Urging letters/expediters (after due date) 5) Scheduling agreement delivery schedules.

Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, faxmessages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Change

notice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendoris changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urgingletters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shippingnotifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notificationnotification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging LetterRelated to Rolling Delivery schedules

 A:

Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overduedeliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?

 A:

Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?

 A:2.4.2.7. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoctype is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Page 350: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 350/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

 A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way youuse them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to addmore fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments refunction modules in R/3.

 A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

 A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

 A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, lookunder http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

 A:

Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and thedesired send time.

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

 A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)and the desired processing time

Page 351: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 351/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

 A:

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

 A:

2.4.2.8. Processing of Shipping Notifications/Confirmations

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you process shipping notifications with the R/3 System?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?

Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates andquantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - please

describe.

 A:

Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery datevariances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?

 A:

Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Whichevents should trigger a confirmation?

 A:

2.4.2.9. Transmission of Shipping Notifications

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department or person is to be informed of the shipping notifications?

 A:

2.4.3. Goods Receipt

2.4.3.1. Goods Receipt Processing

Page 352: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 352/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) The material stock balances shown in your legacy system are to be transferred to theR/3 System. Will the stocks be valuated at the prices specified in the R/3 e total value of theformer system be taken over?

 A:

Q: 2) If you do not use the R/3 Purchasing functionality, describe the process of receivinggoods from a vendor.

 A:

Q: 3) If you do not use production orders of the R/3 System, describe the process ofreceiving goods from production.

 A:

Q: 4) Should the person who posts a goods receipt be able to use a different account

assignment than the one specified via the automatic account determination process?

 A:

2.4.3.2. Goods Receipt Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

Page 353: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 353/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you orderin? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shippinginstructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note on

design of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the

inspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

Page 354: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 354/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Q: 16) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

2.4.4. Warehouse/Stores

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have storage locations, which are not relevant for Warehouse Management ?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have warehouses with stock of different plants?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the structure of your warehouse!

 A:

Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan toconnect this system with the R/3 ?

 A:

Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?

 A:

Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?

 A:

Q: 7) Which system should generate the transport orders ?

 A:

Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacy

system? Explain or provide a design drawing.

Page 355: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 355/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

2.4.4.1. Stock Placement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Page 356: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 356/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage orremain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order iscreated?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

Page 357: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 357/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

2.4.4.2. Posting Change WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use transfer orders to implement transfer postings with respect toconsignment material?

 A:

Q: 2) Which movement types will you use for posting changes?

 A:

Q: 3) What type of documentation (forms) is to be generated in the case of transferpostings?

 A:

Q: 4) Who is to be informed of a transfer posting? How is this person to be informed?

 A:

2.4.4.3. Difference Processing During Stock Placement

Questions:

Page 358: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 358/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

2.4.4.4. Confirmation of Stock Placement

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

2.4.4.5. Return Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stockpurge?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you create action plans/tasks for this defective material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) onthe defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you have to inspect/re-inspect defective material found in your stockroom or on theproduction floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?

 A:

Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined thatthey are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.

 A:

2.4.5. Invoice Verification

2.4.5.1. Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS)

Questions:

Page 359: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 359/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goodsreceipts?

 A:

Q: 2) Should a goods receipt with reference to a PO automatically generate an invoice forthe delivery?

 A:

2.4.5.2. Invoice Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event ofvariances?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you notify your vendors of the reduction?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you carry out invoice verification in the background?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have vendors who create one invoice for a delivery period?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you receive mixed invoices (credit and debit items in the same document)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Name the types of tax that might appear on a vendor's invoice.

 A:

Q: 7) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore be

automatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.

 A:

Q: 8) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together undercertain circumstances?

 A:

Q: 9) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passedQM inspection before being paid ?

Page 360: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 360/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 10) How do you treat unplanned delivery costs included in an invoice ?

Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchaseorder at the time of invoice verification?

 A:

Q: 12) Should down payments also be cleared?

 A:

Q: 13) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within yourorganization with respect to the invoice receipt?

Explanation: For example, a payment advice note

 A:

Q: 14) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do youallow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?

 A:

Q: 15) Is the automatic account determination process only defined by Financial Accounting? If not, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase orderprice?

Explanation: "Mail to Purchasing" possible after posting invoice.

 A:

Q: 17) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations suchas future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.

Explanation: Only relevant to USA and Brazil.

Page 361: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 361/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 19) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking isnecessary?

Explanation: Check whether it is possible to switch to ERS.

 A:

Q: 20) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in thesystem?

 A:

2.4.5.3. Invoice Overview

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for processing incorrect invoices in your firm?

 A:

Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verificationin the case of errors.

Explanation: Organizational and system-supported communication (e.g. by mail from withinthe application). There is no standard SAP solution for system-supported communication.Instead, a customer-specific solution has to be prepared (e.g. workflow, message technique).

 A:

2.4.5.4. Invoice Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Which invoice blocking reasons will you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice whenthe number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value forX.

 A:

Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due tovariances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.

Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantitydifference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) youtolerate without warning or error messages?

 A:

Page 362: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 362/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What isthe threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) withoutreference to a purchase order?

 A:

Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price andthe invoice price? How is this person to be notified?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you wish to block invoices randomly (stochastically) or only if a certain value isexceeded?

 A:

Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?le manager)

Explanation: E.g. buyer, accounts payable accountant.

 A:

2.4.5.5. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoctype is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

 A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way youuse them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to addmore fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments refunction modules in R/3.

 A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

Page 363: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 363/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

 A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, lookunder http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

 A:

Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and thedesired send time.

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

 A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)and the desired processing time

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

 A:

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

 A:

2.5. Pipeline Processing

2.5.1. Pipeline Withdrawal

2.5.1.1. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what information

do they contain?

Page 364: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 364/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

2.5.2. Invoice Verification

2.5.2.1. Invoice Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Which invoice blocking reasons will you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice whenthe number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value forX.

 A:

Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due tovariances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.

Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantitydifference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) youtolerate without warning or error messages?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What isthe threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) withoutreference to a purchase order?

 A:

Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price andthe invoice price? How is this person to be notified?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you wish to block invoices randomly (stochastically) or only if a certain value is

exceeded?

 A:

Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?le manager)

Explanation: E.g. buyer, accounts payable accountant.

 A:

Page 365: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 365/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

2.6. Source Administration

2.6.1. RFQ/Quotation

2.6.1.1. Processing of Requests for Quotations

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you generally request several vendors to submit prices, terms and conditions in

the form of a tender/bid/quotation? A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you want to assign a collective number to the different quotations submitted byseveral vendors?

Explanation: Use of collective number. Use of collective number.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Can an article be procured from several vendors? If so, is this the rule or anexception? (Or specify percentage.)

 A:

Q: 4) Do you carry out requirements planning for structured articles (e.g. prepack, display)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) How do you determine the requirement quantities at header level in the case ofstructured articles?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you exclude articles from requirements planning? If so, which (e.g. import,seasonal, promotion, etc.)?

 A:

2.6.1.2. Release of RFQs

Questions:

Q: 1) Are purchase documents to be approved by someone before being issued tovendors? Describe the approval procedure....

Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by thepurchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved bythe President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approvalprocess applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

Page 366: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 366/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.

Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for releaseprocedure

 A:

Q: 3) Will you use an electronic signature to release purchasing documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) In automatic load-building, are (promotion) purchase orders to be consolidated inaddition to requisitions?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.6.1.3. Transmission of RFQs

Questions:

Q: 1) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 2) Will you send rejection letters to unsuccessful bidders? Indicate how such letters are

to be transmitted to the vendor.

 A:2.6.1.4. Vendor Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to have the system automatically analyze/evaluate quotations submittedby vendors?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you receive the quotations?

 A:

Q: 3) Are the quotations submitted by vendors to be automatically compared by thesystem?

Explanation: Use of price comparison list! Use of price comparison list!

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.6.1.5. Transmission of Rejections

Page 367: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 367/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 2) Will you send rejection letters to unsuccessful bidders? Indicate how such letters areto be transmitted to the vendor.

 A:2.6.2. Outline Purchase Agreements

2.6.2.1. Contract Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use contracts in R/3? If so, what will you use contracts for (e.g. stockmaterials, consumable materials, external services)?

 A:

Q: 2) Which types of contract do you need (e.g. value contracts, quantity contracts)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are the contracts to be valid for: - more than one plant - more than one companycode?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you also allow a consumption account in the case of contracts for stock materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.6.2.2. Scheduling Agreement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use scheduling agreements to procure materials from external suppliers orsupplying plants? If so, which types of scheduling agreement will you use? Should thesescheduling agreements be maintained centrally?

Explanation: Will you maintain scheduling agreements in SAP with either an external vendoror a plant supplying the materials? If yes, - what type of scheduling agreements are youmaintaining? (for example, standard, subcontracting, consignment, stock transfer. - will any ofthese scheduling agreements reference a centrally maintained contract?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to reconcile the quantity requested and the quantity actually deliveredwith your vendor (monitoring function)? If so, how are the lines of the scheduling agreementdelivery schedule generated: manually or via materials planning (MRP)? M

Page 368: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 368/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Do you need release documents (e.g., call-offs) and master conditions to manageyour scheduling lines? If yes, are any of these JIT delivery schedules?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreementreleases via the Internet?

Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace isinstalled in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In therelease creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internetrelease.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you sometimes assign a consumption category to scheduling agreements for stock

materials?

 A:

2.6.2.3. Release of Outline Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) Are purchase documents to be approved by someone before being issued tovendors? Describe the approval procedure....

Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the

purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved bythe President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approvalprocess applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.

Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for releaseprocedure

 A:

Q: 3) Will you use an electronic signature to release purchasing documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

2.6.2.4. Transmission of Contracts

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Page 369: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 369/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

Q: 2) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)on your order form?

 A:

Q: 4) How will you transmit your contract release orders?

Explanation: Background: Setting up of message determination. E.g. notification by fax, EDI,... fax, EDI, ...

 A:

Q: 5) How do you wish to transmit your contracts to your vendors?

Explanation: Background: Setting up the message determination process.

 A:

2.6.2.5. Transmission of Scheduling Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you wish to transmit scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

2.7. Return Deliveries

2.7.1. Quality Notification

2.7.1.1. Creation of a Quality Notification

Questions:

Q: 1) In your company, who is responsible for the receipt or creation of quality notifications?

Explanation: Call center organizational unit etc.?

Page 370: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 370/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want a simplified view of the structure and functions of a notification tofacilitate ease of use for occasional users?

Explanation: Create simplified notification type for transaction IQS21.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to create notifications using copy models?

Explanation: Customizing: Define initial screens for notifications.

 A:

Q: 4) How do you prioritize incoming notifications (complaints, queries and so on)?

Explanation: For example: "Very high", "high" etc.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you define specific periods of time for processing notifications?

Explanation: Processing period for specific notification priorities.

 A:

Q: 6) List the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information yourequire when creating the notification. Add other business partners, if necessary.

Explanation: Partner definition.

 A:

Q: 7) How do you describe the problem? Do you use a verbal description or standardcodes?

Explanation: Coding: Definiton of catalog profile

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to attach electronic documents (for example, inspection reports) to thenotification?

Explanation: Linking of quality notifications to the Document Management System.

 A:

Page 371: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 371/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Do you assign a responsible person to each task?

Explanation: Note: An incorrect assignment is usually the result of a problem with thedocumentation.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you have ad-hoc tasks that you always carry out for different notification types orpriorities? If so, describe these tasks.

Explanation: Definiton of response profiles.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want the person or coordinator responsible for a task to be notifiedautomatically by the system?

Explanation: User-based workflow definition or definition using HR reporting structure.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you want newly created notifications to be subject to an additional approvalprocedure?

Explanation: Set the "approval required" indicator for the required notification type (IMGactivity: OLQN_CL). An additional notification status "Submit for approval" will be created. be

created.

 A:

Q: 13) How do you want to structure the layout of your notification with regard to theproblem description, execution, items, tasks, activities?

Explanation: Note: This applies to all notification types (Q1,Q2,Q3 etc.).

 A:

Q: 14) Do you record costs arising from complaints? Describe how you record these.

Explanation: Costs, for example, for wages, material, telephone costs, travel expenses etc.

 A:

Q: 15) Do you want to create and activate the QM order, based on the notification? Whereare these costs to be settled?

 A:

Page 372: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 372/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) How many notifications do you receive each day or each year?

Explanation: Defining number ranges for notifications.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in astandardized way (for example, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possiblesolutions for a problem?

Explanation: Coding of tasks, items and activities.

 A:

Q: 18) How is a quality notification processed in your company? Describe the process forexternal or internal notifications.

Explanation: Designing action box with sequential processing.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you allow your customers to create complaints in your system using the Internet?

 A:

2.7.2. Outbound Shipments

2.7.2.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Page 373: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 373/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Page 374: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 374/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

2.7.2.2. Freight Cost Invoicing and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

2.7.2.3. Message Transmission for Transport Documents

Questions:

Page 375: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 375/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:2.7.3. Warehouse

2.7.3.1. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 2) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 4) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

2.7.3.2. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

2.7.3.3. Confirmation

Questions:

Page 376: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 376/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

2.7.4. Shipping

2.7.4.1. Message Transmission for Deliveries

Questions:

Q: 1) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 2) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 3) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

2.7.4.2. Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use the SAP Warehouse Management component?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Which type of warehouse management do you use?

Page 377: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 377/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Customizing: LE shipping picking lean WM control for assignment ofplant/storage location/warehouse number plant/storage location/warehouse number

 A:

Q: 3) Do you use Lean WM for picking?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Is the picking process handled via an external system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which activities do you carry out during the picking process?

Explanation: Description of process steps

 A:

Q: 6) Do you carry out picking on an article or recipient basis?

Explanation: Two-step picking

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have material that:

 A:

Q: 8) Do you confirm your picking process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) How will the relevant picker be assigned to a pick order?

 A:

Q: 11) Will target times for picking be recorded?

 A:

Q: 12) How are picking staff assigned to individual pick orders?

 A:

Page 378: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 378/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Do you use software from another vendor to handle this process? If so, how is theprocess carried out?

Explanation: Linkage of external systems

 A:

Q: 14) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehousecontrol unit, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by theplant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your pickinglocation?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you group together deliveries for which picking is to take place over a certain timeinterval?

Explanation: Wave pick

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 17) How do you plan the picking sequence of the individual deliveries?

Explanation: User exit for delivery sorting within a wave pick User exit for delivery sortingwithin a wave pick

 A:

Q: 18) Which documents are used for picking and what information do they contain(planned time, transport equipment to be used, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 19) How do you optimize picking (split according to specific criteria)?

Explanation: Determination of TO split by volume, time, weight Determination of TO split byvolume, time, weight Determination of TO split by volume, time, weight

 A:

Q: 20) How are the picking results confirmed?

Page 379: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 379/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Steps in process

 A:

Q: 21) In how many steps are the goods grouped?

 A:

Q: 22) Are target times for picking determined?

Explanation: Control of ACTUAL-PLAN data at time of picking Customizing: LE warehousemanagement events shipments determination plan data plan data

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) Is payment of pickers performance-related?

 A:

2.7.4.3. Packing Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your packing process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Would you require a packing proposal in sales documents?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you have specific packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining packaging materials as articles

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you need to be able to pack certain articles in certain packaging materials only?

Explanation: Control of assignment of articles and shipping material

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in otherunits?

Page 380: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 380/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Control of functionality using relevant assignment of article group shippingmaterial in article master.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you require detailed information on the type and number of the packing materialsto be used for picking? If so, which algorithms do you use to determine this information?

Explanation: Can the rough workload estimate be used, in order to create the relevantinformation?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you want to pack items of a delivery in such a way that you know which and howmany articles are in each shipping material (for example, wire basket or roll container)?

Explanation: Control whether integrated packaging can be used in the area of delivery

processing.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you require packing documents (packing list) and what information do thesecontain?

 A:

Q: 9) Are you currently using any external software for packing?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,several packages into one container?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) What packing materials do you use?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining capacity limit for articles.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transactionon the packing station for the R/3 System?

Page 381: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 381/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

2.7.4.4. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 2) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 3) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 4) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what informationdo they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

3. Production3.1. Discrete Production

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require tools based on individual lots and orders for processing yourproduction plans?

Page 382: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 382/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

3.1.1. Production Order Creation

3.1.1.1. Conversion of Planned Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Which procurement objects do you want to be created during the conversion?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you want the planned orders to be converted?

 A:

Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?

 A:

3.1.1.2. Creating/Processing Production Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require different order types in order to, for example, control the automaticselection of routings in various ways, predefine costing data in various ways or specifystrategies for batch determination?

 A:

Q: 2) On creating a production order various different master data can be transferred.Which criteria do you take into consideration in the selection (for example, validity, lot sizerange)?

 A:

Q: 3) Is it necessary to manually change or complete certain data from the order?

 A:

Q: 4) To determine the production dates and capacity requirements of the operations withinan order, you must schedule the order. Which types of scheduling do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you require capacity availability check during order creation?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you require material availability check during order creation? Should this check becarried out for individual or for all components of an order?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have operations that are processed externally, that is to say not carried out inyour own company but given to a vendor who does the work in his own workshops (e.g. with

subcontracting processes or capacity bottlenecks)?

Page 383: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 383/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) Do you require collective orders in order to carry out functions simultaneously for a setof orders (for example, release, schedule, quantity chage, backflush, calculations)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you create and release in one step?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you ever need to split an existing production order on which work has alreadystarted into two separate production orders?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want to integrate documents from the Document Management System

(DMS) into the production order?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you want to use simulation orders, for example, to see what effect changes tooriginal data (sales order, master data) have on a production order?

 A:

3.1.1.3. Release of Production Order

Questions:

Q: 1) With which procedure do you want to release production orders?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you release complete orders or single operations?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require material availability check during order release?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you require capacity availability check during order creation?

 A:

Q: 5) It is possible to trigger certain functions automatically after the order release (forexample, creation of transport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders,creation of serial numbers). Do you want to make use of this?

 A:

3.1.1.4. Printout of Production Order

Page 384: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 384/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print production documents (e.g. operation control ticket, job ticket, pull list,confirmation slip, time ticket)?

 A:

Q: 2) What kind of documents do you need?

 A:3.1.2. Material Staging

3.1.2.1. Processing the Pull List

Questions:

Q: 1) Are your production storage locations separate from the central warehouses?

 A:

Q: 2) Is material consumed constantly (KANBAN replenishment) or is consumption irregular(pull list)?

 A:

Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies will you use in the pull list?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you want to print the pull list?

 A:

3.1.2.2. Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use picking lists with which you can determine and execute all withdrawals stillto be executed for a production order?

 A:

3.1.2.3. One-Step Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available atthe receiving plant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

3.1.2.4. Two-Step Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transport goods receipts to more than one physical storage facility?

 A:

Page 385: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 385/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

3.1.2.5. Request WM Material Staging

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to issue stock material for production/process orders from just one orfrom several storage locations?

 A:

Q: 2) Will the material provision occur from warehouse management (control cyclerecords)?

 A:

3.1.2.6. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several

different strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Page 386: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 386/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

3.1.2.7. Confirmation of Removal f. Storage

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

3.1.3. Capacity Requirements Planning

3.1.3.1. Capacity Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Which order type do you want to use for capacity evaluation?

 A:3.1.3.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to assign available capacities to order operations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Which type of planning table do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 3) Which planning strategies will you use for Sequencing?

 A:3.1.4. Production Order Execution

3.1.4.1. Goods Issue Processing for Production Orders

Questions:

Page 387: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 387/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you want to enter the withdrawal of material components for your order manuallyor post it automatically on the order confirmation (backflush)?

 A:

Q: 2) It is possible to withdraw to an order those materials which are not listed ascomponents in the order. Are such unplanned withdrawals possible?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Can planned goods issue quantities differ from the actual quantities? What thenhappens with the material reservation?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any components in your company that require batch handling? Is batchdetermination used?

 A:

Q: 5) Which mechanism is used to activate a goods issue (for example, a pull list)?

 A:

Q: 6) When is the withdrawal posted to an order?

 A:

3.1.4.2. Production Order Execution

Questions:

Q: 1) What are the organizational aspects when executing production (responsibilities,scope of work, starting and finishing points)?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there any restrictions in the order execution process?

 A:

Q: 3) When and how are operations/orders confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) When are goods issues and goods receipts processed?

 A:

3.1.4.3. Backorder Processing

Questions:

Page 388: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 388/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How do you resolve missing parts situations?

 A:

Q: 3) Do backorders receive priority over normal deliveries (sales)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

3.1.4.4. Production Order Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) There are various ways of entering backflushes in an order. Which do you want touse?

 A:

Q: 2) Which data must be confirmed (quantities, dates, personnel data, scrap, etc)?

 A:

Q: 3) Should material withdrawals for a production order be automatically posted duringconfirmation (backflushing)?

 A:

Q: 4) Should goods issue be posted automatically to the storage location while backflushingan operation?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use plant data collection (PDC)?

 A:

Q: 6) Should the backflush be entered using a barcode scanner?

 A:

3.1.4.5. Processing of Goods Receipts from Production

Questions:

Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis à vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?

 A:

Page 389: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 389/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Is the "delivery completed" indicator to be set automatically?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock inquality inspection"?

 A:

Q: 5) Which mechanism do you use to trigger a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 6) When do you post the goods receipt in the case of an order?

 A:

Q: 7) Are batches to be created at the time of a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 8) Are serial numbers to be created in the case of a goods receipt?

 A:

3.1.4.6. Stock Placement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 390: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 390/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage orremain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order iscreated?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Page 391: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 391/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

3.1.4.7. Confirmation of Stock Placement

Page 392: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 392/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

3.1.5. Evaluation and Mass Processing3.1.5.1. Mass Processing: Production Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to use mass processing to execute certain production order functions?

 A:

3.1.5.2. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

3.2. Repetitive Manufacturing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require period and quantity-based tools for processing your production plans?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you produce the same product or a similar product over a longer period?

 A:

Q: 3) Do your products always flow through the machines and work centers in the samesequence?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use Repetitive Manufacturing as a make-to-stock tool, that is, with no directreference to the sales order?

 A:

Page 393: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 393/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you use Repetitive Manufacturing as an order-oriented production tool based onsales orders (valuated or unvaluated stock)?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you use repetitive manufacturing as production lot oriented production?

 A:

Q: 7) Will you require reporting points?

 A:

Q: 8) Will you want to post activities?

 A:

Q: 9) Which form of scheduling will you require?

 A:3.2.1. Processing of Master Production Schedule

3.2.1.1. Production Planning in the Planning Table

Questions:

Q: 1) Which type of scheduling do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 2) Which combination of the planning tools will you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How will you create run schedule quantities?

 A:

Q: 4) How will you assign the production version to the production line?

 A:

Q: 5) Are your products produced on several production lines? In the planning table, willyou want to monitor the capacity load over several production lines?

 A:

3.2.1.2. Sequencing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which process will you use for Sequencing?

 A:3.2.2. Material Staging

3.2.2.1. Processing the Pull List

Questions:

Page 394: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 394/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Are your production storage locations separate from the central warehouses?

 A:

Q: 2) Is material consumed constantly (KANBAN replenishment) or is consumption irregular(pull list)?

 A:

Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies will you use in the pull list?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you want to print the pull list?

 A:

3.2.2.2. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Page 395: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 395/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

3.2.2.3. Confirmation of Removal f. Storage

Questions:

Q: 1) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

3.2.3. Production Execution and Actual Data Creation

3.2.3.1. Production Execution (with Run Schedule Quantities)

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the organizational aspects of production, explain responsibilities, workscope, start and end points.

 A:

Q: 2) What are you going to do with the backlog?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to print the run schedule quantities?

 A:

3.2.3.2. REM Backflush

Page 396: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 396/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to confirm at the end of the production process (assembly confirmation)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you want to separate the backflush process, that is, split the backflush intoperformance critical and performance uncritical processes (separated backflush)?

 A:

3.2.3.3. Reprocessing Backflushed Items

Questions:

Q: 1) How will you handle the reprocessing of backflushed items (negative stocks orreprocessing records)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to create individual reprocessing records or cumulated reprocessingrecords?

 A:

3.2.4. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

3.2.4.1. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

3.3. Process ManufacturingQuestions:

Q: 1) Do you require a receipt- or a batch-managed production process?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have products that must meet high quality requirements and comply with legalrequirements (FDA, GMP) (Regulated Production)?

 A:

Page 397: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 397/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Are your products manufactured in a discontinuous process?

 A:

Q: 4) Are your products manufactured in a continuous process over a certain period oftime?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you need a process for filling or packaging your bulk material?

 A:

3.3.1. Process Order

3.3.1.1. Production Campaign Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require production campaigns in order to carry out more efficient setup andclean-out processes and to settle fixed costs to the orders more precisely?

 A:

3.3.1.2. Planned Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there any specific reasons to change planned orders manually?

 A:

3.3.1.3. Conversion of Planned Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Which procurement objects do you want to be created during the conversion?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you want the planned orders to be converted?

 A:

Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?

 A:

3.3.1.4. Process Order Creation and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How many process orders will you have per period (day, week, month)?

 A:

Q: 2) How long will be the typical lead times for process orders?

Page 398: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 398/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Which criteria will be taken into account during the selection of master data(production version)?

 A:

Q: 4) Which recipes are used (approved recipes or non-approved recipes)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have multiple outputs during one manufacturing process ? Are the materialsthat are produced in addition (co-products or by-products) cost-relevant?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you require different order types?p

Explanation: Different order types are required to, for example: - Control the automaticselection of the master recipe in different ways - Preassign data for costing in different ways -Specify different strategies for batch determination - Make sure that only approved recipesare used in production - Control the process data documentation

 A:

Q: 7) Will a material availability check be required as part of order creation?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you require capacity availability check during order creation?

 A:

Q: 9) Which scheduling type will be used?

 A:

Q: 10) Will individual operations of an order be processed externally?

 A:

Q: 11) Will the batch number for the material to be produced be assigned during ordercreation (automatically or manually)? Do you want the batch to be classified during automaticassignment?

 A:

Q: 12) Will you require a manually triggered batch determination for the components?

 A:

Page 399: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 399/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Do you want the creation and release of the order to take place in one step?

 A:

Q: 14) Which order data will you manually change or add?

 A:

Q: 15) Is it necessary to change approved recipes during order processing? Describe theapproval procedure.

 A:

Q: 16) Will you need special user statuses dependent on the order type?

 A:

Q: 17) Will you require material calculation?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you need a resource selection?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you want the release of an order to only be possible after successful resourceselection?

 A:

3.3.1.5. Release of Process Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you release process orders individually or collectively?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you release the complete order or a single operation?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require material availability check during order release?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you require capacity availability checking for order release?

 A:

Page 400: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 400/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you want the batch number to be assigned for the material to be produced duringorder release (automatically)? Do you want the batch to be classified during automaticassignment?

 A:

Q: 6) Will you need an automatic batch determination for the components?

 A:

Q: 7) Which functions should be automatically triggered after order release (e.g. creation oftransport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders)?

 A:

Q: 8) Should control recipes be created with the order release?

 A:

3.3.1.6. Process Order Print

Questions:

Q: 1) Which shop floor papers do you need?

 A:3.3.2. Capacity Requirements Planning

3.3.2.1. Capacity Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Which order type do you want to use for capacity evaluation?

 A:3.3.2.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to assign available capacities to order operations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Which type of planning table do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 3) Which planning strategies will you use for Sequencing?

 A:3.3.2.3. Process Flow Scheduler (PFS) - Capacity Planning and Optimization

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use the process Flow Scheduler (PFS)?

 A:

Page 401: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 401/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

3.3.3. Material Staging

3.3.3.1. One-Step Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available atthe receiving plant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

3.3.3.2. Two-Step Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transport goods receipts to more than one physical storage facility?

 A:

3.3.3.3. Request WM Material Staging

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to issue stock material for production/process orders from just one orfrom several storage locations?

 A:

Q: 2) Will the material provision occur from warehouse management (control cyclerecords)?

 A:

3.3.3.4. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

Page 402: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 402/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

3.3.3.5. Confirmation of Removal f. Storage

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

3.3.4. Process Order Execution

3.3.4.1. Goods Issue for Process Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want the goods issue to be processed using the PI sheet or with the goodsissue transaction?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want goods issue to take place manually or automatically (backflush)?

Page 403: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 403/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Are there any unplanned goods issues?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Can the planned goods issue quantities be different from the actual quantities? Whatwill then happen to the material reservation?

 A:

Q: 5) Will you use components that are batch managed? Will batch determination be used?

 A:

Q: 6) Are there any components for which batch determination can take placeautomatically?

 A:

Q: 7) Are there any components for which batch determination must be carried outmanually?

 A:

Q: 8) Which mechanism will be used to trigger a goods issue (for example, pull list)?

 A:

Q: 9) When will the goods issue be posted to an order?

 A:

Q: 10) Which process will be used to determine the current consumption dates?

 A:

3.3.4.2. Process Order Execution

Questions:

Q: 1) What are the organizational aspects when executing production (responsibilities,scope of work, starting and finishing points)?

 A:

Q: 2) When are goods issues and goods receipts processed?

 A:

Q: 3) When and how are operations/orders confirmed?

Page 404: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 404/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any restrictions in the order execution process?

 A:

3.3.4.3. Backorder Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How do you resolve missing parts situations?

 A:

Q: 3) Do backorders receive priority over normal deliveries (sales)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

3.3.4.4. Process Order Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want the confirmation to be carried out using the PI sheet or the backflushtransaction?

 A:

Q: 2) Which data do you have to confirm (quantities, dates, scrap, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you want the backflush to be entered?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you need a milestone confirmation?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want a withdrawal for components to be posted during the confirmation(backflush)?

 A:

Q: 6) Will you use a plant data collection (PDC)?

 A:

Page 405: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 405/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Do you want the confirmation be entered using a bar code scanner?

 A:

3.3.4.5. GR Processing from Production

Questions:

Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis à vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 3) Is the "delivery completed" indicator to be set automatically?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock in

quality inspection"?

 A:

Q: 5) Which mechanism do you use to trigger a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 6) When do you post the goods receipt in the case of an order?

 A:

Q: 7) Are batches to be created at the time of a goods receipt?

 A:3.3.5. Process Management

3.3.5.1. Control Recipe Creation

Questions:

Q: 1) Should control recipes be created with the order release?

 A:

Q: 2) Where will the control recipes be sent?

 A:

Q: 3) What will the security requirements be for signatures?

 A:3.3.5.2. Control Recipe Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) How will your control recipes be sent?

Page 406: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 406/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:3.3.5.3. PI Sheet Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which data do you want to display in the PI sheet (for example, control information,notes with additional information, references to documents, component information)?

 A:

Q: 2) Which data do you want to be entered in the PI sheet?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want calculations to be carried out in the PI sheet?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you calculate the yield of your production process?

 A:

Q: 5) How shall deviations from the planned values be treated (tolerances, follow-onactions, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 6) should batch determination be carried out in the PI sheet?

 A:

3.3.5.4. Processing Process Manufacturing Cockpit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you also want to use order-independent cockpits beside PI sheets?

Explanation: You can use cockpits to make available information and function calls that youneed over and over again at a central position.

 A:

3.3.5.5. Process Order Processing with Process Control System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which functions are fulfilled by your distributed control system ?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have a certified interface between the distributed control system and the SAPSystem?

 A:

Page 407: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 407/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Which data will be transferred between the SAP System and distributed controlsystem?

 A:

Q: 4) Which information will the process control system collect and perhaps filter?

 A:

Q: 5) Which data will the distributed control system return?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want this data to go into the process data documentation?

 A:

3.3.5.6. Create Process Message

Questions:

Q: 1) Will process messages ever have to be created manually (for example, duringmalfunctions, etc.)?

 A:

3.3.5.7. Process Message Processing and Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want deviations or unplanned events to be reported? Where shall this

information be sent (for example, message to mail user)?

 A:

Q: 2) How will the sending of the process message be triggered?

 A:

Q: 3) Which possible destination types are there?

 A:3.3.6. Process Data Documentation / Process Order Completion

3.3.6.1. Material Reconciliation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to analyze and verify the quantity of ingredients used at the end of theproduction process by comparing the material quantity that really entered the productionprocess with the planned material quantity?

 A:

3.3.6.2. Batch Record Archiving

Questions:

Page 408: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 408/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Will customer-specific documents be attached to the batch record?

 A:

3.3.6.3. Process Order Archiving / Deletion

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

3.3.7. Evaluation and Mass Processing

3.3.7.1. Mass Processing: Process Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to execute specific process order functions in mass processing?

 A:3.3.7.2. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

3.4. Production Supply with KANBAN

Questions:

Q: 1) Which type of KANBAN do you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have fixed control cycles, in which both the number of containers as well asthe container quantity are set and one procurement element is created for each emptied

container (classic KANBAN)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to use KANBAN integrated with material requirements planning? Are thematerials to be planned in the planning run and corresponding procurement proposalscreated, which provide a preview for the next consumption? Replenishment is, however,

Explanation: Do you want to use KANBAN integrated with material requirements planning? Are the materials to be planned in the planning run and corresponding procurementproposals created, which provide a preview for the next consumption? Replenishment is,

however, only triggered by the kanban signal. (Classic KANBAN with MRP)

Page 409: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 409/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want the quantities withdrawn to be entered directly into the system (manuallyor plant data collection) and do you want the system to automatically set the kanban toEMPTY when the kanban quantity is reached (KANBAN with quantity signal)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want kanbans to be generated only on concrete material requirements andthen deleted again after replenishment (event-driven KANBAN)?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to reproduce a "One-card KANBAN", with two containers in a controlcycle?

 A:

Q: 7) Would you like to use KANBAN cross-plant (possible for the replenishment strategystock transfer with stock transfer reservation and in-house production with productionorders)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings,regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and materialquantity per kanban)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to deliver a kanban directly to your customer via an SD schedulingagreement?

 A:

3.4.1. Trigger Replenishment Through Kanban Signal

3.4.1.1. Trigger Replenishment Through Kanban Signal

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

 A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, INPROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A:

Page 410: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 410/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

3.4.2. Replenishment In-House Production with Production Order

3.4.2.1. Production Order Release

Questions:

Q: 1) With which procedure do you want to release production orders?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you release complete orders or single operations?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you require material availability check during order release?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you require capacity availability check during order creation?

 A:

Q: 5) It is possible to trigger certain functions automatically after the order release (forexample, creation of transport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders,creation of serial numbers). Do you want to make use of this?

 A:

3.4.2.2. Printout of Production Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print production documents (e.g. operation control ticket, job ticket, pull list,confirmation slip, time ticket)?

 A:

Q: 2) What kind of documents do you need?

 A:3.4.2.3. Production Order Execution

Questions:

Q: 1) What are the organizational aspects when executing production (responsibilities,scope of work, starting and finishing points)?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there any restrictions in the order execution process?

 A:

Q: 3) When and how are operations/orders confirmed?

 A:

Page 411: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 411/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) When are goods issues and goods receipts processed?

 A:

3.4.2.4. Production Order Confirmation (no Link to Goods Receipt)

Questions:

Q: 1) There are various ways of entering backflushes in an order. Which do you want touse?

 A:

Q: 2) Which data must be confirmed (quantities, dates, personnel data, scrap, etc)?

 A:

Q: 3) Should material withdrawals for a production order be automatically posted duringconfirmation (backflushing)?

 A:

Q: 4) Should goods issue be posted automatically to the storage location while backflushingan operation?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use plant data collection (PDC)?

 A:

Q: 6) Should the backflush be entered using a barcode scanner?

 A:

3.4.2.5. Goods Receipt Processing (Kanban Set to FULL Automatically)

Questions:

Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis à vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 3) Is the "delivery completed" indicator to be set automatically?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock inquality inspection"?

 A:

Page 412: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 412/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Which mechanism do you use to trigger a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 6) When do you post the goods receipt in the case of an order?

 A:

Q: 7) Are batches to be created at the time of a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 8) Are serial numbers to be created in the case of a goods receipt?

 A:

3.4.2.6. Production Order Confirmation (Link to Goods Receipt)

Questions:

Q: 1) There are various ways of entering backflushes in an order. Which do you want touse?

 A:

Q: 2) Which data must be confirmed (quantities, dates, personnel data, scrap, etc)?

 A:

Q: 3) Should material withdrawals for a production order be automatically posted duringconfirmation (backflushing)?

 A:

Q: 4) Should goods issue be posted automatically to the storage location while backflushingan operation?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use plant data collection (PDC)?

 A:

Q: 6) Should the backflush be entered using a barcode scanner?

 A:

3.4.3. Replenishment In-House Production with Run Schedule Quantities

3.4.3.1. Production planning in the planning table

Questions:

Q: 1) Which type of scheduling do you want to use?

 A:

Page 413: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 413/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Which combination of the planning tools will you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How will you create run schedule quantities?

 A:

Q: 4) How will you assign the production version to the production line?

 A:

Q: 5) Are your products produced on several production lines? In the planning table, willyou want to monitor the capacity load over several production lines?

 A:

3.4.3.2. Production Execution (With Run Schedule Quantities)

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the organizational aspects of production, explain responsibilities, work

scope, start and end points.

 A:

Q: 2) What are you going to do with the backlog?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to print the run schedule quantities?

 A:

3.4.3.3. Backflush Kanban (Automatice GR, GI, Kanban Set to FULL)

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you deal with scrap?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you deal with returning excess components?

 A:

3.4.3.4. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic GR, GI and Backflush)

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

 A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, INPROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Page 414: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 414/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A:3.4.4. Replenishment In-House Production with Manual KANBAN

3.4.4.1. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic GR and GI)

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

 A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, INPROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A: 3.4.4.2. Backflush Kanban (Automatic GR and GI, Status Change Kanban)

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you deal with scrap?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you deal with returning excess components?

 A:

3.4.4.3. Goods Receipt Processing (Separate)

Questions:

Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis à vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 3) Is the "delivery completed" indicator to be set automatically?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock inquality inspection"?

 A:

Q: 5) Which mechanism do you use to trigger a goods receipt?

 A:

Page 415: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 415/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) When do you post the goods receipt in the case of an order?

 A:

Q: 7) Are batches to be created at the time of a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 8) Are serial numbers to be created in the case of a goods receipt?

 A:

3.4.5. Replenishment External Procurement with Standard PurchaseOrder/Source List

3.4.5.1. Transmission of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) How do your vendors transmit shipping notifications?

 A:

Q: 2) What information does the shipping notification contain?

 A:

Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notification

have been received? A:

Q: 5) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

Q: 6) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)on your order form?

 A:

Q: 8) Are purchase orders automatically created from GRs be transmitted to the vendor?

Page 416: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 416/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: In the standard system no message records are generated for purchase ordersthat are generated automatically from a goods receipt! However, this may be desired,especially for returns.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) How are purchase orders to be transmitted?

 A:3.4.5.2. Goods Receipt Processing (Central Delivery)

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Q: 3) To which stock do you post materials at the time of their receipt?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you post goods you receive to stock in quality inspection?

the goods wherever they should go as a result of the usage decision?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and whichinspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?

 A:

Q: 6) Against which reference documents do you effect a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 7) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 8) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?

 A:

Page 417: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 417/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 10) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 13) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit youorder in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 14) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shippinginstructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 17) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 18) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how thegoods are placed into storage).

Page 418: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 418/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Above all, interesting if R/3 WM is used.

 A:

Q: 19) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Q: 20) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after theinspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for directconsumption/usage?

 A:

Q: 22) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 23) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Q: 24) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

3.4.5.3. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Delivery to Supply Area)

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

 A:

Page 419: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 419/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, INPROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A:3.4.6. Replenishment External Procurement with Stock Transfer Orders

(Plnt to Plnt

3.4.6.1. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work

order?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you record materials ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in thesystem?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you record materials supplied by subcontractors?

 A:

Q: 7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the

system?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 8) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Page 420: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 420/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 10) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and whatinformation do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

3.4.6.2. Goods Receipt Processing (Receiving Plant)

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"

at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you orderin? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

Page 421: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 421/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shippinginstructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after theinspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Page 422: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 422/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

3.4.6.3. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic GR)

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

 A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN

PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A:3.4.7. Replenishment External Procurement with Scheduling Agreement

3.4.7.1. Transmit Scheduling Agreement Schedule Lines

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you wish to transmit scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

3.4.7.2. Goods Receipt Processing (Central Delivery)

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Page 423: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 423/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you orderin? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shippinginstructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note on

design of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 11) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Page 424: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 424/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after theinspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Q: 16) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

3.4.7.3. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Delivery to Supply Area)

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

 A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, INPROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A:3.4.8. Replenishment External Procurement with Summarized JIT Call

3.4.8.1. Status Change Kanban to FULL

Page 425: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 425/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

 A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, INPROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A:3.4.9. Replenishment Stock Transfer with Reservation

3.4.9.1. Transfer Posting w. Reference to Reservation (Aut. Status ChangeKanban)

Questions:

Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available atthe receiving plant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you carry out transfer postings without deliveries between sites in which postingsare immediately made to stock at the receiving site?

Explanation: Use of 301 Use of 301

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

3.4.9.2. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic Transfer Posting)

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

 A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, INPROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A:3.4.10. Replenisment Stock Transfer with Direct Transfer Posting

3.4.10.1. Status Change Kanban to FULL

Questions:

Q: 1) In which way would you like to change the kanban status?

Page 426: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 426/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, INPROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?

 A:

Q: 3) In which way would you like to print the kanban card?

 A:

4. Sales and Distribution

Questions:

Q: 1) Which departments/employees are responsible for the different sales processes inyour company? Describe in detail the exception handling for these processes.

 A:

4.1. Pre-Sales Handling

4.1.1. Sales Support (CAS)

4.1.1.1. Promotion Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you currently run mailing campaigns?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing? According to which criteria the address listshould be reworked (for example, sales volume, equipment number, credit limi t)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you send mailing campaigns with samples, advertising goods?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use internet mailing for complaints processing?

 A:4.1.1.2. Sales Activity Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you perform the following sales activities:

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing campaigns?

 A:

Page 427: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 427/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you track customer complaints in service management?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you record information on competitors or competitor products?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you track information on prospective customers?

 A:

4.1.2. Customer Inquiry

4.1.2.1. Customer Inquiry Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your inquiry process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Are alternative items required for inquiry processing and how do you handle them?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you allow inquiries for products still under development (text item)?

 A:

Q: 4) What texts are required in an inquiry?

 A:

4.2. Sales Order Processing (Standard)

4.2.1. Customer Outline Agreement

4.2.1.1. Quantity Contract Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What kind of contract do you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you negotiate contracts to use as a basis for sales orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?If so, then for what reasons?

 A:

Page 428: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 428/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, deliverytimes, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the samecontract?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you check available stock (availability check)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contractprices)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you adjust prices after a period of time?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you want to reprice for release orders (call-offs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Can you exceed these quantities in subsequent documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantitycontracts)?

 A:

Page 429: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 429/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 14) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? Ifso, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do youuse this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),service management)?

 A:

4.2.1.2. Value Contract Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What kind of contract do you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you negotiate contracts to use as a basis for sales orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?If so, then for what reasons?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, deliverytimes, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the samecontract?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you check available stock (availability check)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contractprices)?

 A:

Page 430: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 430/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Do you adjust prices after a period of time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you want to reprice for release orders (call-offs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Can you exceed these quantities in subsequent documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantitycontracts)?

 A:

Q: 14) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? Ifso, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do youuse this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),service management)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you determine which materials are permitted for value contracts (standardmaterial, product hierarchy, assortment)?

 A:

4.2.1.3. Processing Group Master Contracts

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you offer master contracts to which other contracts are linked?

 A:

4.2.1.4. Customer Scheduling Agreement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to schedule requested deliveries per item on various dates?

Page 431: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 431/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) How do you schedule the requested deliveries?

Explanation: Describe which time components you use, and what these depend on.Examples: loading time, packing time, transit time, transit lead time Time components candepend on the material, shipping point, and route.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you check available stock (availability check) for scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 4) Is the delivery schedule in your scheduling agreement for serial or replacementsparts?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use scheduling agreements with cumulative accounting? If so, describe indetail.

 A:

Q: 6) Which partners are involved in the process?

Explanation: Note: Possible partners in the standard R/3 system include the sold-to party,goods recipient, payer, billed-to party, freight forwarders, and external service providers.Decide which partners you want to use.

 A:

Q: 7) Are you using any EDI messages?

 A:

4.2.2. Sales Order

4.2.2.1. Customer Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your quotation process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What texts are required on a quotation?

 A:

Q: 3) Which information (for example, prices) is passed to subsequent documents?

 A:

Page 432: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 432/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, deliverytime, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you pass requirements to MRP for quotations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to assign order probabilities to quotations?

 A:

4.2.2.2. Sales Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,

specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types

(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Page 433: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 433/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery

date?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Page 434: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 434/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planningmaterials?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase thesematerials, or only for certain orders?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 22) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) Do you send replacement, additional or alternative materials free-of-charge?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you offer a set of products (Sales BOM)? Please describe the pricing andavailability processing in detail.

 A:

Q: 25) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 26) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 27) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Page 435: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 435/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 28) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Q: 29) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 30) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?

 A:

Q: 31) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 32) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 33) Do you handle customer-specific inventory?

 A:

Q: 34) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planningprocesses.

 A:

Q: 35) Do you want to personalize your sales order entry screens?

 A:

4.2.3. Risk/Credit Management

4.2.3.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Page 436: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 436/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.2.4. Backorder Processing

4.2.4.1. Backorder Processing

Page 437: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 437/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How do you resolve missing parts situations?

 A:

Q: 3) Do backorders receive priority over normal deliveries (sales)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.2.5. Shipping

4.2.5.1. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or

replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Page 438: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 438/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determined

automatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

Page 439: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 439/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).

You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

Page 440: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 440/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

4.2.5.2. Proof of Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there business transactions for which the invoice is only generated when thecustomer has confirmed the arrival of the delivery?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you often have deliveries for which the delivery quantity varies or is not knownexactly at the time of delivery?

 A:

4.2.5.3. Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use the SAP Warehouse Management component?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you use Lean WM for picking?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Is the picking process handled via an external system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which activities do you carry out during the picking process?

Explanation: Description of process steps

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have material that:

 A:

Q: 6) Do you confirm your picking process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 441: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 441/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse controlunit, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by theplant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your pickinglocation?

 A:

4.2.5.4. Packing Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your packing process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Would you require a packing proposal in sales documents?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in otherunits?

Explanation: Control of functionality using relevant assignment of article group shipping

material in article master.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Are you currently using any external software for packing?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,several packages into one container?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) What packing materials do you use?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining capacity limit for articles.

Page 442: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 442/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transactionon the packing station for the R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

4.2.5.5. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?

Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to bepicked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).

 A:

4.2.5.6. Goods Issue Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances would you cancel goods issue?

 A:

4.2.5.7. Creation of a Quality Certificate

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of certificate will you create for your customers?

Explanation: For example, certificate of analysis, inspection certificate

 A:

Q: 2) Describe the typical layout that you use for quality certificates.

 A:

Q: 3) Name the essential data for the certificate.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you create user-specific quality certificates (layout)? If yes, are there differences inthe layout and data contents? Give example copies.

 A:

Page 443: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 443/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Which texts and information should the certificates contain?

Explanation: For example, references to country norms or other comments

 A:

4.2.6. Warehouse Management

4.2.6.1. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Page 444: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 444/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

4.2.6.2. Confirmation of Removal f. Storage

Questions:

Q: 1) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

4.2.6.3. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods

receipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

4.2.7. Shipment

4.2.7.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

Page 445: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 445/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

4.2.7.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Page 446: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 446/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

4.2.8. Billing

4.2.8.1. Processing Billing Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Page 447: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 447/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

Page 448: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 448/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:4.2.8.2. Pro forma Invoice Processing

Questions:

Page 449: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 449/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

4.2.8.3. Invoice List Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for aspecified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?

 A:

4.2.8.4. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.2.9. Output

4.2.9.1. Output Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

Page 450: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 450/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.2.10. Information System

4.2.10.1. Evaluations: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.3. Sales Order Processing: Make/Assembly To Order4.3.1. Customer Outline Agreement

4.3.1.1. Quantity Contract Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What kind of contract do you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you negotiate contracts to use as a basis for sales orders?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 451: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 451/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?If so, then for what reasons?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, deliverytimes, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the samecontract?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you check available stock (availability check)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contractprices)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you adjust prices after a period of time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you want to reprice for release orders (call-offs)?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 11) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Can you exceed these quantities in subsequent documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 452: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 452/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantitycontracts)?

 A:

Q: 14) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? Ifso, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do youuse this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),service management)?

 A:

4.3.1.2. Value Contract Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What kind of contract do you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you negotiate contracts to use as a basis for sales orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?If so, then for what reasons?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, deliverytimes, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the samecontract?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you check available stock (availability check)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 453: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 453/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contractprices)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you adjust prices after a period of time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you want to reprice for release orders (call-offs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 12) Can you exceed these quantities in subsequent documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantitycontracts)?

 A:

Q: 14) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? Ifso, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do youuse this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),service management)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you determine which materials are permitted for value contracts (standardmaterial, product hierarchy, assortment)?

 A:

4.3.1.3. Processing Group Master Contracts

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you offer master contracts to which other contracts are linked?

 A:

Page 454: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 454/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

4.3.1.4. Customer Scheduling Agreement Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to schedule requested deliveries per item on various dates?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you schedule the requested deliveries?

Explanation: Describe which time components you use, and what these depend on.Examples: loading time, packing time, transit time, transit lead time Time components candepend on the material, shipping point, and route.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you check available stock (availability check) for scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 4) Is the delivery schedule in your scheduling agreement for serial or replacementsparts?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use scheduling agreements with cumulative accounting? If so, describe indetail.

 A:

Q: 6) Which partners are involved in the process?

Explanation: Note: Possible partners in the standard R/3 system include the sold-to party,goods recipient, payer, billed-to party, freight forwarders, and external service providers.Decide which partners you want to use.

 A:

Q: 7) Are you using any EDI messages?

 A:

4.3.2. Sales order

4.3.2.1. Customer Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your quotation process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What texts are required on a quotation?

Page 455: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 455/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Which information (for example, prices) is passed to subsequent documents?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, deliverytime, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you pass requirements to MRP for quotations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to assign order probabilities to quotations?

 A:

4.3.2.2. Sales Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,

document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 456: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 456/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.

The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Page 457: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 457/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planningmaterials?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you use a make-to-order production process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 20) Do you use an assemble-to-order production process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Do you use complex products that are manufactured in a large number of variants(for example, cars) that should be defined as one variant product (variant configuration)? Ifyes, please describe in detail (e.g. classification, pricing).

Explanation: Do you use complex products that are manufactured in a large number ofvariants (for example, cars) that should be defined as one variant product (variantconfiguration)? If yes, please describe in detail (e.g. classification, pricing, configurationprofile, inventory check of existing configurable material).

 A:

Q: 22) Do your sales orders directly generate planned/production orders?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you check availability for the components of the production orders?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase thesematerials, or only for certain orders?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Page 458: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 458/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 26) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 27) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 28) Do you send replacement, additional or alternative materials free-of-charge?

 A:

Q: 29) Do you offer a set of products (Sales BOM)? Please describe the pricing andavailability processing in detail.

 A:

Q: 30) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 31) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 32) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 33) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Q: 34) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for

the free good item)?

 A:

Q: 35) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?

 A:

Q: 36) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Page 459: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 459/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 37) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 38) Do you handle customer-specific inventory?

 A:

Q: 39) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planningprocesses.

 A:

Q: 40) Do you allow for partial reduction of the down payment?

 A:

4.3.2.3. Order BOM Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use the order browser to edit order BOMs at multi-levels?

 A:

4.3.3. Risk/Credit Management

4.3.3.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

Page 460: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 460/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded

(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.3.4. Costing4.3.4.1. Costing for Sales Document

Questions:

Q: 1) Are you planning to execute a complex make-to-order production, and do you want tocalculate with the construction?

Explanation: If so, you can calculate parts of the production structure using the order BOMcost estimate with the design, without having to know the entire production structure.

 A:

Page 461: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 461/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

4.3.5. Backorder Processing

4.3.5.1. Backorder Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 2) How do you resolve missing parts situations?

 A:

Q: 3) Do backorders receive priority over normal deliveries (sales)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.3.6. Shipping

4.3.6.1. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping

points you would like to overwrite the default with. A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Page 462: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 462/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading

list, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Page 463: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 463/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP

quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

Page 464: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 464/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

4.3.6.2. Proof of Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there business transactions for which the invoice is only generated when thecustomer has confirmed the arrival of the delivery?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you often have deliveries for which the delivery quantity varies or is not knownexactly at the time of delivery?

 A:

4.3.6.3. Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use the SAP Warehouse Management component?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you use Lean WM for picking?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Is the picking process handled via an external system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which activities do you carry out during the picking process?

Explanation: Description of process steps

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have material that:

 A:

Q: 6) Do you confirm your picking process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?

Page 465: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 465/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse controlunit, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by theplant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your pickinglocation?

 A:

4.3.6.4. Packing Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your packing process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Would you require a packing proposal in sales documents?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in otherunits?

Explanation: Control of functionality using relevant assignment of article group shippingmaterial in article master.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Are you currently using any external software for packing?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,several packages into one container?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) What packing materials do you use?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?

Page 466: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 466/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Maintaining capacity limit for articles.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transactionon the packing station for the R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

4.3.6.5. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?

Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to bepicked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).

 A:

4.3.6.6. Goods Issue Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances would you cancel goods issue?

 A:

4.3.6.7. Creation of a Quality Certificate

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of certificate will you create for your customers?

Explanation: For example, certificate of analysis, inspection certificate

 A:

Q: 2) Describe the typical layout that you use for quality certificates.

 A:

Q: 3) Name the essential data for the certificate.

 A:

Page 467: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 467/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you create user-specific quality certificates (layout)? If yes, are there differences inthe layout and data contents? Give example copies.

 A:

Q: 5) Which texts and information should the certificates contain?

Explanation: For example, references to country norms or other comments

 A:

4.3.7. Warehouse management

4.3.7.1. Stock removal processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Page 468: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 468/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

4.3.7.2. Difference processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

4.3.7.3. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Page 469: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 469/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

4.3.8. Transport

4.3.8.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Page 470: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 470/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

4.3.8.2. Shipment cost calculation and settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

4.3.9. Billing

4.3.9.1. Processing Billing Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or

delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Page 471: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 471/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that

invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between

delivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Page 472: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 472/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In

addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

Page 473: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 473/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:4.3.9.2. Pro forma invoice processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

4.3.9.3. Invoice List Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for aspecified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?

 A:

4.3.9.4. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.3.10. Output

4.3.10.1. Output Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Page 474: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 474/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.3.11. Information System

4.3.11.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Page 475: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 475/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.4. Cash Sales/Rush Order Handling

4.4.1. Sales Order4.4.1.1. Rush Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,

document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

Page 476: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 476/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be

copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planningmaterials?

Page 477: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 477/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase thesematerials, or only for certain orders?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 22) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) Do you send replacement, additional or alternative materials free-of-charge?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 25) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 26) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 27) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Q: 28) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 29) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?

Page 478: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 478/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 30) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 31) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 32) Do you handle customer-specific inventory?

 A:

Q: 33) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planningprocesses.

 A:

Q: 34) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as theorder (rush orders)?

 A:

Q: 35) Do you price differently for rush orders?

 A:

Q: 36) Should an availability check take place for rush orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.4.1.2. Cash Sales

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,

specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

Page 479: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 479/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 7) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 8) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are

included in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 12) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Page 480: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 480/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase thesematerials, or only for certain orders?

 A:

Q: 17) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 18) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you send replacement, additional or alternative materials free-of-charge?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 21) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Page 481: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 481/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 24) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 25) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?

 A:

Q: 26) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 27) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 28) Do you handle customer-specific inventory?

 A:

Q: 29) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planningprocesses.

 A:

Q: 30) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoicestraight away (cash order)?

 A:

Q: 31) Do you price differently for cash sales?

 A:

Q: 32) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if required

quantity is not found in warehouse)?

 A:

4.4.2. Risk/Credit Management

4.4.2.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Page 482: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 482/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

 A:

Page 483: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 483/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.4.3. Shipping

4.4.3.1. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

Page 484: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 484/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in the

delivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

Page 485: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 485/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should

it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

4.4.3.2. Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use the SAP Warehouse Management component?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 486: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 486/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Do you use Lean WM for picking?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Is the picking process handled via an external system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which activities do you carry out during the picking process?

Explanation: Description of process steps

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have material that:

 A:

Q: 6) Do you confirm your picking process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse controlunit, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by theplant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking

location?

 A:

4.4.3.3. Packing Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your packing process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Would you require a packing proposal in sales documents?

Page 487: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 487/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in otherunits?

Explanation: Control of functionality using relevant assignment of article group shippingmaterial in article master.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Are you currently using any external software for packing?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,several packages into one container?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) What packing materials do you use?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining capacity limit for articles.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transactionon the packing station for the R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

4.4.3.4. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a workorder?

Page 488: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 488/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) How do you record materials ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in thesystem?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you record materials supplied by subcontractors?

 A:

Q: 7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 8) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 9) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 10) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and whatinformation do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

Page 489: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 489/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

4.4.3.5. Goods Issue Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances would you cancel goods issue?

 A:

4.4.4. Billing

4.4.4.1. Processing Billing Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or

delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Page 490: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 490/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing

documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Page 491: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 491/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:4.4.4.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

4.4.4.3. Invoice List Processing

Page 492: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 492/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for aspecified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?

 A:

4.4.4.4. Billing document cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.4.5. Output

4.4.5.1. Output Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

Page 493: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 493/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.4.6. Information System4.4.6.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.5. Third-Party Order Processing

4.5.1. Sales Order

4.5.1.1. Customer Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your quotation process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What texts are required on a quotation?

 A:

Q: 3) Which information (for example, prices) is passed to subsequent documents?

 A:

Page 494: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 494/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, deliverytime, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you pass requirements to MRP for quotations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to assign order probabilities to quotations?

 A:

4.5.1.2. Third-party Sales Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,

specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types

(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Page 495: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 495/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery

date?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that

you want to print.

 A:

Q: 13) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,

what are they?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planningmaterials?

 A:

Page 496: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 496/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase thesematerials, or only for certain orders?

 A:

Q: 18) Does your vendor directly deliver to your customers?

 A:

Q: 19) Is this choice of selling goods material or order dependent?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 22) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 24) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 25) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 26) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?

 A:

Q: 27) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Page 497: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 497/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 28) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 29) Do you want to personalize your sales order entry screens?

 A:

4.5.2. Risk/Credit Management

4.5.2.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Page 498: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 498/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.5.3. Purchase Requisition

4.5.3.1. Purchase Requisition Assignment

Questions:

Q: 1) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions assigned to a source ofsupply?

 A:

Q: 2) On the basis of which criteria are purchase requisitions grouped together?

 A:

Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign thepurchase requisition?

 A:

Q: 4) Are purchase requisitions converted into requests for quotations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources ofsupply internal and/or external to your company?

 A:

4.5.3.2. Release Purchase Requisition

Page 499: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 499/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Should requisitions be subject to approval by someone (or possibly several people)before the requisition can be processed into an RFQ and/or purchase order?a

Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasingdepartment manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the departmentmanager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under whatcircumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -for external services

 A:

Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?

 A:

Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?

 A:4.5.3.3. Release Purchase Requisition

Questions:

Q: 1) Should requisitions be subject to approval by someone (or possibly several people)before the requisition can be processed into an RFQ and/or purchase order?a

Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing

department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the departmentmanager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under whatcircumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -for external services

 A:

Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?

 A:

Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?

 A:4.5.3.4. Release Purchase Requisition

Questions:

Q: 1) Should requisitions be subject to approval by someone (or possibly several people)before the requisition can be processed into an RFQ and/or purchase order?a

Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasingdepartment manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department

Page 500: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 500/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under whatcircumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -for external services

 A:

Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?

 A:

Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?

 A:4.5.4. Purchasing

4.5.4.1. Schedule Line (Schedule Agreement)

Questions:

Q: 1) Are scheduling agreement delivery schedules/SA releases created in R/3 manually,

with reference to requisitions and/or automatically? (Further details in sourcing administrationscenario.)

 A:

Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases withrespect to the quantities delivered?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreementreleases via the Internet?

Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace isinstalled in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In therelease creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internetrelease.

 A:

4.5.4.2. Release Order

Questions:

Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchaserequisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source AdministrationScenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

4.5.4.3. Purchase Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How will purchase orders be created in your system?

 A:

Page 501: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 501/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefinedtolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you transmit purchase orders to your vendors?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used forstockkeeping purposes?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in thePO/and or used for stock putaway?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Is it necessary to track certificates of origin and/or customs reference numbers formaterials produced in foreign countries?

 A:

Q: 7) Will you be purchasing material imported from foreign vendors ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons forordering?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs. Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costsper piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items inpurchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasingdocuments?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.

 A:

Page 502: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 502/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individualmaterials/material types.

 A:

Q: 13) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would youever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveriesexpected? Please list the values for each material/material group.

Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the valuestayed below, it will be an under delivery

 A:

Q: 14) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material ispurchased, etc)? o

 A:

Q: 15) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Isvendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when thegoods are received ?

Explanation: e.g., full compliance, ignored instructions, ...

 A:

4.5.4.4. Shipping Notification/Confirmation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you process shipping notifications with the R/3 System?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?

Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates and

quantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - pleasedescribe.

 A:

Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery datevariances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?

 A:

Page 503: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 503/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Whichevents should trigger a confirmation?

 A:

4.5.4.5. Transmission of Scheduling Agreements

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you wish to transmit scheduling agreements?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

4.5.4.6. Release of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) Are purchase documents to be approved by someone before being issued tovendors? Describe the approval procedure....

Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by thepurchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved bythe President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approvalprocess applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services

 A:

Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.

Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for releaseprocedure

 A:

Q: 3) Will you use an electronic signature to release purchasing documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.5.4.7. Transmission of Purchase Orders

Questions:

Q: 1) How do your vendors transmit shipping notifications?

 A:

Q: 2) What information does the shipping notification contain?

Page 504: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 504/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notificationhave been received?

 A:

Q: 5) Are there differences per vendor and/or site? If so, which?

Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and masterdata message determination

 A:

Q: 6) How will you transmit your purchasing documents to your vendors?

Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)on your order form?

 A:

Q: 8) How are purchase orders to be transmitted?

 A:4.5.4.8. Transmission of Shipping Notifications

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department or person is to be informed of the shipping notifications?

 A:

4.5.4.9. Delivery and Acknowledgment Expediter

Questions:

Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendorsurging delivery of the overdue goods?

 A:

Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, pleaseexplain.

 A:

Page 505: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 505/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the duedate is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which kinds of purchasing document do you want to send to vendors? 1) Thecomplete purchasing document 2) Information re changes 3) Reminders (prior to due date 4)Urging letters/expediters (after due date) 5) Scheduling agreement delivery schedules.

Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, faxmessages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Changenotice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendoris changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urgingletters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shippingnotifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notificationnotification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging LetterRelated to Rolling Delivery schedules

 A:

Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overduedeliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?

 A:

Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?

 A:4.5.5. Goods Receipt

4.5.5.1. Goods Receipt Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Q: 3) Will you post goods you receive to stock in quality inspection?the goods wherever they should go as a result of the usage decision?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and whichinspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?

Page 506: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 506/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Against which reference documents do you effect a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 7) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 9) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit youorder in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 13) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be

used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shippinginstructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Page 507: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 507/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 16) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 17) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how thegoods are placed into storage).

Explanation: Above all, interesting if R/3 WM is used.

 A:

Q: 18) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Q: 19) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after theinspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 20) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for directconsumption/usage?

 A:

Q: 21) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time

of goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 22) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Page 508: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 508/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 23) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

4.5.6. Invoice Verification

4.5.6.1. Invoice Processing with Reference

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event ofvariances?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you notify your vendors of the reduction?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you carry out invoice verification in the background?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have vendors who create one invoice for a delivery period?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you receive mixed invoices (credit and debit items in the same document)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Name the types of tax that might appear on a vendor's invoice.

 A:

Q: 7) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore beautomatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.

 A:

Q: 8) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together undercertain circumstances?

 A:

Q: 9) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passed

QM inspection before being paid ?

Page 509: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 509/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 10) How do you treat unplanned delivery costs included in an invoice ?

Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchaseorder at the time of invoice verification?

 A:

Q: 12) Should down payments also be cleared?

 A:

Q: 13) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within yourorganization with respect to the invoice receipt?

Explanation: For example, a payment advice note

 A:

Q: 14) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do youallow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?

 A:

Q: 15) Is the automatic account determination process only defined by Financial Accounting? If not, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase orderprice?

Explanation: "Mail to Purchasing" possible after posting invoice.

 A:

Q: 17) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations suchas future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.

Page 510: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 510/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Only relevant to USA and Brazil.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking isnecessary?

Explanation: Check whether it is possible to switch to ERS.

 A:

Q: 20) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in thesystem?

 A:

4.5.6.2. Inbound EDI Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoctype is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.

Explanation: Example: Customer 1 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - VDA4913Customer 2 - Shipping notification - DESADV01 - ANSIX12 856

 A:

Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?

Explanation: Examples: Customer forecast delivery schedules, vendor shipping notifications

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.

Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way youuse them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to addmore fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments refunction modules in R/3.

 A:

Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?

 A:

Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3and your subsystem?

Explanation: Example: tRFC or field port

Page 511: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 511/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) Has SAP certified your EDI subsystem?

Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, lookunder http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714

 A:

Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and thedesired send time.

Explanation: Example: time fixed as soon as document is created

 A:

Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)and the desired processing time

Explanation: Examples: immediately upon receipt, periodically...

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to use Work Flow to be notified of errors or warnings?

 A:

Q: 10) What type of reporting tools do you want to use?

Explanation: Example: Idoc lists, active monitoring

 A:

4.5.6.3. Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS)

Questions:

Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goodsreceipts?

 A:

Q: 2) Should a goods receipt with reference to a PO automatically generate an invoice forthe delivery?

 A:

4.5.6.4. Invoice Overview

Questions:

Page 512: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 512/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Who is responsible for processing incorrect invoices in your firm?

 A:

Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verificationin the case of errors.

Explanation: Organizational and system-supported communication (e.g. by mail from withinthe application). There is no standard SAP solution for system-supported communication.Instead, a customer-specific solution has to be prepared (e.g. workflow, message technique).

 A:

4.5.6.5. Invoice Release

Questions:

Q: 1) Which invoice blocking reasons will you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice whenthe number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value forX.

 A:

Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due tovariances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.

Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantitydifference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) youtolerate without warning or error messages?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What isthe threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) withoutreference to a purchase order?

 A:

Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price andthe invoice price? How is this person to be notified?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you wish to block invoices randomly (stochastically) or only if a certain value isexceeded?

 A:

Page 513: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 513/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?le manager)

Explanation: E.g. buyer, accounts payable accountant.

 A:

4.5.7. Billing4.5.7.1. Processing Billing Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Page 514: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 514/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary

adjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Page 515: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 515/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:4.5.7.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

4.5.7.3. Invoice List Processing

Questions:

Page 516: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 516/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for aspecified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?

 A:

Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?

 A:

4.5.7.4. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.5.8. Output

4.5.8.1. Output Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

Page 517: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 517/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.5.9. Information System

4.5.9.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.6. Consignment Processing

4.6.1. Sales Order

4.6.1.1. Consignment Fill-up

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Page 518: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 518/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

Page 519: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 519/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planningmaterials?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase thesematerials, or only for certain orders?

 A:

Q: 20) Does your vendor directly deliver to your customers?

 A:

Q: 21) Is this choice of selling goods material or order dependent?

 A:

Q: 22) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you allow customers to keep your material in stock while you retain ownership?

Page 520: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 520/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 24) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 25) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 26) Do you send replacement, additional or alternative materials free-of-charge?

 A:

Q: 27) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 28) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 29) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 30) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Q: 31) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 32) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?

 A:

Q: 33) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 34) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

Page 521: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 521/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 35) Do you handle customer-specific inventory?

 A:

Q: 36) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planningprocesses.

 A:

Q: 37) Do you want to personalize your sales order entry screens?

 A:

4.6.1.2. Consignment Issue

Questions:

Q: 1) What method will be used to determine when to bill the customer for consumedmaterial?

 A:

Q: 2) How are you be notified when your customer has sold the product?

 A:4.6.1.3. Consignment Pickup

Questions:

Q: 1) Are unused or unwanted materials returned to your location from a consignmentlocation (consignment pickup)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you let customers place material back into consignment stock after it has beenissued? (Consignment Return Delivery Processing)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) How do you issue empties/returnable packaging at your customer site?

 A:

4.6.2. Risk/Credit Management

4.6.2.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Page 522: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 522/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

Page 523: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 523/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.6.3. Backorder Processing

4.6.3.1. Backorder Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How do you resolve missing parts situations?

 A:

Q: 3) Do backorders receive priority over normal deliveries (sales)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.6.4. Shipping

4.6.4.1. Delivery for Consignment Fill-up

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Page 524: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 524/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods

receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Page 525: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 525/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that

you want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between

delivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Page 526: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 526/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

4.6.4.2. Delivery for Consignment Issue

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

Page 527: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 527/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Page 528: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 528/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

Page 529: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 529/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

4.6.4.3. Delivery for Consignment Pickup

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery

scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Page 530: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 530/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging

levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Page 531: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 531/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

4.6.4.4. Picking (Lean WM)

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use the SAP Warehouse Management component?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you use Lean WM for picking?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 532: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 532/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Is the picking process handled via an external system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which activities do you carry out during the picking process?

Explanation: Description of process steps

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have material that:

 A:

Q: 6) Do you confirm your picking process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse controlunit, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by theplant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your pickinglocation?

 A:

4.6.4.5. Packing Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your packing process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Would you require a packing proposal in sales documents?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in otherunits?

Page 533: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 533/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Control of functionality using relevant assignment of article group shippingmaterial in article master.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Are you currently using any external software for packing?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,several packages into one container?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) What packing materials do you use?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining capacity limit for articles.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transactionon the packing station for the R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

4.6.4.6. Goods Issue for Consignment Fill-Up

Questions:

Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?

Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to bepicked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).

 A:

4.6.4.7. Goods Issue for Consignment Issue

Questions:

Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?

Page 534: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 534/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to bepicked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).

 A:

4.6.4.8. Goods Receipt for Consignment Pick-Up

Questions:

Q: 1) Is a purchase order to be generated automatically as a reference document forinvoice verification in such cases?

Explanation: Automatic PO generation at the time of GR. Automatic PO generation at thetime of GR.

 A:

4.6.4.9. Goods Issue Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances would you cancel goods issue?

 A:

4.6.4.10. Creation of a Quality Certificate

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of certificate will you create for your customers?

Explanation: For example, certificate of analysis, inspection certificate

 A:

Q: 2) Describe the typical layout that you use for quality certificates.

 A:

Q: 3) Name the essential data for the certificate.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you create user-specific quality certificates (layout)? If yes, are there differences inthe layout and data contents? Give example copies.

 A:

Q: 5) Which texts and information should the certificates contain?

Explanation: For example, references to country norms or other comments

 A:

Page 535: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 535/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

4.6.5. Warehouse Management

4.6.5.1. Putaway Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Page 536: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 536/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage orremain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order iscreated?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

Page 537: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 537/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

4.6.5.2. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 538: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 538/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

4.6.5.3. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Page 539: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 539/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

4.6.5.4. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

4.6.6. Transport

4.6.6.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Page 540: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 540/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

4.6.6.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

4.6.7. Billing

4.6.7.1. Processing Billing Documents

Questions:

Page 541: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 541/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Page 542: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 542/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing

documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Page 543: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 543/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:4.6.7.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

4.6.7.3. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.6.8. Output

4.6.8.1. Output Transfer

Page 544: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 544/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.6.9. Information System

4.6.9.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Page 545: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 545/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.7. Intercompany Handling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you deliver products belonging to another subsidiary to customers?

 A:

Q: 2) What are the allowable relationships between the subsidiaries?

 A:

Q: 3) Are there internal costs charged between subsidiaries and how are they billed?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have to declare these internal costs to the authorities?

 A:

4.7.1. Sales Order

4.7.1.1. Sales Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Page 546: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 546/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Page 547: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 547/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planningmaterials?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase thesematerials, or only for certain orders?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 22) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) Do you send replacement, additional or alternative materials free-of-charge?

 A:

Page 548: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 548/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 24) Do you offer a set of products (Sales BOM)? Please describe the pricing andavailability processing in detail.

 A:

Q: 25) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 26) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 27) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 28) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Q: 29) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 30) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?

 A:

Q: 31) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 32) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 33) Do you handle customer-specific inventory?

 A:

Q: 34) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planningprocesses.

 A:

Page 549: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 549/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 35) Do you want to personalize your sales order entry screens?

 A:

4.7.2. Shipping

4.7.2.1. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Page 550: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 550/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Page 551: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 551/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between

delivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

4.7.2.2. Proof of Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Are there business transactions for which the invoice is only generated when thecustomer has confirmed the arrival of the delivery?

 A:

Page 552: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 552/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Do you often have deliveries for which the delivery quantity varies or is not knownexactly at the time of delivery?

 A:

4.7.2.3. Picking (Lean WM)

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use the SAP Warehouse Management component?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you use Lean WM for picking?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Is the picking process handled via an external system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Which activities do you carry out during the picking process?

Explanation: Description of process steps

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have material that:

 A:

Q: 6) Do you confirm your picking process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse controlunit, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by theplant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your pickinglocation?

Page 553: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 553/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

4.7.2.4. Packing Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your packing process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Would you require a packing proposal in sales documents?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in otherunits?

Explanation: Control of functionality using relevant assignment of article group shipping

material in article master.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Are you currently using any external software for packing?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,several packages into one container?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) What packing materials do you use?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining capacity limit for articles.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transactionon the packing station for the R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

Page 554: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 554/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

4.7.2.5. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?

Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to bepicked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).

 A:

4.7.3. Warehouse Management

4.7.3.1. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,

storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to

which location is the merchandise returned?

Page 555: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 555/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

4.7.3.2. Confirmation of Removal f. Storage

Questions:

Q: 1) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

4.7.3.3. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

4.7.4. Transport

4.7.4.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Page 556: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 556/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

4.7.4.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

Page 557: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 557/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

4.7.5. Billing4.7.5.1. Processing Billing Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

Page 558: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 558/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

Page 559: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 559/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

Page 560: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 560/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:4.7.5.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

4.7.5.3. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.7.6. Output

4.7.6.1. Output Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Page 561: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 561/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.7.7. Information System

4.7.7.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.8. Sending Samples and Advertising Materials

4.8.1. Sales Order

4.8.1.1. Sending Samples and Advertising Materials

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

Page 562: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 562/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery

date?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Page 563: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 563/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you send replacement, additional or alternative materials free-of-charge?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 21) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Page 564: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 564/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 24) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 25) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 26) Do you want to personalize your sales order entry screens?

 A:

4.8.2. Shipping

4.8.2.1. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or

replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Page 565: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 565/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determined

automatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

Page 566: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 566/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).

You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

Page 567: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 567/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

4.8.2.2. Picking (Lean WM)

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you use the SAP Warehouse Management component?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you use Lean WM for picking?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Is the picking process handled via an external system?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 4) Which activities do you carry out during the picking process?

Explanation: Description of process steps

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have material that:

 A:

Q: 6) Do you confirm your picking process?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse controlunit, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by theplant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your pickinglocation?

 A:

Page 568: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 568/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

4.8.2.3. Packing Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your packing process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Would you require a packing proposal in sales documents?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in otherunits?

Explanation: Control of functionality using relevant assignment of article group shippingmaterial in article master.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Are you currently using any external software for packing?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,several packages into one container?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 6) What packing materials do you use?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?

Explanation: Maintaining capacity limit for articles.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transactionon the packing station for the R/3 System?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

 A:

Page 569: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 569/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

4.8.2.4. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?

Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to bepicked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).

 A:

4.8.2.5. Goods Issue Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances would you cancel goods issue?

 A:

4.8.3. Transport

4.8.3.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Page 570: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 570/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

4.8.4. Billing

4.8.4.1. Billing Document for Free-of Charge Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Page 571: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 571/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do

you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Page 572: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 572/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:4.8.4.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing

Page 573: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 573/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

4.8.4.3. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.8.5. Output

4.8.5.1. Output Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

Page 574: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 574/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.8.6. Information System

4.8.6.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.9. Empties and Returnable Packaging Handling

4.9.1. Sales Order

4.9.1.1. Returnable Packaging Pickup

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Page 575: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 575/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 7) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 8) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 9) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like to

appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planningmaterials?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you let customers place material back into consignment stock after it has beenissued? (Consignment Return Delivery Processing)

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 576: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 576/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 14) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 15) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 19) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you handle customer-specific inventory?

 A:

Q: 21) How do you issue empties/returnable packaging at your customer site?

 A:

4.9.1.2. Returnable Packaging/ Empties Issue

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

Page 577: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 577/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 7) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 9) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 10) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Page 578: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 578/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 14) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 17) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want to personalize your sales order entry screens?

 A:

4.9.2. Shipping4.9.2.1. Delivery for Returnable Packaging Issue

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide

Page 579: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 579/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Page 580: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 580/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required

on output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the

rules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Page 581: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 581/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

4.9.2.2. Delivery for Returnable Packaging Pickup

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Page 582: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 582/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in the

delivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Page 583: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 583/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should

it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Page 584: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 584/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

4.9.2.3. Goods Issue from Returnable Packaging Stock

Questions:

Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?

Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to bepicked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).

 A:

4.9.2.4. Goods Receipt Processing for Returnables and Empties

Questions:

Q: 1) Is a purchase order to be generated automatically as a reference document forinvoice verification in such cases?

Explanation: Automatic PO generation at the time of GR. Automatic PO generation at thetime of GR.

 A:

4.9.2.5. Goods Issue Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances would you cancel goods issue?

 A:

4.9.3. Transport

4.9.3.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

Page 585: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 585/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

4.9.3.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Page 586: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 586/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

4.9.4. Billing

4.9.4.1. Billing Returnable Packaging

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between

delivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Page 587: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 587/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Page 588: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 588/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove

columns.

 A:

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:4.9.4.2. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.9.5. Output

4.9.5.1. Output Transfer

Page 589: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 589/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.9.6. Information System

4.9.6.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

Page 590: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 590/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.10. Complaints Processing

4.10.1. Complaints

4.10.1.1. Returns Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your returns processing in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) List the reasons for creating returns.

 A:

Q: 3) Do your returns need to go through an approval process? If so, describe yourapproval process in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) Are returns linked to previous documents (e.g. order, invoice)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you accept returns on all materials? If not, which materials can not be returnedand why?

 A:

Q: 6) To which type of stock will the product be placed on return (for example: inspection,unrestricted, quality, blocked)?

 A:

4.10.1.2. Processing Credit/Debit Memo Request

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? Ifso, describe it.

 A:

Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?

Page 591: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 591/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) What types of adjustments are made in memos?

 A:4.10.1.3. Invoice Correction Request

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? Ifso, describe it.

 A:

Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) What types of adjustments are made in memos?

 A:4.10.2. Shipping

4.10.2.1. Delivery for Returns

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Page 592: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 592/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Page 593: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 593/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

Page 594: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 594/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

4.10.2.2. Goods Receipt Processing for Returns

Questions:

Q: 1) Is a purchase order to be generated automatically as a reference document forinvoice verification in such cases?

Explanation: Automatic PO generation at the time of GR. Automatic PO generation at thetime of GR.

 A:

4.10.3. Warehouse Management

4.10.3.1. Stock Placement Processing of Returns

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

Page 595: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 595/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or

remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order iscreated?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

Page 596: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 596/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

4.10.3.2. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Page 597: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 597/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

4.10.3.3. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

4.10.4. Shipment

4.10.4.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Page 598: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 598/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

4.10.5. Billing

4.10.5.1. Credit Memo from Customer Complaint / Returns

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Page 599: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 599/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 600: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 600/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on

output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 19) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Page 601: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 601/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 22) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 23) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:4.10.5.2. Billing Document Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?

 A:

Q: 2) Do any activities follow cancellation, for example, credit releases?

 A:

4.10.6. Output

4.10.6.1. Output Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) What information do these documents contain?

Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debitmemos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.

 A:

Q: 3) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 4) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Page 602: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 602/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 7) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 8) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Q: 9) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 10) What correspondence do you wish to send?

 A:

Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.10.7. Information System

4.10.7.1. Evaluation: Logistics Information System

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

4.11. Rebate Processing

4.11.1. Rebate Agreements

4.11.1.1. Condition Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price withdiscounts, surcharges)?

 A:

Page 603: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 603/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you useand how is the calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and howis the calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole documentand which apply to the item level only?

 A:

Q: 6) Are manual changes to price conditions allowed in your enterprise?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you useand how is the calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how isthe calculation carried out?

 A:

Q: 9) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterpriseand allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structureswithin your customers' enterprises?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you document your price units?

 A:

Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external orinternal) in order to calculate a price?

 A:

Q: 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types?

Page 604: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 604/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 13) What date is the pricing based on?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)?

 A:

Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changingthe price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices.

 A:

Q: 16) Do you wish to pass on pricing information to CO-PA (Profitability Analysis)?

 A:

Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item orthe expected order value?

 A:

Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specifiedamount or on a percentage of the price per piece?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you use "interval scales" for price determination purposes?

 A:

Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and de-activate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulativevalues)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system tosearch the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or"lowest" price?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do your prices include sales tax?

 A:

Page 605: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 605/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? Forexample, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, andmusic system help determine the price to be charged.

 A:

Q: 24) Do you use an external tax package?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-orderproduction?

 A:

Q: 26) Describe all other combinations.

 A:

Q: 27) On which master data combinations do you base your pricing?

 A:

Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixedvalues)?

 A:

Q: 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes?

 A:

Q: 30) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase ofthe material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 31) Do all the variants of a generic article have different sales prices?

 A:

Q: 32) If so, do the sales prices of the generic article variants differ in only a few cases?

 A:

Q: 33) Does the sales price of a structured article (set, prepack, display) result from addingtogether the individual sales prices and including a markup, or is the sales price determinedusing a different calculation rule?

 A:

Page 606: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 606/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 34) Can conditions be created as copies of existing conditions?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 35) Ares sales conditions to be adopted from other systems or other R/3 systems (suchas the end consumer prices suggested by the manufacturer)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 36) If you work in the wholesale area: Do you wish to overwrite conditions determined insales or store orders stemming from master records with e.g. end consumer prices and usethem for subesequent documents?

Explanation: After log end documents = e.g. delivery note or invoice

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 37) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?

 A:

Q: 38) Do all the variants of a generic article have the same purchase prices (or can theyhave different purchase prices)?

 A:

4.11.2. Rebate Settlement

4.11.2.1. Credit Memo Request for Rebate Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? Ifso, describe it.

 A:

Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

4.11.2.2. Rebate / Commission Calculation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How often do you reimburse the customer for their rebates - weekly, monthly,quarterly or yearly?

 A:

Q: 2) How are reimbursements made?

Page 607: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 607/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Will you need to apply rebates to previous sales orders retroactively?

 A:

Q: 4) Describe how you approve credit memos.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you allow partial settlements for rebates? How do you handle them?

 A:

4.11.2.3. Rebate Credit Memo

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for

reviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Page 608: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 608/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

Page 609: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 609/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 18) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 21) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:

4.12. Foreign Trade Processing

4.12.1. Legal Control

4.12.1.1. Monitoring of Legal Control Regulations

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to check for the export license at delivery time, or when you create thesales order and the delivery?

Page 610: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 610/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Which license types (for example, individual export licenses) do you need in the legalcontrols that apply to you (for example, foreign trade law)?

 A:

Q: 3) Define the legal regulations you need for each country.

 A:

Q: 4) Is the export license specific to a certain destination country?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Is the export license specific to a certain customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Is the export license specific to a certain sales transaction type?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Is the export license specific to a certain type of product?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 8) Is the export license limited by a quantity amount?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Is the export license limited by a monetary amount?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.12.2. Declarations to the Authorities

4.12.2.1. Declarations to the Authorities

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for EU?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for Japan?

 A:

Page 611: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 611/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for NAFTA?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for Switzerland?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

4.12.3. Communication/Print

4.12.3.1. Output Transmission for Foreign Trade Documents

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 2) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

 A:

Q: 3) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

 A:

5. Inventory Management, Warehouse Managementand Transportation

Questions:

Q: 1) Who owns the inventory? To whom are the costs of managing the inventoryallocated?

 A:

Q: 2) At which level do you valuate material (for example, company level, plant level)?

 A:

Q: 3) Where do you want to be able to analyze the inventory balance sheet?

 A:

Q: 4) How does material move between plants?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you use pallet identification for production supply?

 A:

Page 612: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 612/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) Do you use picking and packaging functions with scanners (radio frequency)?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you prepare raw materials for a production order on a scale and do you have toensure that exactly this material combination is used in the order?

 A:

5.1. Goods Movements

5.1.1. Reservation

5.1.1.1. Reservation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific material reservations (for sales, for production) for yourstock materials?

 A:

Q: 2) How far in advance are materials to be allowed to be reserved?

 A:

Q: 3) In which cases would you want to use manual reservations?

 A:

Q: 4) How long after the reservation date are open reservations canceled?

 A:

5.1.2. Inbound Shipments

5.1.2.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Page 613: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 613/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Page 614: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 614/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 24) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

5.1.2.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Page 615: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 615/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

5.1.3. Outbound Shipments

5.1.3.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

Page 616: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 616/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

Page 617: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 617/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 24) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

5.1.3.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

5.1.4. Goods Accepted

5.1.4.1. Posting Change WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use transfer orders to implement transfer postings with respect to

consignment material?

 A:

Q: 2) Which movement types will you use for posting changes?

 A:

Q: 3) What type of documentation (forms) is to be generated in the case of transferpostings?

 A:

Page 618: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 618/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Who is to be informed of a transfer posting? How is this person to be informed?

 A:

5.1.4.2. Putaway Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Page 619: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 619/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage orremain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order iscreated?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Page 620: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 620/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

5.1.4.3. Return Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stockpurge?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you create action plans/tasks for this defective material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) onthe defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 621: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 621/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you have to inspect/re-inspect defective material found in your stockroom or on theproduction floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?

 A:

Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined thatthey are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.

 A:

5.1.4.4. Goods Receipt Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) The material stock balances shown in your legacy system are to be transferred to the

R/3 System. Will the stocks be valuated at the prices specified in the R/3 e total value of theformer system be taken over?

 A:

Q: 2) If you do not use the R/3 Purchasing functionality, describe the process of receivinggoods from a vendor.

 A:

Q: 3) If you do not use production orders of the R/3 System, describe the process of

receiving goods from production.

 A:

Q: 4) Should the person who posts a goods receipt be able to use a different accountassignment than the one specified via the automatic account determination process?

 A:

Q: 5) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

5.1.5. Stck Transfers / Trans. Pstngs

5.1.5.1. Two-Step Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transport goods receipts to more than one physical storage facility?

 A:

5.1.5.2. One-Step Stock Transfer

Page 622: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 622/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available atthe receiving plant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

5.1.5.3. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken

out of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

5.1.5.4. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

5.1.5.5. WM Stock Transfer

Page 623: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 623/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create transfer requirements or transfer orders for consignment material?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use storage-bin-to-storage-bin stock transfers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

5.1.6. Goods Issue

5.1.6.1. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

Page 624: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 624/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

5.1.6.2. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 2) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 3) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 4) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what informationdo they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

5.1.6.3. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Page 625: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 625/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are

removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

Page 626: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 626/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

5.2. Physical Inventory & Cycle Counting

5.2.1. Physical Inventory

5.2.1.1. Specification of Cycle Counting Phys. Inv.

Questions:

Q: 1) Which materials do you count in cycles?

 A:

Q: 2) Describe the cycle counting intervals. Specify plant, material, and interval.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the ABC indicators to be assigned? - based on material consumption/usage -

based on material requirements - manually - other, please describe. A:

5.2.1.2. Cycle Counting Phys. Inv. Preparation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you block the relevant stock during the physical inventory count?

Explanation: Setting of flag when creating physical inventory Setting of flag when creatingphysical inventory

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Do you conduct a physical inventory for:

 A:

Q: 3) Which types of physical inventory do you wish to use to count the materials in yourwarehouses/stores?

Explanation: Linkage via ALE may be necessary Linkage via ALE may be necessary

 A:5.2.1.3. Determination of Scope for Periodic and Continuous Inventory

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you block the relevant stock during the physical inventory count?

Explanation: Setting of flag when creating physical inventory Setting of flag when creatingphysical inventory

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Page 627: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 627/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Do you conduct a physical inventory for:

 A:

Q: 3) Which types of physical inventory do you wish to use to count the materials in yourwarehouses/stores?

Explanation: Linkage via ALE may be necessary Linkage via ALE may be necessary

 A:5.2.1.4. Definition of Scope of Periodic Inventory

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of physical inventory do you wish to use to count the materials in yourwarehouses/stores?

Explanation: Linkage via ALE may be necessary Linkage via ALE may be necessary

 A:5.2.1.5. Sample Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) For which assortment/material groups do you use the sample-based physicalinventory?

 A:

Q: 2) At what level do you analyze the results of inventory sampling (merchandise category,

layout, etc.)

 A:

Q: 3) Will you use random sample profiles when carrying out physical inventories ofmaterials?

 A:

5.2.1.6. Printout of Physical Inventory Document

Questions:

Q: 1) How are physical inventory documents to be printed out?

 A:

Q: 2) Are bar codes to be printed out on the physical inventory document?

 A:

5.2.1.7. Inventory Count

Questions:

Page 628: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 628/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) How do you carry out the physical inventory count (e.g. manually, using bar codescanners)?

 A:

5.2.1.8. Physical Inventory Analysis

Questions:

Q: 1) Are physical inventory differences aggregated at material group level?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you allow physical inventory tolerances? Specify these tolerances.

 A:

5.2.1.9. Post Inventory Differences

Questions:

Q: 1) Who is responsible for posting physical inventory differences? Specify the personsresponsible and the maximum differences allowed.

 A:

5.2.2. WM Inventory

5.2.2.1. Storage Type Block

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you block any storage types for the purposes of physical inventory? Name thestorage types that are to be blocked.

 A:

Q: 2) Choose the movement types you wish to block!

 A:5.2.2.2. Continuous Inventory WM

Questions:

Q: 1) What are the triggers for a continuous inventory?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you carry out a continuous inventory in your warehouses/stores via zero stockcheck?

 A:

5.2.2.3. Annual Inventory WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Are goods movements blocked in full or in part in your warehouses/warehouse areasfor the duration of the annual inventory?

Page 629: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 629/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Under what conditions are inventory entry and the stock placement process linked inyour warehouses/warehouse areas?

 A:

Q: 3) Which inventory method do you use during stock placement?

 A:

Q: 4) When do you conduct your annual physical inventory ?

 A:

5.2.2.4. Cycle Counting WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Should the cycle-counting procedure be supported in your warehouses/stores?

 A:

Q: 2) Which materials do you count in cycles?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the cycle counting intervals. Specify plant, material, and interval.

 A:

Q: 4) How is the ABC indicator to be assigned to the materials?

 A:5.2.2.5. Print Inventory List

Questions:

Q: 1) Which count procedure do you use for your branches to ensure that inventory data isrecorded in full?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you carry out your physical inventory count? (e.g. manually, using bar codescanners

 A:

Q: 3) How many document items (each quant and storage bin counts as one item) do youhave in your physical inventory document?

 A:

5.2.2.6. Enter Count Results

Page 630: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 630/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you record the results of the physical inventory manually or electronically (e.g.barcode scanner, radio-supported)?

 A:

5.2.2.7. Start Inventory Recount

Questions:

Q: 1) Are recounts executed? If yes, which deviation tolerances have you set?

 A:

5.2.2.8. Clear Differences WM

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you take account of conditions requiring subsequent (end-of-period)settlement in your accounting system?

 A:

5.3. Decentralized Warehouse Management

5.3.1. Inbound Shipments

5.3.1.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Page 631: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 631/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Page 632: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 632/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 24) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

5.3.1.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

5.3.2. Outbound Shipments

5.3.2.1. Transportation Planning and Processing

Page 633: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 633/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

Page 634: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 634/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 24) What information do these documents contain?

Page 635: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 635/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

5.3.2.2. Shipment Cost Calculation and Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you calculate your freight costs (freight pricing procedure)?

 A:

Q: 3) Are you using multi-dimensional scales for freight calculation?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you post your freight costs to accounting?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?

 A:

5.3.3. Stck Transfers / Trans. Pstngs

5.3.3.1. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Page 636: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 636/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of severaldifferent strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

5.3.3.2. WM Stock Transfer

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create transfer requirements or transfer orders for consignment material?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use storage-bin-to-storage-bin stock transfers?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

5.3.4. WM Inventory

5.3.4.1. Storage Type Block

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you block any storage types for the purposes of physical inventory? Name thestorage types that are to be blocked.

 A:

Page 637: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 637/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Choose the movement types you wish to block!

 A:5.3.4.2. Continuous Inventory WM

Questions:

Q: 1) What are the triggers for a continuous inventory?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you carry out a continuous inventory in your warehouses/stores via zero stockcheck?

 A:

5.3.4.3. Annual Inventory WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Are goods movements blocked in full or in part in your warehouses/warehouse areasfor the duration of the annual inventory?

 A:

Q: 2) Under what conditions are inventory entry and the stock placement process linked inyour warehouses/warehouse areas?

 A:

Q: 3) Which inventory method do you use during stock placement?

 A:

Q: 4) When do you conduct your annual physical inventory ?

 A:

5.3.4.4. Cycle Counting WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Should the cycle-counting procedure be supported in your warehouses/stores?

 A:

Q: 2) Which materials do you count in cycles?

 A:

Q: 3) Describe the cycle counting intervals. Specify plant, material, and interval.

 A:

Page 638: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 638/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) How is the ABC indicator to be assigned to the materials?

 A:5.3.4.5. Print Inventory List

Questions:

Q: 1) Which count procedure do you use for your branches to ensure that inventory data isrecorded in full?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you carry out your physical inventory count? (e.g. manually, using bar codescanners

 A:

Q: 3) How many document items (each quant and storage bin counts as one item) do youhave in your physical inventory document?

 A:

5.3.4.6. Enter Count Results

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you record the results of the physical inventory manually or electronically (e.g.barcode scanner, radio-supported)?

 A:

5.3.4.7. Start Inventory Recount

Questions:

Q: 1) Are recounts executed? If yes, which deviation tolerances have you set?

 A:

5.3.4.8. Clear Differences WM

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you take account of conditions requiring subsequent (end-of-period)settlement in your accounting system?

 A:

5.3.5. Goods Receipt

5.3.5.1. Posting Change WM

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you use transfer orders to implement transfer postings with respect toconsignment material?

 A:

Q: 2) Which movement types will you use for posting changes?

Page 639: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 639/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) What type of documentation (forms) is to be generated in the case of transferpostings?

 A:

Q: 4) Who is to be informed of a transfer posting? How is this person to be informed?

 A:

5.3.5.2. Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

5.3.5.3. Difference Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

Page 640: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 640/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

5.3.5.4. Putaway Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Are pallets managed in the system with a unique number?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they inunrestricted-use stock?

 A:

Q: 3) Can goods be issued directly from the goods receipt area?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you post your materials to "blocked stock"?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you post your materials to return delivery stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage(putaway).

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?

Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 8) Is a transfer requirement to be generated automatically at the time of a goods receiptwith reference?

 A:

Q: 9) For which goods movements are transfer orders to be created automatically?

 A:

Page 641: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 641/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer orderform, sticker, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in thegoods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post tostock - move to inspection area?

Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage orremain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?

 A:

Q: 12) Which parameters determine your putaway strategies?

Explanation: Storage type search

 A:

Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order iscreated?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Are transfer orders confirmed manually or automatically?

 A:

Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.

 A:

Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to placethe materials? Is this done manually?

 A:

Q: 17) Who is notified of a stock putaway? How is this person notified?

 A:

Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins) for your stock materials?

 A:

Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?

Page 642: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 642/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you receive consignment stock from vendors?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

Q: 23) Do you create a pre-allocation of your materials within warehouse management?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shippingpoint, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?

 A:

5.3.5.5. Return Delivery

Questions:

Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stockpurge?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Will you create action plans/tasks for this defective material?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) onthe defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) Do you have to inspect/re-inspect defective material found in your stockroom or on theproduction floor?

Page 643: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 643/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?

 A:

Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined thatthey are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.

 A:

5.3.6. Goods Issue

5.3.6.1. Stock Removal Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,storage bins)?

 A:

Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant toplant?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which picking strategies do you use?

 A:

Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several

different strategies)?

 A:

Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items areremoved from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, towhich location is the merchandise returned?

Page 644: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 644/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Withdrawal of whole pallet = requirement to remove all stock

 A:

Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, whenstock is taken out of storage?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you confirm the stock removal?

 A:

Q: 11) Will you maintain picking strategies?

 A:

6. Customer Service

Questions:

Q: 1) For which types of products do you provide your services (products for private orprofessional use)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to transfer the service history from your current system to SAP R/3?

 A:

Q: 3) If yes, to which of these objects should the data be transferred?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you consider one-time customers in your service processing?

 A:

Q: 5) Which enterprise units are responsible for providing and executing services for a

specific piece of customer equipment?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you employ service technicians in your company or do you operate astraightforward call center?

 A:

Q: 7) Is your customer service a proactive or reactive customer service?

 A:

Page 645: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 645/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Is your customer service processing performed centrally or decentrally?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to set up a workflow for the processing of notifications and/or orders?

 A:

Q: 10) Is any part of your service organization outsourced (or will it be in the future)?

 A:

Q: 11) Are certain services activities always performed by external contractors? If yes,describe these types of services.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you want to check the credit limit of your service customers during serviceprocessing?

 A:

6.1. Long-Term Service Agreements

6.1.1. Presales Activities

6.1.1.1. Mailing Campaign Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you currently run mailing campaigns?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing? According to which criteria the address listshould be reworked (for example, sales volume, equipment number, credit limi t)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you send mailing campaigns with samples, advertising goods?

 A:

6.1.1.2. Customer Contact Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you perform the following sales activities:

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing campaigns?

 A:

Page 646: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 646/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Do you track customer complaints in service management?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you record information on competitors or competitor products?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you track information on prospective customers?

 A:

6.1.1.3. Service Contract Request Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your inquiry process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Are alternative items required for inquiry processing and how do you handle them?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you allow inquiries for products still under development (text item)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use different types of inquiry?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you want to combine inquiry processing with customer master data entry?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you process or evaluate RFQs in accordance with specific criteria?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you enter RFQ items with different delivery dates?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 647: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 647/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the RFQ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the RFQ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) How do you communicate with your customer?

 A:

Q: 12) Which messages are issued during inquiries?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) What texts are required in an inquiry?

 A:

6.1.1.4. Service Contract Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your quotation process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What texts are required on a quotation?

 A:

Q: 3) Which information (for example, prices) is passed to subsequent documents?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, deliverytime, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you pass requirements to MRP for quotations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to assign order probabilities to quotations?

 A:

Page 648: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 648/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Do your customers require time and material quotations? (If yes, consider usingresource-related quotations.)

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use different types of quotation?

 A:

Q: 9) What kind of information is collected for quotations?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to combine quotation processing with customer master data entry?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you enter a reason for the quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you enter quotation items with different delivery dates?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter a quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) How do you communicate with your customer?

 A:

Q: 17) How do you number quotations?

 A:

6.1.2. Service Contract Processing

6.1.2.1. Service Contract Completion and Processing

Questions:

Page 649: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 649/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) What kind of contract do you use?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you negotiate contracts to use as a basis for sales orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?If so, then for what reasons?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, deliverytimes, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the samecontract?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you check available stock (availability check)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you adjust prices after a period of time?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you want to reprice for release orders (call-offs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 10) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Can you exceed these quantities in subsequent documents?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 650: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 650/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 12) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? Ifso, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do youuse this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),service management)?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you have long-term service agreements with your customers (for example toperform preventive maintenance on your customer equipment periodically)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) If so, please describe the different types of service contracts that you offer to yourcustomer (for example differentiation by validity period or type of service).

 A:

Q: 16) Can your customer choose between different contract options (for example, 24hversus 12h response times)? List all options available for the different contract types.

 A:

Q: 17) Will the contract options selected by the customer influence the pricing of the servicecontract? If so, please describe the criteria influencing the price.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you have contract-specific price agreements with your customers, and if so, whatdo they look like (for example, the service contract with the customer covers all the spareparts that are used during a service under the contract)?

 A:

Q: 19) What technical objects are covered by the service contract item. Do you use oneservice contract per piece of equipment, or does one service contract includes all thecustomer's equipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you want to assign maintenance plans to your customer maintenance contracts?

 A:

Page 651: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 651/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 21) Do you use resource-related billing for contracts? Describe when you would use thisfunctionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting), servicemanagement).

 A:

Q: 22) Do you offer master contracts to which other contracts are linked?

 A:

6.1.2.2. Service Contract Follow-Up Activity Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you perform follow-up activities when the service contract with the customerexpires?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) From the list, select the follow-up activities that you perform. If you select 'Other',explain further.

 A:

Q: 3) When do you start follow-up activities?

 A:

6.1.2.3. Billing Request Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department is responsible for billing the customer (for example, servicedepartment, accounting department)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you already carry out resource-related billing? Do you use transaction VA90 in theprocess?

Explanation: We recommend you create the billing request in resource-related billing usingtransaction DP90 (in CS) or DP91 (in SD). Recommended procedure in the switch from VA90to DP90/DP91: (1) Bill old orders to completion (2) Bill new orders with DP90/DP91 In certain

circumstandes, periodically billed orders require the use of a conversion program (for moredetails, see the documentation or release notes for 4.5 and 4.6). release notes for 4.5 and4.6).

 A:

Q: 3) Do you bill your services at different percentage rates (for example, service hours at100%, material at 50%)?

 A:

Page 652: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 652/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you invoice the customer periodically for the service contract, and if so, how longis the period?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) If you only invoice the customer once, what other criteria do you use to decide whenan invoice is sent to the customer (for example, operating time of equipment)?

 A:

Q: 6) When do you create the invoices for the customer (for example, at the end of eachperiod, or on specific dates defined by the customer)?

 A:

Q: 7) Does the customer receive one invoice per service contract, or is there one invoice forseveral contracts?

 A:

Q: 8) Is the invoice checked before being sent to the customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you need the detailed information from the CO line items or is it enough to billsummarized CO totals records?)

Explanation: System performance is better when summarized CO totals records are billed.

 A:

Q: 10) Which sales documents do you want to generated in resource-related billing?

Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): If you are generating a debit memo requestonly, positive and negative expenditures are cleared against each other. If a debit and creditmemo requests are being generated, positive and negative expenditures can be displayedseparately. displayed separately.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want further summarization of dynamic items during SD documentgeneration? If yes, what characteristics should be used for the summarization?

Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): Required characteristics: object number,transaction currency, units of measure Optional characteristics include cost element, activitytype, cost center A customer exit (Business Adin) is available for you to define your owncharacteristics. characteristics.

 A:

Page 653: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 653/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) What characteristics should be used to determine the material?

Explanation: For example, determine materials using the cost center or a cost element/costcenter/activity type combination.

 A:

Q: 13) From what sources can expenses originate?

Explanation: For example: actual costs, statistical key figures, or cash payments. You cancombine the sources. There is a customer exit you can use to define your own sources.define your own sources.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want to define a particular default rate (in %) for particular sources ofexpense requiring billing? If yes, define the sources and the relevant percentages.

 A:

Q: 15) Do you use specific accounting indicators when confirming expenses (examples:guarantees or grace periods)? If yes, which?

 A:

Q: 16) What do the calculation motives affect?

Explanation: Defined authorization motives can be passed on to price determination.

 A:6.1.2.4. Billing Processing for Service Contract

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Page 654: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 654/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of

different calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Page 655: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 655/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 18) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove

columns.

 A:

Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

Page 656: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 656/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 21) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:6.1.2.5. Service Contract Cancellation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do the service agreements with your customers include specific cancellation rules thatmust be adhered to?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) If so, describe the cancellation process in detail.

 A:

6.2. Call Center Processing

6.2.1. Front Office

6.2.1.1. Service Customer Contact Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you operate a "Telephony" call center or only a "Walk in" call center?

Explanation: "Walk in" Call Center: Your customer comes to you in person. "Telephony" CallCenter: Your customer can process their request with you over the telephone.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you operate one or more call centers? How many queues are necessary?

Explanation: A "queue" is a part of the Call Center hierarchy.

 A:

Q: 3) Which telephone infrastructure (private branch exchange, CTI) is/will be installed inyour company? Who is the manufacturer?

Explanation: Branch and CTI must be reconciled with one another. Each CTI requires aparticular telephony server as an interface between CTI and SAPphone.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you already have a telephony server? If not, who creates or provides the

telephony server?

Page 657: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 657/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: The telephony server forms the necessary interface between your telephoneinfrastructure and the SAP applications. It is delivered by some CTI manufacturers. (Generalstructure: PBX <-> CTI <-> Telephony server (interface) <-> SAPphone <-> CIC <-> R/3)

 A:

Q: 5) Which CIC components are required to set up the CIC framework and in what order?

Explanation: The sequence supports the activities of the agent.

 A:

Q: 6) Are the CIC standard components sufficient, or do individual customer componentshave to be integrated or built?

 A:

Q: 7) Is the set-up of a particular framework sufficient for all center employees (agents), orshould several frameworks be configured for particular agent groups?

Explanation: Several agents can use the same framework for the same or similar areas ofactivity.

 A:

Q: 8) Which business processes should your call center agents perform individually in yourcompany?

Explanation: Definition of all the transactions, which should be available, and theirarrangement on the screen (tabstrips).

 A:

Q: 9) Which default information should be available in the individual entry fields for thetransactions?

 A:

Q: 10) Which information should be copied from the business data display or set after thebusiness processes have been executed?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want to integrate access to HTML pages in your Front Office?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you also want to be able to call up your customer contact activities from othercomponents or HTML pages (and not just using the Action Box pushbuttons)?

Page 658: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 658/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: A new approach was implemented for Release 4.6 which divides the Action Boxinto a visible and an invisible part. The decoupled Action Box functionality enables you toexecute Action Box transactions without the visible Action Box tabstrip components. ActionBox transactions can also be called up from other visible components developed by the useror from HTML pages (Internet, Intranet or customer-defined HTML pages) which are startedby transactions in the Action Box. Moreover, you can now also define a transaction in the Action Box as a HTML session.

 A:

6.2.2. Evaluations (Call Center)

6.2.2.1. Call Center Evaluations

Questions:

Q: 1) Which types of evaluations do you want from your Call Center? Describe.

 A:

6.3. Spare Parts Delivery Processing6.3.1. Presales

6.3.1.1. Mailing Campaign Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you currently run mailing campaigns?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing? According to which criteria the address list

should be reworked (for example, sales volume, equipment number, credit limi t)?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you send mailing campaigns with samples, advertising goods?

 A:

6.3.1.2. Customer Contact Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you perform the following sales activities:

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing campaigns?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you track customer complaints in service management?

 A:

Page 659: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 659/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you record information on competitors or competitor products?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you track information on prospective customers?

 A:

6.3.1.3. Spare Parts Request Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your inquiry process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) Are alternative items required for inquiry processing and how do you handle them?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you allow inquiries for products still under development (text item)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you use different types of inquiry?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you want to combine inquiry processing with customer master data entry?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you process or evaluate RFQs in accordance with specific criteria?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you enter RFQ items with different delivery dates?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the RFQ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 660: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 660/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 10) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the RFQ?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) How do you communicate with your customer?

 A:

Q: 12) Which messages are issued during inquiries?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) What texts are required in an inquiry?

 A:

6.3.2. Service Notification

6.3.2.1. Service Notification Creation and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How is a customer call processed in your company? Please describe in detail thedifferent process steps.

Explanation: For example, the service request is first created in the system by the hotline,which enters a description of the problem and then forwards the service request to to aspecialist in that area.

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you require to process the call further (for example, servicecontract number, service history of equipment)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have customers located outside the time zone of your service center?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in asingle form?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want information about the reference object displayed automatically when anotification is created? If yes, what information?

Explanation: Object information key

 A:

Page 661: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 661/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) How do you identify the technical objects, for which the customer requires the service(for example, serial number, address)?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you prioritize identified work?

 A:

Q: 9) Select the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information youwill require to create the notification. Add other business partners to the list, if necessary.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you describe a customer problem? Do you enter a verbal problemdescription or do you use standardized codes, for example, to determine the damage, causeof damage, or object parts?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want to link digitalized documents to notifications?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you allow your customers to enter their service requests directly in your systemusing the Internet?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How do you want to configure the interface for your notification with regard to controldata, breakdown data, activity data, and task data?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you have standard tasks that you always perform for different types of customercalls? If yes, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 15) Are you restricted to a certain period of time, in which these tasks should beexecuted?

 A:

Q: 16) Do the service contracts that you have with your customers include agreements onspecific tasks with defined response time that you have to adhere to? If yes, describe them.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you assign a responsible person to each task?

Page 662: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 662/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 18) Should the person responsible for a task be informed automatically by the system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to set up an escalation workflow for notifications and tasks?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in astandardized way (that is, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible solutionsfor a problem?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you want to use paging in your company as an additional form ofcommunication?

 A:

6.3.2.2. Notification Printing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print notifications?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 2) Provide some examples of the output format(s) for notifications.

6.3.2.3. Notification Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archivingpolicy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

6.3.3. Spare Parts Order

6.3.3.1. Spare Parts Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your quotation process in detail.

 A:

Page 663: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 663/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) What texts are required on a quotation?

 A:

Q: 3) Which information (for example, prices) is passed to subsequent documents?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, deliverytime, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you pass requirements to MRP for quotations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to assign order probabilities to quotations?

 A:

Q: 7) Do your customers require time and material quotations? (If yes, consider usingresource-related quotations.)

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use different types of quotation?

 A:

Q: 9) What kind of information is collected for quotations?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to combine quotation processing with customer master data entry?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you enter a reason for the quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you enter quotation items with different delivery dates?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 664: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 664/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 14) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter a quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) How do you communicate with your customer?

 A:

Q: 17) How do you number quotations?

 A:

6.3.3.2. Spare Parts Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 665: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 665/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Page 666: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 666/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 20) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Q: 25) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 26) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Page 667: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 667/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 27) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 28) Are sales orders created with reference to a preceding document (inquiry,quotation)?

 A:

Q: 29) Are sales orders entered by the head office or stores?

 A:

Q: 30) If the sales orders are entered by the stores, how are these transmitted to the centralretailing system?

 A:

Q: 31) Where and how is subsequent processing initiated for a sales order?

 A:

Q: 32) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the sales order?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 33) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the sales order?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 34) What triggers creation of a sales order?

 A:

Q: 35) How do you communicate with your customer?

 A:

Q: 36) Is the customer supplied with an order confirmation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 37) Which scenarios do you use for sales order processing with regard to procurementand shipping?

 A:

Page 668: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 668/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 38) Which types of order do you use?

 A:

Q: 39) Do you carry out any special checks on sales orders for export?

 A:

Q: 40) Do you process or evaluate sales orders in accordance with specific criteria?

 A:

Q: 41) Can you also save incomplete sales orders? Under which conditions are theseprocessed further?

 A:

Q: 42) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as theorder (rush orders)?

 A:

Q: 43) Do you price differently for rush orders?

 A:

Q: 44) Should an availability check take place for rush orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 45) Do you need to track your warranties?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 46) Which materials are provided with warranty agreements?

 A:

Q: 47) How is it done today? Automatically or manually?

 A:

Q: 48) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoicestraight away (cash order)?

 A:

Q: 49) Do you price differently for cash sales?

 A:

Page 669: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 669/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 50) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if requiredquantity is not found in warehouse)?

 A:

6.3.4. Risk/Credit Management

6.3.4.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Page 670: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 670/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.3.5. Warehouse Management6.3.5.1. Confirmation of Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

6.3.5.2. Difference Processing During Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Page 671: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 671/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you react to shortfall quantities (e.g. re-picking)?

 A:

6.3.6. Delivery and Transportation

6.3.6.1. Monitoring of Legal Controls

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to check for the export license at delivery time, or when you create thesales order and the delivery?

 A:

Q: 2) Which license types (for example, individual export licenses) do you need in the legalcontrols that apply to you (for example, foreign trade law)?

 A:

Q: 3) Define the legal regulations you need for each country.

 A:

Q: 4) Is the export license specific to a certain destination country?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Is the export license specific to a certain customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Is the export license specific to a certain sales transaction type?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Is the export license specific to a certain type of product?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Page 672: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 672/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) Is the export license limited by a quantity amount?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Is the export license limited by a monetary amount?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.3.6.2. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What triggers a goods issue?

 A:

Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)

 A:

Q: 3) Who posts the goods issue?

 A:

Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for theprocess of delivery from projects.)

Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It isalso possible to combine these functions.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you record materials issued from stores?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you document materials supplied by the subcontractors?

 A:

Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which theycan take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post theirwithdrawal in the system?

Page 673: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 673/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a workorder?

 A:

Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) fromwhich they take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the

system?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 13) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,available stock, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and whatinformation do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

6.3.6.3. Delivery Processing

Page 674: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 674/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling

agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 7) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Page 675: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 675/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 9) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 13) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 14) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear

on an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 15) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Page 676: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 676/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 16) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 19) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 20) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

6.3.6.4. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

Page 677: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 677/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

Page 678: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 678/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

6.3.7. Billing

6.3.7.1. Declarations to Authorities

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for EU?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for Japan?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for NAFTA?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for Switzerland?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.3.7.2. Fixed Price Billing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

Page 679: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 679/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Page 680: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 680/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In

addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Page 681: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 681/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 18) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 21) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:

Q: 23) Describe the different types of periodic billing that you use.

 A:

Q: 24) Describe the billing process for these types of bills. Are they reviewed or approvedby project managers prior to being issued?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you bill customers based on a schedule such as monthly, quarterly or some otherspecified timing? (If yes, consider running the billing due list for projects according to thisschedule.)

 A:

Q: 26) Is your billing based on milestones? (If yes, consider PS-milestone functions.)

 A:

Q: 27) Milestone billing allows you to control a bill release on the project side. Who isresponsible for approving the draft invoice?

 A:

Q: 28) Is your billing related to a specific delivery? (If yes, consider using a milestone tocontrol the release of invoices as deliveries are confirmed. Also consider structuring theinvoice so that it relates to the delivery schedule.)

Page 682: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 682/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 29) Is your billing based on fixed amounts or a percentage of order? (If yes, consider thiswhen structuring the billing plan in your project.)

 A:

Q: 30) Is your billing based on the percentage of completion? (If yes, consider usingmilestones to calculate the POC and to control billing).

 A:

Q: 31) Is your billing based on percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using earnedvalue analysis milestone technique to calculate the percentage of completion and control thebilling.)

 A:

Q: 32) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)

 A:

Q: 33) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and theaccounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time andmaterial-related billing in your projects.

 A:

6.3.8. Information System6.3.8.1. Evaluations of Customer Service Information System [SMIS]

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and

content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

6.4. Repairs Processing at Customer (Field Service)

6.4.1. Maintenance Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: For information about the maintenance plan, see documentation on masterdata.

Page 683: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 683/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

6.4.1.1. Maintenance Plan Scheduling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you schedule your maintenance plans manually, or should the system perform thescheduling automatically?

 A:

6.4.1.2. Maintenance Call Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which objects should be generated for maintenance calls?

 A:

Q: 2) Should scheduled orders be released automatically when they are created?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.4.2. Service Notification

6.4.2.1. Service Notification Creation and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How is a customer call processed in your company? Please describe in detail thedifferent process steps.

Explanation: For example, the service request is first created in the system by the hotline,which enters a description of the problem and then forwards the service request to to aspecialist in that area.

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you require to process the call further (for example, servicecontract number, service history of equipment)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have customers located outside the time zone of your service center?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in asingle form?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want information about the reference object displayed automatically when anotification is created? If yes, what information?

Page 684: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 684/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Object information key

 A:

Q: 7) How do you identify the technical objects, for which the customer requires the service(for example, serial number, address)?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you prioritize identified work?

 A:

Q: 9) Select the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information youwill require to create the notification. Add other business partners to the list, if necessary.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you describe a customer problem? Do you enter a verbal problem

description or do you use standardized codes, for example, to determine the damage, causeof damage, or object parts?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want to link digitalized documents to notifications?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you allow your customers to enter their service requests directly in your system

using the Internet?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How do you want to configure the interface for your notification with regard to controldata, breakdown data, activity data, and task data?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you have standard tasks that you always perform for different types of customer

calls? If yes, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 15) Are you restricted to a certain period of time, in which these tasks should beexecuted?

 A:

Q: 16) Do the service contracts that you have with your customers include agreements onspecific tasks with defined response time that you have to adhere to? If yes, describe them.

Page 685: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 685/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 17) Do you assign a responsible person to each task?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 18) Should the person responsible for a task be informed automatically by the system?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to set up an escalation workflow for notifications and tasks?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in astandardized way (that is, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible solutions

for a problem?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you want to use paging in your company as an additional form ofcommunication?

 A:

6.4.2.2. Notification Printing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print notifications?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Provide some examples of the output format(s) for notifications.

6.4.2.3. Entry of Technical Findings

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment wasbroken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a servicehistory or to enable further evaluations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Which technical data should be recorded and who is responsible?

 A:

Q: 3) When do you document technical findings?

Page 686: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 686/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technicallycompleted?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technicalinformation? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want tohave codes.

 A:

6.4.2.4. Debit Memo Request Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? Ifso, describe it.

 A:

Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) What types of adjustments are made in memos?

 A:6.4.2.5. Notification Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archivingpolicy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

6.4.3. Service Order

6.4.3.1. Service Order Creation and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What different types of service do you provide (for example, preventive maintenance,repair, installation)? List the service types and outline the differences in planning andexecution.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in asingle form?

Page 687: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 687/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Mark in the following list whether services are performed by internal servicetechnicians and/or sub-contractors.

 A:

Q: 4) When do you plan your service order; what information do you require from thesystem with regard to labor resources (for example, availability of service technician, numberof people, duration of work)?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you proceed with an external assignment with the sub-contractor? Chooseone or more of the following options.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to define skills and/or qualifications for order operations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) Do you ever have more than one service technician working on the same service?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you want to assign individual operations to particular people?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you want to configure a special search help for partners in your order?

Explanation: For example, a search help for particular people (with particular qualifications),which are assigned to a particular work center. For the partner function of type "Person", it ispossible to set an indicator for a special search help for partners.

 A:

Q: 10) For which operation types do you want to represent the operation description using

service specifications?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you provide the service technicians who perform a service with a list of individualactivities (task list)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use pre-defined task lists in order planning?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 688: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 688/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) If yes, which of the following types of task lists do you require?

 A:

Q: 14) How do you manage the spare parts required for the service? For example, whoplans the required parts, how will the spare parts arrive at the customer?. Describe theprocess in detail.

 A:

Q: 15) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, dailyrequirements, individual requirements)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planningphase?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you want to generate purchase requisitions and reservations when the order iscreated?

Explanation: You can configure whether reservations and purchase requisitions aregenerated when the order is created or only when the order is released.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance orderduring the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to generate collective purchase requisitions or individual purchaserequisitions for each external item?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard toworking conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.

 A:

Q: 21) How do you want to prioritize work?

 A:

Q: 22) At which level do you schedule work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification,or an individual person and so on)?

Page 689: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 689/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 23) How exact is your scheduling (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,capacity scheduling)?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you want to use paging in your company as an additional form ofcommunication?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you sell service products for a fixed price?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 26) Do you want to use the service order as the basis for creating quotations for your

customers?

 A:

6.4.3.2. Material Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Who performs material planning for orders in your company?

 A:

Q: 3) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, dailyrequirements, individual requirements)?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning

phase?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance orderduring the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Is there an approval procedure for external purchase orders and materialwithdrawals? If yes, describe it.

Page 690: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 690/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Workflow, printing material withdrawal slips, signature rule.

 A:

6.4.3.3. Service Order Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard toworking conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.

 A:

Q: 2) If yes, who in your company is authorized to issue permits?

Explanation: Maintenance of authorizations for the corresponding transactions.

 A:

6.4.3.4. Service Order Release

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you decide that a service is ready to be performed? If necessary, differentiateby service type. Is this decision a separate process step, and who makes the decision?

 A:

6.4.3.5. Service Order Printing

Questions:

Q: 1) Identify the internal papers that you require for the different people and order typesinvolved (for example, job ticket for employee, picking list).

 A:

Q: 2) Provide some representative layout examples.

Q: 3) Do you assign printers to the people involved?

Explanation: Printers and shop papers can be assigned to specific users.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you send certain external documents to the customer (for example, an orderconfirmation)?

 A:

6.4.3.6. Service Order Execution

Questions:

Page 691: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 691/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Note: This process is only for service activities performed manually on technicalsystems by the technician.

Explanation: This is only a note.

 A:

Q: 2) How is material withdrawn for the order?

Explanation: Rough decription of process flow, the way in which the employee executing thetask obtains the necessary materials.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you work with closed or open warehouses?

Explanation: Closed warehouses make it necessary to use material withdrawal slips,

whereas open warehouses do not. It may be that an approval procedure is required formaterial withdrawal.

 A:

6.4.4. Capacity Planning

6.4.4.1. Capacity Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Is it necessary to determine if a person is available to do a task? (If yes, considerusing employee shift scheduling.)

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to change capacity/work centers for periods with overload? (If yes,consider changing the work center/assignment/activity dates manually from the evaluationreports.)

 A:

Q: 3) Do you do short term capacity planning? (If yes, ensure the time horizon for thecapacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period. If no, ensure the time horizon for thecapacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period.)

 A:

Q: 4) Do you utilize your personnel resources/capacities per process or enterprise-wide? (Ifyes, consider using work center hierarchies.)

 A:

Q: 5) Are resources to be shared across departments (for example plant maintenance andprojects)?

Page 692: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 692/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: If yes, consider how you want to define the priorities between the departmentsand make sure that you can use different order types at the work center.

 A:

Q: 6) Which order type do you want to use for capacity evaluation?

 A:6.4.4.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you process the overload on capacities/wk centers? (If yes, you could use thecapacity leveling functions- dispatching and deallocating).

 A:

Q: 2) Do you prefer to use a graphical planning tool for capacity leveling? (If yes, use thegraphical capacity planning tool If no, consider using the tabular capacity planning tool.)

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to assign available capacities to order operations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) When you split order operations, do you want the system to create capacity loadsautomatically for individual people?

Explanation: See the release note for 4.6C: "Automatic Creation of Employee RequirementsRecords (Splits)".

 A:

Q: 5) Which type of planning table do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 6) Which planning strategies will you use for Sequencing?

 A:

6.4.5. Goods Movements6.4.5.1. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What triggers a goods issue?

 A:

Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)

 A:

Page 693: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 693/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Who posts the goods issue?

 A:

Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for theprocess of delivery from projects.)

Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It isalso possible to combine these functions.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you record materials issued from stores?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you document materials supplied by the subcontractors?

 A:

Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which theycan take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post theirwithdrawal in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a workorder?

 A:

Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) fromwhich they take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

Page 694: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 694/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 13) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,available stock, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and whatinformation do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

6.4.6. Service Product Order6.4.6.1. Service Product Order Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,

document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

Page 695: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 695/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.

The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Page 696: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 696/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 20) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

Page 697: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 697/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 25) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 26) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 27) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 28) Are sales orders created with reference to a preceding document (inquiry,

quotation)?

 A:

Q: 29) Are sales orders entered by the head office or stores?

 A:

Q: 30) If the sales orders are entered by the stores, how are these transmitted to the centralretailing system?

 A:

Q: 31) Where and how is subsequent processing initiated for a sales order?

 A:

Q: 32) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the sales order?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 33) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the sales order?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 34) What triggers creation of a sales order?

 A:

Q: 35) How do you communicate with your customer?

Page 698: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 698/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 36) Is the customer supplied with an order confirmation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 37) Which scenarios do you use for sales order processing with regard to procurementand shipping?

 A:

Q: 38) Which types of order do you use?

 A:

Q: 39) Do you carry out any special checks on sales orders for export?

 A:

Q: 40) Do you process or evaluate sales orders in accordance with specific criteria?

 A:

Q: 41) Can you also save incomplete sales orders? Under which conditions are theseprocessed further?

 A:

Q: 42) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as theorder (rush orders)?

 A:

Q: 43) Do you price differently for rush orders?

 A:

Q: 44) Should an availability check take place for rush orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 45) Do you need to track your warranties?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 46) Which materials are provided with warranty agreements?

 A:

Q: 47) How is it done today? Automatically or manually?

 A:

Page 699: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 699/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 48) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoicestraight away (cash order)?

 A:

Q: 49) Do you price differently for cash sales?

 A:

Q: 50) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if requiredquantity is not found in warehouse)?

 A:

6.4.7. Risk/Credit Management

6.4.7.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Page 700: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 700/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.4.8. Warehouse Management6.4.8.1. Confirmation of Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Page 701: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 701/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

6.4.8.2. Difference Processing During Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer

order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you react to shortfall quantities (e.g. re-picking)?

 A:

6.4.9. Delivery and Transportation

6.4.9.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

Page 702: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 702/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded

(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.4.9.2. Monitoring of Legal Controls

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to check for the export license at delivery time, or when you create thesales order and the delivery?

 A:

Q: 2) Which license types (for example, individual export licenses) do you need in the legalcontrols that apply to you (for example, foreign trade law)?

 A:

Page 703: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 703/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Define the legal regulations you need for each country.

 A:

Q: 4) Is the export license specific to a certain destination country?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Is the export license specific to a certain customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Is the export license specific to a certain sales transaction type?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 7) Is the export license specific to a certain type of product?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Is the export license limited by a quantity amount?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Is the export license limited by a monetary amount?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.4.9.3. Goods Issue Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) What triggers a goods issue?

 A:

Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)

 A:

Q: 3) Who posts the goods issue?

 A:

Page 704: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 704/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for theprocess of delivery from projects.)

Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It isalso possible to combine these functions.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you record materials issued from stores?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you document materials supplied by the subcontractors?

 A:

Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which theycan take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post theirwithdrawal in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a workorder?

 A:

Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) fromwhich they take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 13) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Page 705: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 705/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,available stock, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and whatinformation do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

6.4.9.4. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Page 706: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 706/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Q: 7) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 8) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determined

automatically.

 A:

Q: 9) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

Page 707: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 707/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 13) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they requiredon output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 14) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 15) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).

You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 19) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 20) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

Page 708: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 708/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

6.4.9.5. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Page 709: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 709/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

Page 710: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 710/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

6.4.10. Completion Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you or your employees enter completion confirmations of time?

Explanation: Time completion confirmations can be entered using IW41 or alternatively, byusing CATS.

 A:

Q: 2) Who confirms orders in your company?

 A:

Q: 3) How does the service technician confirm the activities that are executed at thecustomer (for example, a service report on paper, over the Internet and so on)?

 A:

Q: 4) At which intervals (e.g., monthly or weekly) and on which level (e.g., one report perengineer or one report per engineer/customer/equipment) will the service enginee r reportback the activities he has performed?

 A:

Q: 5) Are the completion confirmations in your company entered at the level of personnelnumber?

Explanation: This function is required for CATS; it can be used with transaction IW41.

 A:

Q: 6) Should the superior approve the times recorded by the employees?

Explanation: The permit function for completion confirmations is realized using CATS.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you also want to confirm used material at the same time as the time confirmation?

Explanation: This function is limited using CATS, since it involves a jump to the goods issuetransaction in inventory management.

 A:

Q: 8) Should the technical completion (for example, for breakdown times, causes ofdamage, tasks and so on) be made at the same time as the time confirmation?

Page 711: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 711/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: The technical completion confirmation is part of the maintenance or servicenotification. This can be created and saved using transaction IW41.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you also want to enter measurement readings with the completion confirmation?

Explanation: Measurement documents can also be entered at the same time usingtransaction IW41.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you use the integration with the HR module?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you create completion confirmations centrally, or does each employee enter their

own times themselves?

Explanation: A central completion confirmation requires you to issue confirmation slips toyour employees. In some cases, it may also require you to configure the entry using differentorders and people in a screen template.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you issue confirmation slips to your employees?

Explanation: Is required for the entry of a central completion confirmation. Requires printsettings (possibly SAPScript).

 A:

Q: 13) How many times per day do your employees enter their working time?

Explanation: Important for the transfer frequency when using CATS.

 A:

Q: 14) Will you use a Plant Data Collection (PDC) system for your completionconfirmations?

Explanation: On communication channel 3. Only completed time tickets can be confirmed(time interval, duration), but no start/end times (stages).

 A:

Q: 15) Do you enter the working times of contractors? If yes, how should the externalservices be entered?

Page 712: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 712/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 16) Do you post trip costs for the service technician to the service order, so that theyshow up in the service order cost report and/or can be invoiced to the customer?

 A:

6.4.10.1. Individual Time Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you enter the absolute duration or period of time (from...to)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you differentiate the times entered according to other activity types (for example,to distinguish between normal work hours and overtime)?

Explanation: Reconcile with Controlling.

 A:

Q: 3) Is the confirmation of your services person-based?

Explanation: If yes, is there a company agreement?

 A:

Q: 4) In what unit and with what accuracy do you want to enter services?

 A:

6.4.10.2. Overall Completion Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Which employees confirm which data?

Explanation: Configure a profile for the overall completion confirmation.

 A:

Q: 2) Are internal services confirmed?

Explanation: Set overall confirmation profile.

 A:

6.4.10.3. Time Sheet Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) In which systems do you track employee master data? Are wage rates onlymaintained in the R/3 System or in other systems too?

Page 713: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 713/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use this data as a basis for indirect activity allocation to cost objects, costcenters, internal orders and so on?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) Explain how such a time sheet is structured today and how it should be structured infuture (what information do you need on the time sheet?).

 A:

Q: 4) Does everyone who records working time have a personal number in HR? (If not,CATS is not supported.)

Explanation: You require at least one HR mini master record before you can use CATS.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which of your employees should fill out timesheets?

Explanation: Depending on the person entering the information, different time profiles can becreated. For example, an administrator can enter times for many employees.

 A:

Q: 6) How do your employees enter and track working times?

 A:

Q: 7) Are the labor costs calculated based on actual costs or standard rates?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine these labor rates?

 A:

Q: 9) Please explain the procedure, how employees in your company track and report timetoday.

Explanation: For example, how do your developers in Research & Development determinethe time available for their projects: manually on paper, manually in Excel and so on?

 A:

Q: 10) In which system do you want to run payroll?

Page 714: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 714/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 11) Are there special conditions for labor costs when employees work in differentcountries or for different profit centers (for example, if an employee from the UK works on aproject in Germany)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you enter labor in complete hours or clock time?

 A:

Q: 13) How do your employees enter trip costs? Are the trips linked to the recording ofworking time? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you use the SAP employee reporting system?

 A:

Q: 15) Identify the different categories of activity (activity types) that you use for estimation,planning and settlement purposes?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the various cost collectors, to which employees will charge time (forexample, cost centers, projects, internal orders)?

 A:

Q: 17) Do sub-contractors and other third party labor sources have to enter work usingtimesheets?

 A:

Q: 18) Are these external services settled to a cost center or directly to the project?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you record overtime?

 A:

Q: 20) How is the cost of overtime calculated? Do you have different types of overtime (forexample, time and a half, double time)?

 A:

Page 715: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 715/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 21) Do you track indirect labor hours, such as vacation, sickness, holiday...? If yes,define the categories you require and their entry type.

 A:

Q: 22) Which financial entries do you currently make for your labor distribution?

 A:

Q: 23) How do employees record their working time (time, detail, medium/system)?

 A:

6.4.10.4. Time Sheet Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) What is your current timesheet approval strategy for employees and externalservices?

Explanation: You can define the selection and layout.

 A:

Q: 2) Explain the permit procedure for working time or recording of activity allocation foryour employees.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you have an external reporting system for working times?

 A:

Q: 4) How many employees does the person responsible for approval manage?

Explanation: Consider using the CATS workflow to automate the approval process.

 A:

6.4.10.5. Forwarding of Time Sheet Data to CS

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer recorded activity allocations to Controlling using the timesheet?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How often does this transfer take place (daily, weekly and so on)?

 A:

Page 716: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 716/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,employee hours by cost center)?

 A:

6.4.10.6. Time Sheet Report

Questions:

Q: 1) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,employee hours by cost center)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you need to see days that have not timesheet entries?

Explanation: There is a standard report for missing days.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you need an evaluation, do see the days on which personnel enter more than adefined number of hours?

Explanation: There is a standard report for overtime.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have to see the employee name in the documents for the receivingcomponent?

Explanation: Consider using a User Exit.

 A:

Q: 5) Do different roles need to see different timesheet information? (If yes, create reportvariants.)

 A:

6.4.10.7. Service Entry Sheet

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you wish to process or document completion of the services performed by theservice provider?

 A:

6.4.10.8. Entry of Technical Findings

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment wasbroken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a servicehistory or to enable further evaluations?

Page 717: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 717/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Which technical data should be recorded and who is responsible?

 A:

Q: 3) When do you document technical findings?

Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technicallycompleted?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technicalinformation? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want tohave codes.

 A:

6.4.10.9. Measurement Document Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you measure and record the current condition of your equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? Describe the different measuring pointsand counters that you require for the different pieces of equipment.

 A:

Q: 2) How do you proceed if a measurement reading lies outside of a pre-definedmeasurement range?

 A:

6.4.10.10. Measurement Document Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to archive measurement documents? If so,provide a copy of yourdocument archiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

6.4.11. Settlement and Completion

6.4.11.1. Technical Order Completion

Questions:

Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is technically completed and when?

 A:

6.4.11.2. Order Settlement

Questions:

Page 718: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 718/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Who settles orders in your company and when?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you want to settle service orders in general?

 A:

Q: 3) How often and according to which rules do you want to settle orders ?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to examine your cost elements for the settlement of orders in greaterdetail?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you analyze the profitability of single service contracts, including all related service

costs and service revenues?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you intend to have service profitability analysis or profit center analysis within yourcompany?

 A:

Q: 7) If you have a profitability analysis, how is this structured?

 A:

6.4.11.3. Business Order Completion

Questions:

Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is fully completed (business completion) and when?

 A:

Q: 2) Which criteria do you use to decide whether work is fully completed?

 A:

6.4.11.4. Order Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to archive orders? If so, please provide a copy of your documentarchiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) How long do you want to retain orders in the system before they are archived?

Page 719: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 719/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to archive orders?

Explanation: You can archive orders with or without subsequent archiving.

 A:

6.4.11.5. Historical Service Order - Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to track service work, which has already beencompleted?

 A:

6.4.12. Billing

6.4.12.1. Billing Request Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department is responsible for billing the customer (for example, servicedepartment, accounting department)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you already carry out resource-related billing? Do you use transaction VA90 in theprocess?

Explanation: We recommend you create the billing request in resource-related billing usingtransaction DP90 (in CS) or DP91 (in SD). Recommended procedure in the switch from VA90to DP90/DP91: (1) Bill old orders to completion (2) Bill new orders with DP90/DP91 In certaincircumstandes, periodically billed orders require the use of a conversion program (for moredetails, see the documentation or release notes for 4.5 and 4.6). release notes for 4.5 and4.6).

 A:

Q: 3) Do you bill your services at different percentage rates (for example, service hours at100%, material at 50%)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you invoice the customer periodically for the service contract, and if so, how longis the period?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) If you only invoice the customer once, what other criteria do you use to decide whenan invoice is sent to the customer (for example, operating time of equipment)?

 A:

Page 720: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 720/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) When do you create the invoices for the customer (for example, at the end of eachperiod, or on specific dates defined by the customer)?

 A:

Q: 7) Does the customer receive one invoice per service contract, or is there one invoice forseveral contracts?

 A:

Q: 8) Is the invoice checked before being sent to the customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you need the detailed information from the CO line items or is it enough to billsummarized CO totals records?)

Explanation: System performance is better when summarized CO totals records are billed.

 A:

Q: 10) Which sales documents do you want to generated in resource-related billing?

Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): If you are generating a debit memo requestonly, positive and negative expenditures are cleared against each other. If a debit and creditmemo requests are being generated, positive and negative expenditures can be displayed

separately. displayed separately.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want further summarization of dynamic items during SD documentgeneration? If yes, what characteristics should be used for the summarization?

Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): Required characteristics: object number,transaction currency, units of measure Optional characteristics include cost element, activitytype, cost center A customer exit (Business Adin) is available for you to define your owncharacteristics. characteristics.

 A:

Q: 12) What characteristics should be used to determine the material?

Explanation: For example, determine materials using the cost center or a cost element/costcenter/activity type combination.

 A:

Q: 13) From what sources can expenses originate?

Page 721: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 721/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: For example: actual costs, statistical key figures, or cash payments. You cancombine the sources. There is a customer exit you can use to define your own sources.define your own sources.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want to define a particular default rate (in %) for particular sources ofexpense requiring billing? If yes, define the sources and the relevant percentages.

 A:

Q: 15) Do you use specific accounting indicators when confirming expenses (examples:guarantees or grace periods)? If yes, which?

 A:

Q: 16) What do the calculation motives affect?

Explanation: Defined authorization motives can be passed on to price determination.

 A:6.4.12.2. Resource-Related Billing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please

describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Page 722: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 722/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).

You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Page 723: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 723/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 18) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 21) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:

Page 724: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 724/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 23) Do you bill customers on a time and material basis? (If yes, consider using resource-related billing.)

 A:

Q: 24) Do you bill internal labor at an hourly, daily rate etc? (If yes, you need to enter theactivity types in Customizing for expense-related billing.)

 A:

Q: 25) Describe the different ways that labor and expense are billed for your projects e.g. islabor billed at fixed billing rates, or as a straight cost plus a markup, or a combination of both,etc.

 A:

Q: 26) Describe your billing process. How often are time and material invoices issued?

 A:

Q: 27) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and theaccounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time andmaterial-related billing in your projects.

 A:

Q: 28) What is the relationship between activities reported against a project and activitiesbilled to the customer?

Explanation: If there is a difference, consider how the price list is used in SD or how a userexit determines a price.

 A:

Q: 29) If subcontractors are used, are they billed as an expense or as internal labor?

 A:

Q: 30) Do you use time and material-related billing? Do you exclude some expenses fromprojects from billing?

 A:

Q: 31) Are the time and materials cost marked up in price for billing?

 A:

Q: 32) Do you have caps on time and material billed?

 A:

Page 725: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 725/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 33) If so, describe the way caps are applied e.g. on the total of labor and expense, onspecific expenses etc.

 A:

Q: 34) Is there an approval process for these project invoices? (If yes, consider usingworkflow and involving the project manager in the process.)

 A:

Q: 35) Do you show detailed info in the invoice for time and material-related billing?Provide us with examples. (If yes, consider using project reports to support the detailrequired.)

 A:

Q: 36) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)

 A:

6.4.12.3. Fixed Price Billing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

Page 726: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 726/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Page 727: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 727/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 18) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 21) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:

Page 728: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 728/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 23) Describe the different types of periodic billing that you use.

 A:

Q: 24) Describe the billing process for these types of bills. Are they reviewed or approvedby project managers prior to being issued?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you bill customers based on a schedule such as monthly, quarterly or some otherspecified timing? (If yes, consider running the billing due list for projects according to thisschedule.)

 A:

Q: 26) Is your billing based on milestones? (If yes, consider PS-milestone functions.)

 A:

Q: 27) Milestone billing allows you to control a bill release on the project side. Who isresponsible for approving the draft invoice?

 A:

Q: 28) Is your billing related to a specific delivery? (If yes, consider using a milestone tocontrol the release of invoices as deliveries are confirmed. Also consider structuring theinvoice so that it relates to the delivery schedule.)

 A:

Q: 29) Is your billing based on fixed amounts or a percentage of order? (If yes, consider thiswhen structuring the billing plan in your project.)

 A:

Q: 30) Is your billing based on the percentage of completion? (If yes, consider usingmilestones to calculate the POC and to control billing).

 A:

Q: 31) Is your billing based on percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using earnedvalue analysis milestone technique to calculate the percentage of completion and control thebilling.)

 A:

Q: 32) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)

 A:

Page 729: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 729/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 33) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and theaccounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time andmaterial-related billing in your projects.

 A:

6.4.12.4. Declarations to Authorities

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for EU?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for Japan?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for NAFTA?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have to make declarations to authorities for Switzerland?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.4.13. Information System

6.4.13.1. Evaluations of Customer Service Information System [SMIS]

Questions:

Q: 1) Which analysis system is defined in your company?

 A:

Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.

Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency andcontent of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state thedifferent levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.

 A:

6.5. Repairs Processing in Service Center (Inhouse)

6.5.1. Service Notification

6.5.1.1. Service Notification Creation and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) How is a customer call processed in your company? Please describe in detail thedifferent process steps.

Explanation: For example, the service request is first created in the system by the hotline,which enters a description of the problem and then forwards the service request to to aspecialist in that area.

 A:

Page 730: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 730/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) What information do you require to process the call further (for example, servicecontract number, service history of equipment)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have customers located outside the time zone of your service center?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in asingle form?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want information about the reference object displayed automatically when anotification is created? If yes, what information?

Explanation: Object information key

 A:

Q: 7) How do you identify the technical objects, for which the customer requires the service(for example, serial number, address)?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you prioritize identified work?

 A:

Q: 9) Select the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information youwill require to create the notification. Add other business partners to the list, if necessary.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you describe a customer problem? Do you enter a verbal problemdescription or do you use standardized codes, for example, to determine the damage, causeof damage, or object parts?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want to link digitalized documents to notifications?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you allow your customers to enter their service requests directly in your systemusing the Internet?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 731: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 731/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 13) How do you want to configure the interface for your notification with regard to controldata, breakdown data, activity data, and task data?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you have standard tasks that you always perform for different types of customercalls? If yes, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 15) Are you restricted to a certain period of time, in which these tasks should beexecuted?

 A:

Q: 16) Do the service contracts that you have with your customers include agreements onspecific tasks with defined response time that you have to adhere to? If yes, describe them.

 A:

Q: 17) Do you assign a responsible person to each task?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 18) Should the person responsible for a task be informed automatically by the system?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 19) Do you want to set up an escalation workflow for notifications and tasks?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in astandardized way (that is, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible solutionsfor a problem?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you want to use paging in your company as an additional form ofcommunication?

 A:

6.5.1.2. Notification Printing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you print notifications?

 A: [ ]Yes

Page 732: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 732/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

[ ]No

Q: 2) Provide some examples of the output format(s) for notifications.

6.5.1.3. Entry of Technical Findings

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment wasbroken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a servicehistory or to enable further evaluations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Which technical data should be recorded and who is responsible?

 A:

Q: 3) When do you document technical findings?

Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technicallycompleted?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technicalinformation? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want tohave codes.

 A:

6.5.1.4. Notification Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your specific archiving requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archivingpolicy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

6.5.2. Customer Complaint

6.5.2.1. Creation and Processing of Quality Notifications

Questions:

Q: 1) In your company, who is responsible for the receipt or creation of quality notifications?

Explanation: Call center organizational unit etc.?

 A:

Page 733: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 733/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) In your company, who is responsible for processing the quality notifications that havebeen created?

Explanation: Coordination

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want a simplified view of the structure and functions of a notification tofacilitate ease of use for occasional users?

Explanation: Create simplified notification type for transaction IQS21.

 A:

Q: 4) Which main criteria do you want to use to differentiate notifications? Will you want touse different notification types?

Explanation: Background: A customer may want to use the same notification types, forexample, customer complaint in different plants or according to different criteria.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create notifications using copy models?

Explanation: Customizing: Define initial screens for notifications.

 A:

Q: 6) How do you prioritize incoming notifications (complaints, queries and so on)?

Explanation: For example: "Very high", "high" etc.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you define specific periods of time for processing notifications?

Explanation: Processing period for specific notification priorities.

 A:

Q: 8) List the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information yourequire when creating the notification. Add other business partners, if necessary.

Explanation: Partner definition.

 A:

Page 734: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 734/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) How do you describe the problem? Do you use a verbal description or standardcodes?

Explanation: Coding: Definiton of catalog profile

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to use specific catalogs for each material in notification processing?

Explanation: Warning: Definition of catalog profile in material master: If necessary, provide astructure according to material type, since material-specific catalogs increase the amount ofdata to be maintained (such as catalogs etc.). (such as catalogs etc.).

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want to attach electronic documents (for example, inspection reports) to thenotification?

Explanation: Linking of quality notifications to the Document Management System.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you assign a responsible person to each task?

Explanation: Note: An incorrect assignment is usually the result of a problem with thedocumentation.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you have ad-hoc tasks that you always carry out for different notification types orpriorities? If so, describe these tasks.

Explanation: Definiton of response profiles.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the person or coordinator responsible for a task to be notified

automatically by the system?

Explanation: User-based workflow definition or definition using HR reporting structure.

 A:

Q: 15) Do you want newly created notifications to be subject to an additional approvalprocedure?

Page 735: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 735/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Set the "approval required" indicator for the required notification type (IMGactivity: OLQN_CL). An additional notification status "Submit for approval" will be created. becreated.

 A:

Q: 16) How do you want to structure the layout of your notification with regard to theproblem description, execution, items, tasks, activities?

Explanation: Note: This applies to all notification types (Q1,Q2,Q3 etc.).

 A:

Q: 17) Do you want to advise your employees of "related notifications" during notificationprocessing?

Explanation: Setting of screen group 025 "Related notifications".

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want to allow or prevent certain procedures based on businessprocesses/events?

Explanation: Definiton of user status.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you record costs arising from complaints? Describe how you record these.

Explanation: Costs, for example, for wages, material, telephone costs, travel expenses etc.

 A:

Q: 20) Do you want to create and activate the QM order, based on the notification? Whereare these costs to be settled?

 A:

Q: 21) Which shop papers do you use to process notifications?

Explanation: Documents that are usually sent to the nofication addressee (such asconfirmation of receipt, interim notices, 8D reports).

 A:

Q: 22) How many notifications do you receive each day or each year?

Explanation: Defining number ranges for notifications.

Page 736: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 736/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 23) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in astandardized way (for example, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possiblesolutions for a problem?

Explanation: Coding of tasks, items and activities.

 A:

Q: 24) How is a quality notification processed in your company? Describe the process forexternal or internal notifications.

Explanation: Designing action box with sequential processing.

 A:

Q: 25) Do you allow your customers to create complaints in your system using the Internet?

 A:

6.5.3. Repair Order

6.5.3.1. Service Quotation Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe your quotation process in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What texts are required on a quotation?

 A:

Q: 3) Which information (for example, prices) is passed to subsequent documents?

 A:

Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, deliverytime, commitment dates, validity periods)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you pass requirements to MRP for quotations?

 A:

Q: 6) Do you want to assign order probabilities to quotations?

 A:

Page 737: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 737/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 7) Do your customers require time and material quotations? (If yes, consider usingresource-related quotations.)

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use different types of quotation?

 A:

Q: 9) What kind of information is collected for quotations?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to combine quotation processing with customer master data entry?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you enter a reason for the quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) Do you enter quotation items with different delivery dates?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 15) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter a quotation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) How do you communicate with your customer?

 A:

Q: 17) How do you number quotations?

 A:

6.5.3.2. Repair Order Processing

Questions:

Page 738: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 738/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customerorders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,specific product lines)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease ofprocessing or reporting purposes?

 A:

Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).

 A:

Q: 4) How do you receive orders?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into salesdocuments?

 A:

Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been usedalready?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 7) List the reasons for creating a sales order.

 A:

Q: 8) For what reasons would an order or line item be rejected?

 A:

Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times areincluded in delivery scheduling.

 A:

Page 739: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 739/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you pass your sales plan on to demand management?

 A:

Q: 13) How do you schedule deliveries?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be

copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would liketo appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save thedocument as incomplete if any of this information is missing?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,what are they?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you send order confirmations? If yes, how?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they havedifferent ship-to parties?

 A:

Q: 20) Do shipping notifications create expediting documents?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 740: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 740/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 21) Do you use serial materials? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 23) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separateitem or separate order type?

 A:

Q: 24) Do you have specific costing requirements for free materials?

 A:

Q: 25) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item forthe free good item)?

 A:

Q: 26) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings(e.g. cost center, profit center)?

 A:

Q: 27) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information doyou need to show?

 A:

Q: 28) Are sales orders created with reference to a preceding document (inquiry,quotation)?

 A:

Q: 29) Are sales orders entered by the head office or stores?

 A:

Q: 30) If the sales orders are entered by the stores, how are these transmitted to the centralretailing system?

 A:

Q: 31) Where and how is subsequent processing initiated for a sales order?

 A:

Page 741: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 741/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 32) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the sales order?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 33) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the sales order?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 34) What triggers creation of a sales order?

 A:

Q: 35) How do you communicate with your customer?

 A:

Q: 36) Is the customer supplied with an order confirmation?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 37) Which scenarios do you use for sales order processing with regard to procurementand shipping?

 A:

Q: 38) Which types of order do you use?

 A:

Q: 39) Do you carry out any special checks on sales orders for export?

 A:

Q: 40) Do you process or evaluate sales orders in accordance with specific criteria?

 A:

Q: 41) Can you also save incomplete sales orders? Under which conditions are theseprocessed further?

 A:

Q: 42) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as theorder (rush orders)?

 A:

Q: 43) Do you price differently for rush orders?

 A:

Page 742: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 742/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 44) Should an availability check take place for rush orders?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 45) Do you need to track your warranties?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 46) Which materials are provided with warranty agreements?

 A:

Q: 47) How is it done today? Automatically or manually?

 A:

Q: 48) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoicestraight away (cash order)?

 A:

Q: 49) Do you price differently for cash sales?

 A:

Q: 50) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if required

quantity is not found in warehouse)?

 A:

6.5.4. Capacity Planning

6.5.4.1. Capacity Evaluation

Questions:

Q: 1) Is it necessary to determine if a person is available to do a task? (If yes, considerusing employee shift scheduling.)

 A:

Q: 2) Do you want to change capacity/work centers for periods with overload? (If yes,consider changing the work center/assignment/activity dates manually from the evaluationreports.)

 A:

Q: 3) Do you do short term capacity planning? (If yes, ensure the time horizon for thecapacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period. If no, ensure the time horizon for thecapacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period.)

 A:

Page 743: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 743/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you utilize your personnel resources/capacities per process or enterprise-wide? (Ifyes, consider using work center hierarchies.)

 A:

Q: 5) Are resources to be shared across departments (for example plant maintenance andprojects)?

Explanation: If yes, consider how you want to define the priorities between the departmentsand make sure that you can use different order types at the work center.

 A:

Q: 6) Which order type do you want to use for capacity evaluation?

 A:6.5.4.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you process the overload on capacities/wk centers? (If yes, you could use thecapacity leveling functions- dispatching and deallocating).

 A:

Q: 2) Do you prefer to use a graphical planning tool for capacity leveling? (If yes, use thegraphical capacity planning tool If no, consider using the tabular capacity planning tool.)

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to assign available capacities to order operations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 4) When you split order operations, do you want the system to create capacity loadsautomatically for individual people?

Explanation: See the release note for 4.6C: "Automatic Creation of Employee Requirements

Records (Splits)".

 A:

Q: 5) Which type of planning table do you want to use?

 A:

Q: 6) Which planning strategies will you use for Sequencing?

 A:6.5.5. Goods Movements

6.5.5.1. Goods Receipt Processing for Serviceable Material

Page 744: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 744/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Q: 3) To which stock do you post materials at the time of their receipt?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you post goods you receive to stock in quality inspection?the goods wherever they should go as a result of the usage decision?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and whichinspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?

 A:

Q: 6) Against which reference documents do you effect a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 7) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 8) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 10) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

Page 745: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 745/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 13) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit youorder in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 14) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping

instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 17) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 18) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how thegoods are placed into storage).

Explanation: Above all, interesting if R/3 WM is used.

 A:

Q: 19) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Page 746: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 746/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 20) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after theinspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for directconsumption/usage?

 A:

Q: 22) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 23) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Q: 24) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

6.5.5.2. Goods Issue Processing for Returnable Material

Questions:

Q: 1) What triggers a goods issue?

 A:

Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)

 A:

Q: 3) Who posts the goods issue?

 A:

Page 747: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 747/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for theprocess of delivery from projects.)

Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It isalso possible to combine these functions.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you record materials issued from stores?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you document materials supplied by the subcontractors?

 A:

Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which theycan take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post theirwithdrawal in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a workorder?

 A:

Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) fromwhich they take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes

[ ]No

Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 13) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Page 748: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 748/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,available stock, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and whatinformation do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

6.5.5.3. Goods Issue Processing for Serviceable Material

Questions:

Q: 1) What triggers a goods issue?

 A:

Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)

 A:

Q: 3) Who posts the goods issue?

 A:

Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for theprocess of delivery from projects.)

Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It isalso possible to combine these functions.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you record materials issued from stores?

 A:

Page 749: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 749/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) How do you document materials supplied by the subcontractors?

 A:

Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which theycan take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post theirwithdrawal in the system?

 A:

Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?

 A:

Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a workorder?

 A:

Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) fromwhich they take spare parts required for servicing?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in thesystem?

Explanation: Info on process steps.

 A:

Q: 13) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system

 A:

Page 750: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 750/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,available stock, etc.)?

 A:

Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and whatinformation do they contain?

Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is postedsimultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.

 A:

6.5.5.4. Goods Receipt Processing for Returnable Material

Questions:

Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.

Explanation: General introduction to the subject General introduction to the subject

 A:

Q: 2) Name the storage locations to which vendors deliver the goods.

 A:

Q: 3) To which stock do you post materials at the time of their receipt?

 A:

Q: 4) Will you post goods you receive to stock in quality inspection?the goods wherever they should go as a result of the usage decision?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and whichinspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?

 A:

Q: 6) Against which reference documents do you effect a goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 7) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?

 A:

Q: 8) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?

 A:

Page 751: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 751/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 9) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase orderconsidered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?

 A:

Q: 10) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"at a different location than those posted to normal stock?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 12) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!

 A:

Q: 13) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit youorder in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.

 A:

Q: 14) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can beused or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?

 A:

Q: 15) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shippinginstructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 16) Which documents are generated with the goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note on

design of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Q: 17) Which documents are generated in connection with a goods receipt?

Explanation: Note on design of SAPScript documents, message determination Note ondesign of SAPScript documents, message determination

 A:

Page 752: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 752/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 18) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how thegoods are placed into storage).

Explanation: Above all, interesting if R/3 WM is used.

 A:

Q: 19) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person whoenters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?

 A:

Q: 20) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enterthe goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after theinspection has been carried out?

Explanation: QM module

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 21) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for directconsumption/usage?

 A:

Q: 22) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the timeof goods receipt?

Explanation: Batch management Batch management

 A:

Q: 23) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.

 A:

Q: 24) Is the automatic account determination process defined by Financial Accounting? Ifnot, who is responsible within Logistics?

 A:

Q: 25) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?Which information should be included in the printout?

 A:

6.5.6. Service Order

6.5.6.1. Service Order Creation and Processing

Questions:

Page 753: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 753/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 1) What different types of service do you provide (for example, preventive maintenance,repair, installation)? List the service types and outline the differences in planning andexecution.

 A:

Q: 2) How often do you visit the customer for the different service types per month/year?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in asingle form?

 A:

Q: 4) Mark in the following list whether services are performed by internal servicetechnicians and/or sub-contractors.

 A:

Q: 5) When do you plan your service order; what information do you require from thesystem with regard to labor resources (for example, availability of service technician, numberof people, duration of work)?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you proceed with an external assignment with the sub-contractor? Chooseone or more of the following options.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you want to define skills and/or qualifications for order operations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 8) Do you ever have more than one service technician working on the same service?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you want to assign individual operations to particular people?

 A:

Q: 10) Do you want to configure a special search help for partners in your order?

Explanation: For example, a search help for particular people (with particular qualifications),which are assigned to a particular work center. For the partner function of type "Person", it ispossible to set an indicator for a special search help for partners.

 A:

Page 754: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 754/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 11) For which operation types do you want to represent the operation description usingservice specifications?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you provide the service technicians who perform a service with a list of individualactivities (task list)?

 A:

Q: 13) Do you use pre-defined task lists in order planning?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 14) If yes, which of the following types of task lists do you require?

 A:

Q: 15) How do you manage the spare parts required for the service? For example, who

plans the required parts, how will the spare parts arrive at the customer?. Describe theprocess in detail.

 A:

Q: 16) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, dailyrequirements, individual requirements)?

 A:

Q: 17) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning

phase?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you want to generate purchase requisitions and reservations when the order iscreated?

Explanation: You can configure whether reservations and purchase requisitions aregenerated when the order is created or only when the order is released.

 A:

Q: 19) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance orderduring the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 20) Do you want to generate collective purchase requisitions or individual purchaserequisitions for each external item?

 A:

Page 755: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 755/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 21) How do you plan special tools, documents and so on, which are required to executeservice activities?

 A:

Q: 22) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard toworking conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.

 A:

Q: 23) How do you want to prioritize work?

 A:

Q: 24) At which level do you schedule work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification,or an individual person and so on)?

 A:

Q: 25) How exact is your scheduling (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,capacity scheduling)?

 A:

Q: 26) Do you want to use paging in your company as an additional form ofcommunication?

 A:

Q: 27) Do you sell service products for a fixed price?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 28) Do you want to use the service order as the basis for creating quotations for yourcustomers?

 A:

6.5.6.2. Material Planning

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Who performs material planning for orders in your company?

 A:

Page 756: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 756/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, dailyrequirements, individual requirements)?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planningphase?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance orderduring the planning phase?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Is there an approval procedure for external purchase orders and materialwithdrawals? If yes, describe it.

Explanation: Workflow, printing material withdrawal slips, signature rule.

 A:

6.5.6.3. Service Order Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard toworking conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.

 A:

Q: 2) If yes, who in your company is authorized to issue permits?

Explanation: Maintenance of authorizations for the corresponding transactions.

 A:

6.5.6.4. Service Order Release

Questions:

Q: 1) How do you decide that a service is ready to be performed? If necessary, differentiateby service type. Is this decision a separate process step, and who makes the decision?

 A:

6.5.6.5. Service Order Printing

Questions:

Q: 1) Identify the internal papers that you require for the different people and order typesinvolved (for example, job ticket for employee, picking list).

 A:

Page 757: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 757/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Provide some representative layout examples.

Q: 3) Do you assign printers to the people involved?

Explanation: Printers and shop papers can be assigned to specific users.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you send certain external documents to the customer (for example, an orderconfirmation)?

 A:

6.5.6.6. Service Order Execution

Questions:

Q: 1) Note: This process is only for service activities performed manually on technical

systems by the technician.

Explanation: This is only a note.

 A:

Q: 2) How is material withdrawn for the order?

Explanation: Rough decription of process flow, the way in which the employee executing thetask obtains the necessary materials.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you work with closed or open warehouses?

Explanation: Closed warehouses make it necessary to use material withdrawal slips,whereas open warehouses do not. It may be that an approval procedure is required formaterial withdrawal.

 A:

6.5.7. Risk/Credit Management6.5.7.1. Credit Control

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have a current policy on risk management/credit control? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 2) What kinds of risk management do you use?

 A:

Page 758: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 758/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure indetail.

 A:

Q: 4) What department is responsible for monitoring and controlling credit?

 A:

Q: 5) At which organizational level is the responsibility for credit limit assignment?

 A:

Q: 6) If you use other organizational levels, describe them in detail.

 A:

Q: 7) Is credit control carried out in distributed systems?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail tocredit representative)?

 A:

Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management(e.g. sales order, delivery)?

 A:

Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximumdocument value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded(warning, block, error message)?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?

 A:

Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.

 A:

Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,using batch jobs)?

Page 759: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 759/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

6.5.8. Warehouse Management

6.5.8.1. Confirmation of Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Are to-bin transfer orders confirmed separately or automatically by the system?

 A:

Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, andbetween inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destinationbin.

 A:

Q: 3) How are the picking results confirmed?

 A:

Q: 4) Which data is confirmed (e.g. actual time, transport equipment used)?

 A:

Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or takenout of storage manually or automatically?

 A:

6.5.8.2. Difference Processing During Picking

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goodsreceipt?

 A:

Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received(or signature on corrected delivery note)?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transferorder confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?

 A:

Q: 4) How do you react to shortfall quantities (e.g. re-picking)?

 A:

Page 760: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 760/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

6.5.9. Delivery and Transportation

6.5.9.1. Delivery Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packinglist or bill of loading) and what information they contain.

Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide whichinformation (data fields) the documents must contain.

 A:

Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is deliveredfrom?

 A:

Q: 3) How do you determine multiple shipping points?

Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decidewhich shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shippingpoints you would like to overwrite the default with.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you redetermine routes at the time of delivery?

Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for deliveryscheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or schedulingagreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.

 A:

Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading orreplenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.

 A:

Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested deliverydate?

 A:

Q: 7) If you use batches, when do you determine them?

 A:

Page 761: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 761/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 8) How do you determine serial numbers in deliveries, if used?

Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goodsreceipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postagecosts)?

Explanation: Note: It is possible to invoice logisitics costs depending on objects in thedelivery note, such as shipping conditions, packaging, or route. These price elements arethen copied into the invoice. Decide whether and how these logistics costs are determinedautomatically.

 A:

Q: 10) How do you create deliveries?

 A:

Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loadinglist, collective picking)?

 A:

Q: 12) Do you use labels with bar codes? How?

Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaginglevels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on theinformation and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.

 A:

Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?

 A:

Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required

on output?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types thatyou want to print.

 A:

Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appearon an incompletion log if missing?

Page 762: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 762/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: Control Incompletion check

 A:

Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and whatare the rules for creating them?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are therules?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 18) Do you check the available stock of an item in the delivery?

Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATPquantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or shouldit also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for yourcustomers?

 A:

Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?

 A:

Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?

 A:

6.5.9.2. Transportation Planning and Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan transportation yourself?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use any third-party transportation systems?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 763: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 763/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Describe your transportation handling in detail.

 A:

Q: 4) What carriers do you use to transport goods?

 A:

Q: 5) How do you select your carriers?

 A:

Q: 6) How do you create shipments?

 A:

Q: 7) Do you have Individual and/or Collective Shipments?

 A:

Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.road, rail, sea?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need leg determination?

 A:

Q: 10) List all documents required to complete the transportation process.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you record the progress of the shipment?

 A:

Q: 12) If so, which ones?

 A:

Q: 13) Is freight charged to the customers or is it absorbed by the company?

 A:

Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point intime (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?

 A:

Page 764: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 764/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?

 A:

Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?

 A:

Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?

 A:

Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?

 A:

Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?

 A:

Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?

 A:

Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of yourexternal carrier?

 A:

Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.

 A:

Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? Ifso, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?

 A:

Q: 24) What information do these documents contain?

 A:

6.5.10. Completion Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you or your employees enter completion confirmations of time?

Explanation: Time completion confirmations can be entered using IW41 or alternatively, byusing CATS.

 A:

Page 765: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 765/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 2) Who confirms orders in your company?

 A:

Q: 3) How does the service technician confirm the activities that are executed at thecustomer (for example, a service report on paper, over the Internet and so on)?

 A:

Q: 4) At which intervals (e.g., monthly or weekly) and on which level (e.g., one report perengineer or one report per engineer/customer/equipment) will the service enginee r reportback the activities he has performed?

 A:

Q: 5) Are the completion confirmations in your company entered at the level of personnelnumber?

Explanation: This function is required for CATS; it can be used with transaction IW41.

 A:

Q: 6) Should the superior approve the times recorded by the employees?

Explanation: The permit function for completion confirmations is realized using CATS.

 A:

Q: 7) Do you also want to confirm used material at the same time as the time confirmation?

Explanation: This function is limited using CATS, since it involves a jump to the goods issuetransaction in inventory management.

 A:

Q: 8) Should the technical completion (for example, for breakdown times, causes ofdamage, tasks and so on) be made at the same time as the time confirmation?

Explanation: The technical completion confirmation is part of the maintenance or servicenotification. This can be created and saved using transaction IW41.

 A:

Q: 9) Do you also want to enter measurement readings with the completion confirmation?

Explanation: Measurement documents can also be entered at the same time usingtransaction IW41.

Page 766: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 766/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 10) Do you use the integration with the HR module?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you create completion confirmations centrally, or does each employee enter theirown times themselves?

Explanation: A central completion confirmation requires you to issue confirmation slips toyour employees. In some cases, it may also require you to configure the entry using differentorders and people in a screen template.

 A:

Q: 12) Do you issue confirmation slips to your employees?

Explanation: Is required for the entry of a central completion confirmation. Requires printsettings (possibly SAPScript).

 A:

Q: 13) How many times per day do your employees enter their working time?

Explanation: Important for the transfer frequency when using CATS.

 A:

Q: 14) Will you use a Plant Data Collection (PDC) system for your completionconfirmations?

Explanation: On communication channel 3. Only completed time tickets can be confirmed(time interval, duration), but no start/end times (stages).

 A:

Q: 15) Do you enter the working times of contractors? If yes, how should the external

services be entered?

 A:

Q: 16) Do you post trip costs for the service technician to the service order, so that theyshow up in the service order cost report and/or can be invoiced to the customer?

 A:

6.5.10.1. Individual Time Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you enter the absolute duration or period of time (from...to)?

Page 767: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 767/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Do you differentiate the times entered according to other activity types (for example,to distinguish between normal work hours and overtime)?

Explanation: Reconcile with Controlling.

 A:

Q: 3) Is the confirmation of your services person-based?

Explanation: If yes, is there a company agreement?

 A:

Q: 4) In what unit and with what accuracy do you want to enter services?

 A:

6.5.10.2. Overall Completion Confirmation

Questions:

Q: 1) Which employees confirm which data?

Explanation: Configure a profile for the overall completion confirmation.

 A:

Q: 2) Are internal services confirmed?

Explanation: Set overall confirmation profile.

 A:

6.5.10.3. Time Sheet Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) In which systems do you track employee master data? Are wage rates onlymaintained in the R/3 System or in other systems too?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you use this data as a basis for indirect activity allocation to cost objects, costcenters, internal orders and so on?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Page 768: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 768/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 3) Explain how such a time sheet is structured today and how it should be structured infuture (what information do you need on the time sheet?).

 A:

Q: 4) Does everyone who records working time have a personal number in HR? (If not,CATS is not supported.)

Explanation: You require at least one HR mini master record before you can use CATS.

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) Which of your employees should fill out timesheets?

Explanation: Depending on the person entering the information, different time profiles can becreated. For example, an administrator can enter times for many employees.

 A:

Q: 6) How do your employees enter and track working times?

 A:

Q: 7) Are the labor costs calculated based on actual costs or standard rates?

 A:

Q: 8) How do you determine these labor rates?

 A:

Q: 9) Please explain the procedure, how employees in your company track and report timetoday.

Explanation: For example, how do your developers in Research & Development determinethe time available for their projects: manually on paper, manually in Excel and so on?

 A:

Q: 10) In which system do you want to run payroll?

 A:

Q: 11) Are there special conditions for labor costs when employees work in differentcountries or for different profit centers (for example, if an employee from the UK works on aproject in Germany)?

 A:

Page 769: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 769/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 12) Do you enter labor in complete hours or clock time?

 A:

Q: 13) How do your employees enter trip costs? Are the trips linked to the recording ofworking time? Describe in detail.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you use the SAP employee reporting system?

 A:

Q: 15) Identify the different categories of activity (activity types) that you use for estimation,planning and settlement purposes?

 A:

Q: 16) What are the various cost collectors, to which employees will charge time (forexample, cost centers, projects, internal orders)?

 A:

Q: 17) Do sub-contractors and other third party labor sources have to enter work usingtimesheets?

 A:

Q: 18) Are these external services settled to a cost center or directly to the project?

 A:

Q: 19) Do you record overtime?

 A:

Q: 20) How is the cost of overtime calculated? Do you have different types of overtime (forexample, time and a half, double time)?

 A:

Q: 21) Do you track indirect labor hours, such as vacation, sickness, holiday...? If yes,define the categories you require and their entry type.

 A:

Q: 22) Which financial entries do you currently make for your labor distribution?

 A:

Q: 23) How do employees record their working time (time, detail, medium/system)?

Page 770: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 770/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

6.5.10.4. Time Sheet Permit

Questions:

Q: 1) What is your current timesheet approval strategy for employees and externalservices?

Explanation: You can define the selection and layout.

 A:

Q: 2) Explain the permit procedure for working time or recording of activity allocation foryour employees.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you have an external reporting system for working times?

 A:

Q: 4) How many employees does the person responsible for approval manage?

Explanation: Consider using the CATS workflow to automate the approval process.

 A:

6.5.10.5. Forwarding of Time Sheet Data to CS

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer recorded activity allocations to Controlling using the timesheet?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) How often does this transfer take place (daily, weekly and so on)?

 A:

Q: 3) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,employee hours by cost center)?

 A:

6.5.10.6. Time Sheet Report

Questions:

Q: 1) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,employee hours by cost center)?

Page 771: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 771/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 2) Do you need to see days that have not timesheet entries?

Explanation: There is a standard report for missing days.

 A:

Q: 3) Do you need an evaluation, do see the days on which personnel enter more than adefined number of hours?

Explanation: There is a standard report for overtime.

 A:

Q: 4) Do you have to see the employee name in the documents for the receivingcomponent?

Explanation: Consider using a User Exit.

 A:

Q: 5) Do different roles need to see different timesheet information? (If yes, create reportvariants.)

 A:

6.5.10.7. Entry of Technical Findings

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment wasbroken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a servicehistory or to enable further evaluations?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 2) Which technical data should be recorded and who is responsible?

 A:

Q: 3) When do you document technical findings?

Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technicallycompleted?

 A:

Page 772: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 772/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technicalinformation? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want tohave codes.

 A:

6.5.10.8. Measurement Document Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you measure and record the current condition of your equipment in the system (forexample, temperature, pressure, operating time)? Describe the different measuring pointsand counters that you require for the different pieces of equipment.

 A:

Q: 2) How do you proceed if a measurement reading lies outside of a pre-definedmeasurement range?

 A:

6.5.10.9. Measurement Document Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to archive measurement documents? If so,provide a copy of yourdocument archiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

6.5.11. Settlement and Completion

6.5.11.1. Technical Order Completion

Questions:

Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is technically completed and when?

 A:

6.5.11.2. Order Settlement

Questions:

Q: 1) Who settles orders in your company and when?

 A:

Q: 2) How do you want to settle service orders in general?

 A:

Q: 3) How often and according to which rules do you want to settle orders ?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you want to examine your cost elements for the settlement of orders in greaterdetail?

 A:

Page 773: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 773/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) Do you analyze the profitability of single service contracts, including all related servicecosts and service revenues?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 6) Do you intend to have service profitability analysis or profit center analysis within yourcompany?

 A:

Q: 7) If you have a profitability analysis, how is this structured?

 A:

6.5.11.3. Business Order Completion

Questions:

Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is fully completed (business completion) and when?

 A:

Q: 2) Which criteria do you use to decide whether work is fully completed?

 A:

6.5.11.4. Order Archiving

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to archive orders? If so, please provide a copy of your documentarchiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.

 A:

Q: 2) How long do you want to retain orders in the system before they are archived?

 A:

Q: 3) Do you want to archive orders?

Explanation: You can archive orders with or without subsequent archiving.

 A:

6.5.11.5. Historical Service Order - Entry

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to track service work, which has already beencompleted?

 A:

Page 774: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 774/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

6.5.12. Billing

6.5.12.1. Credit Memo Request Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? Ifso, describe it.

 A:

Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 3) What types of adjustments are made in memos?

 A:

6.5.12.2. Billing Request Processing

Questions:

Q: 1) Which department is responsible for billing the customer (for example, servicedepartment, accounting department)?

 A:

Q: 2) Do you already carry out resource-related billing? Do you use transaction VA90 in theprocess?

Explanation: We recommend you create the billing request in resource-related billing usingtransaction DP90 (in CS) or DP91 (in SD). Recommended procedure in the switch from VA90to DP90/DP91: (1) Bill old orders to completion (2) Bill new orders with DP90/DP91 In certaincircumstandes, periodically billed orders require the use of a conversion program (for moredetails, see the documentation or release notes for 4.5 and 4.6). release notes for 4.5 and4.6).

 A:

Q: 3) Do you bill your services at different percentage rates (for example, service hours at100%, material at 50%)?

 A:

Q: 4) Do you invoice the customer periodically for the service contract, and if so, how longis the period?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 5) If you only invoice the customer once, what other criteria do you use to decide whenan invoice is sent to the customer (for example, operating time of equipment)?

 A:

Page 775: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 775/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 6) When do you create the invoices for the customer (for example, at the end of eachperiod, or on specific dates defined by the customer)?

 A:

Q: 7) Does the customer receive one invoice per service contract, or is there one invoice forseveral contracts?

 A:

Q: 8) Is the invoice checked before being sent to the customer?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 9) Do you need the detailed information from the CO line items or is it enough to billsummarized CO totals records?)

Explanation: System performance is better when summarized CO totals records are billed.

 A:

Q: 10) Which sales documents do you want to generated in resource-related billing?

Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): If you are generating a debit memo requestonly, positive and negative expenditures are cleared against each other. If a debit and creditmemo requests are being generated, positive and negative expenditures can be displayed

separately. displayed separately.

 A:

Q: 11) Do you want further summarization of dynamic items during SD documentgeneration? If yes, what characteristics should be used for the summarization?

Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): Required characteristics: object number,transaction currency, units of measure Optional characteristics include cost element, activitytype, cost center A customer exit (Business Adin) is available for you to define your owncharacteristics. characteristics.

 A:

Q: 12) What characteristics should be used to determine the material?

Explanation: For example, determine materials using the cost center or a cost element/costcenter/activity type combination.

 A:

Q: 13) From what sources can expenses originate?

Page 776: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 776/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Explanation: For example: actual costs, statistical key figures, or cash payments. You cancombine the sources. There is a customer exit you can use to define your own sources.define your own sources.

 A:

Q: 14) Do you want to define a particular default rate (in %) for particular sources ofexpense requiring billing? If yes, define the sources and the relevant percentages.

 A:

Q: 15) Do you use specific accounting indicators when confirming expenses (examples:guarantees or grace periods)? If yes, which?

 A:

Q: 16) What do the calculation motives affect?

Explanation: Defined authorization motives can be passed on to price determination.

 A:6.5.12.3. Resource-Related Billing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please

describe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Page 777: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 777/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).

You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Page 778: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 778/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 18) What information do you require in your billing document lists?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or removecolumns.

 A:

Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, afterreview)?

 A:

Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, referencenumber)?

 A:

Q: 21) Describe your payments processes in detail.

 A:

Q: 22) What kind of payments do you receive from the customer?

 A:

Page 779: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 779/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 23) Do you bill customers on a time and material basis? (If yes, consider using resource-related billing.)

 A:

Q: 24) Do you bill internal labor at an hourly, daily rate etc? (If yes, you need to enter theactivity types in Customizing for expense-related billing.)

 A:

Q: 25) Describe the different ways that labor and expense are billed for your projects e.g. islabor billed at fixed billing rates, or as a straight cost plus a markup, or a combination of both,etc.

 A:

Q: 26) Describe your billing process. How often are time and material invoices issued?

 A:

Q: 27) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and theaccounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time andmaterial-related billing in your projects.

 A:

Q: 28) What is the relationship between activities reported against a project and activitiesbilled to the customer?

Explanation: If there is a difference, consider how the price list is used in SD or how a userexit determines a price.

 A:

Q: 29) If subcontractors are used, are they billed as an expense or as internal labor?

 A:

Q: 30) Do you use time and material-related billing? Do you exclude some expenses fromprojects from billing?

 A:

Q: 31) Are the time and materials cost marked up in price for billing?

 A:

Q: 32) Do you have caps on time and material billed?

 A:

Page 780: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 780/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 33) If so, describe the way caps are applied e.g. on the total of labor and expense, onspecific expenses etc.

 A:

Q: 34) Is there an approval process for these project invoices? (If yes, consider usingworkflow and involving the project manager in the process.)

 A:

Q: 35) Do you show detailed info in the invoice for time and material-related billing?Provide us with examples. (If yes, consider using project reports to support the detailrequired.)

 A:

Q: 36) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)

 A:

6.5.12.4. Fixed Price Billing

Questions:

Q: 1) Do you centralize or decentralize your settlement processing?

 A:

Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order ordelivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Pleasedescribe in detail.

Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.

 A:

Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process forreviewing exception messages/error logs.

 A:

Q: 5) How do you determine the send time for output?

Page 781: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 781/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

 A:

Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?

Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so thatinvoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number ofdifferent calendars.

 A:

Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe yourconsolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).

Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries withcertain identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.).You can program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control betweendelivery and invoice.

 A:

Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, creditnotes, debit notes, export invoice)?

 A:

Q: 9) Do you need an invoice for free-of-charge products?

 A:

Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Doyou utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 11) Do you use down payments?

 A:

Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Doyou use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?

 A: [ ]Yes[ ]No

Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?

 A:

Page 782: SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important  ECC modules

8/21/2019 SAP Requirement Gathering Questions for all important ECC modules

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-requirement-gathering-questions-for-all-important-ecc-modules 782/782

Requirement Gathering Questions

Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billingdocuments? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationaryadjustments)?

 A:

Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?

 A:

Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required onoutput?

Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can becopied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. Inaddition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that youwant to print.

 A:

Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?

Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add ordelete columns.

 A:

Q: 18) What information do you require in your billing document lists?